2021 Jeep Wrangler 46

2 02 1 WRAN GL ER
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
202 1 W RA N G L E R
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
21_JL_OM_EN_USC
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
Second Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
used in substitution therefore. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by comply with all local laws.
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s convenient reference source for common questions.
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
use public transportation.
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING!
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
21_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 9 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................107 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................134 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................210 5
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................284 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................344 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................360 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................431
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................443
10
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................447
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS .................................................................. 25 MIRRORS ..............................................................44

Manual Door Locks...................................... 25 Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 44
Symbols Key..........................................................10
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 26 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 44
ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................10 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Outside Mirrors ........................................... 45
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........11 Equipped) .................................................... 26 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 45
Symbol Glossary ...................................................11 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 29 Power Mirrors — If Equipped....................... 45
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Doors ............................................................ 29 (HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ...........................45
KEYS ......................................................................16 Front Door Removal .................................... 30 Before You Begin Programming
Key Fob......................................................... 16 Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ... 32 HomeLink®.................................................. 46
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................18 STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 33 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 46
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................19 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 33 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition..................... 19 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 34 Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 46
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ...20 SEATS ................................................................... 34 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 21 Manual Adjustment Front Seats................. 35 Door Opener................................................. 47
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 22 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Programming HomeLink® To A
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If Models.......................................................... 36 Miscellaneous Device ................................. 48
Equipped ...................................................... 22 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Models.......................................................... 37 Button........................................................... 48
Equipped ..................................................... 22 Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 38 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 48
Remote Start Cancel Message ................... 23 Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ............... 39
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........23 Head Restraints ........................................... 40
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 23 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION....................... 42
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...24 Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 42
To Arm The System ..................................... 24 Basic Voice Commands............................... 43
To Disarm The System ................................ 25 Get Started................................................... 43
Rearming Of The System............................. 25 Additional Information................................. 43
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................49 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 62 FOLDING WINDSHIELD .................................... 100
Headlight Switch .......................................... 49 Storage ......................................................... 62 Lowering The Windshield ..........................101
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If USB/AUX Control ......................................... 62 Raising The Windshield............................. 103
Equipped ..................................................... 49 Power Outlets .............................................. 64 HOOD................................................................... 104
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 50 Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 65 Opening The Hood..................................... 104
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ............... 66 Closing The Hood.......................................104
Control — If Equipped ................................. 50 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED .................. 67 REAR SWING GATE ........................................... 104
Flash-To-Pass ............................................... 50 Auto-Down Feature ..................................... 68 Cargo Area Features .................................105
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 50 Window Lockout Switch .............................. 68 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .......... 105
Lights-On Reminder ..................................... 50 Wind Buffeting ............................................ 68
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ................... 51 WRANGLER TOPS ............................................... 68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
Turn Signals ................................................. 51 Provided Tools ............................................. 68 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 51 Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................51 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................................... 107
Position......................................................... 69
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 51 Raising The Soft Top.................................... 80 Instrument Cluster Descriptions............... 111
Dimmer Controls.......................................... 52 Removing The Soft Top ............................... 83 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................... 111
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............52 Installing The Soft Top................................. 85 Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................... 52 Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal .............. 87 Controls ...................................................... 112
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation .......... 91 Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ............... 113
Equipped ...................................................... 53 Removing The Hard Top.............................. 91 Instrument Cluster Display Menu
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................54 Installing The Hard Top ............................... 93 Items ..........................................................113
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Power Sliding Top — If Equipped ................ 94 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
And Functions .............................................. 54 DOOR FRAME ...................................................... 97 Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And Door Frame Removal .................................. 98 Actions — If Equipped ................................117
Functions...................................................... 57 Door Frame Installation Four Door Diesel Displays .......................................... 118
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Models — If Equipped .................................. 99 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Equipped ...................................................... 59 Door Frame Installation Two Door Messages .................................................. 118
Climate Voice Commands ........................... 60 Models — If Equipped ................................100 Fuel System Messages ............................. 119
Operating Tips ............................................. 60
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 122 STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE (IF FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ................. 154
Red Warning Lights....................................122 EQUIPPED) ..........................................................137 Four-Position Transfer Case — If
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................125 Automatic Transmission............................138 Equipped ...................................................154
Yellow Indicator Lights...............................129 Extreme Cold Weather ..............................138 Five-Position Transfer Case — If
Green Indicator Lights ...............................130 Normal Starting..........................................138 Equipped ....................................................157
White Indicator Lights................................131 Starting Fluids............................................139 Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ............159
Blue Indicator Lights..................................131 NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE........139 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear — If
Gray Indicator Lights..................................132 Cold Weather Precautions ........................140 Equipped ...................................................159
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .... 132 Engine Idling ..............................................141 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only — If
Onboard Diagnostic System Stopping The Engine .................................141 Equipped ...................................................160
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................132 Cooling System Tips — Automatic Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Transmission..............................................142 Equipped ...................................................161
PROGRAMS ........................................................ 132 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .......143 Off Road+ — If Equipped ...........................162
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING ..... 163
STARTING AND OPERATING GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ..................143 STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ...................... 163
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................... 134 DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ........................144 Autostop Mode .......................................... 164
PARKING BRAKE................................................144 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......134
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ......145 Autostop .....................................................164
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...134
Shifting .......................................................146 To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Normal Starting .........................................134
Downshifting ..............................................147 Mode ..........................................................165
AutoPark .....................................................135
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
EQUIPPED ...........................................................148 System........................................................ 165
−30°C) ......................................................137
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
If Engine Fails To Start ..............................137 Ignition Park Interlock ...............................149
System........................................................ 166
After Starting ..............................................137 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System Malfunction................................... 166
System .......................................................149
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission ....149
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE (IF MULTIMEDIA
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................... 166 EQUIPPED) ..........................................................187
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 210
Autostop Mode...........................................166 Fuel Filler Cap ............................................187
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 210
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................188
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 211
Autostop .....................................................167 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE (IF
Customer Programmable Features ......... 211
To Start The Engine While In Autostop EQUIPPED) ..........................................................188
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................. 225
Mode...........................................................167 Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel................188
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System Overview ......................................225
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel ...............189
System........................................................168 Drag & Drop Menu Bar.............................. 227
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................189
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start Safety And General Information ............... 227
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................192
System........................................................168 UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 228
Certification Label .....................................192
System Malfunction...................................168 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................ 228
TRAILER TOWING ..............................................193
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF Radio Mode ...............................................229
Common Towing Definitions .....................193
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 168 Media Mode ..............................................238
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................195
Phone Mode ..............................................241
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................168 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Weight Ratings) .........................................195
Equipped ....................................................170 EQUIPPED ........................................................... 252
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................196
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF Android Auto™ .......................................... 252
Towing Requirements................................196
EQUIPPED ........................................................... 179 Apple CarPlay®.......................................... 254
Towing Tips.................................................198
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
ParkSense Sensors ...................................180 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
And Tricks...................................................256
ParkSense Warning Display......................180 MOTORHOME) ....................................................199
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
ParkSense Display.....................................180 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........182 EQUIPPED .......................................................... 257
Vehicle ........................................................199
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................257
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
System........................................................183 Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Models........................................................200
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............183 Services .....................................................257
DRIVING TIPS......................................................201
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....183 Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
On-Road Driving Tips .................................201
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 184 Services .....................................................259
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................202
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED................ 185 Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ...................... 261
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account ...................................................... 275
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 275 SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Connected Services SOS FAQs ................275 SAFETY FEATURES.............................................284 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 344
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................284 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 344
Unlock FAQs ..............................................276
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...285 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 348
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................293 Preparations For Jacking .........................348
FAQs ...........................................................276
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Jack Location ............................................ 348
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....276
Equipped ...................................................293 Spare Tire Removal ..................................349
Connected Services Vehicle Finder
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Jacking Instructions................................... 349
FAQs ...........................................................276
Mitigation — If Equipped............................297 JUMP STARTING ............................................... 352
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Preparations For Jump Start.....................352
Assistance FAQs ........................................277
(TPMS) ........................................................300 Jump Starting Procedure ..........................354
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................305 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 355
FAQs ...........................................................277
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....305 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 356
FAQs............................................................278 Important Safety Precautions...................305 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 357
Connected Services Account FAQs...........278 Seat Belt Systems .....................................305 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 357
Data Collection & Privacy ..........................280 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...312 Four Wheel Drive Models..........................358
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 281 Child Restraints .........................................326 Without The Key Fob .................................359
SAFETY TIPS .......................................................341 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ..... 359
Regulatory And Safety Information...........281
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................. 281 Transporting Passengers ..........................341 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
Transporting Pets ......................................341 (EARS) ................................................................ 359
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ......................282
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 359
Drivetrain ...................................................282
The Vehicle ................................................341
Accessory Gauge .......................................283
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Pitch & Roll ................................................283
Outside The Vehicle...................................342
TrailCam — If Equipped..............................283
Exhaust Gas ...............................................343
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................343
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............379 INTERIORS ......................................................... 424
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................380 Carpet Safety Information.........................424
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
Body Lubrication ........................................382 Carpet Removal ......................................... 425
ENGINE ............................................................... 360
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................382 Seats And Fabric Parts.............................. 429
Maintenance Plan......................................361 Exhaust System ........................................384 Plastic And Coated Parts...........................430
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE .. 364 Cooling System ..........................................385 Leather Surfaces .......................................430
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Brake System ............................................389 Glass Surfaces .......................................... 430
Biodiesel.....................................................365 Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................390
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20 Transfer Case ............................................390 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Biodiesel.....................................................367 Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........390
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 368 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ............... 431
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...391
2.0L Gasoline Engine ...............................368 BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................. 431
Fuses .........................................................392
3.6L Gasoline Engine ...............................369 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
Bulb Replacement .....................................400
3.0L Diesel Engine.....................................370 SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 431
TIRES ..................................................................404
Checking Oil Level......................................371 Torque Specifications................................431
Tire Safety Information..............................404
Adding Washer Fluid..................................371 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
Tires — General Information .....................410
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................371 Tire Types ...................................................415 ENGINE................................................................ 432
Pressure Washing......................................372 Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................415 2.0L Engine................................................ 432
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 372 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................417 3.6L Engine................................................ 432
Engine Oil ..................................................372 Snow Traction Devices .............................418 Reformulated Gasoline ............................. 433
Engine Oil Filter..........................................373 Tire Rotation Recommendations .............419 Materials Added To Fuel ...........................433
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................374 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................433
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter — TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................................420 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Diesel Engine .............................................375 Vehicles ...................................................... 433
Treadwear ..................................................420
Fuel Filter Replacement — Diesel CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..434
Traction Grades .........................................420
Engine.........................................................376 MMT In Gasoline........................................434
Temperature Grades .................................420
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel System Cautions................................434
STORING THE VEHICLE......................................421
Fuel — Diesel Engine ................................378 FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ...... 434
BODYWORK ........................................................422
Intervention Regeneration Strategy — Diesel Fuel Specifications.........................435
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......422
Message Process Flow .............................378 Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................435
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........422
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................379
Preserving The Bodywork..........................422
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 437 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................443 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 445
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................. 438 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................443 MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 445
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............. 442 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........443 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 445
Mexico ........................................................443 In The 50 United States And
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............444 Washington, D.C. .......................................445
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or In Canada...................................................445
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................444 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 445
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 443
Service Contract .......................................444 General Information.......................................... 446
Prepare For The Appointment...................443
Prepare A List.............................................443
Be Reasonable With Requests .................443
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, 1
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 201.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All
data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of
the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
10
SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

These statements are against operating proce- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
WARNING! dures that could result in a collision, bodily vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center
injury and/or death. of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better
These statements are against procedures that in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
CAUTION! vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if
could result in damage to your vehicle.
this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may
A suggestion which will improve installation, not.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
result in damage.
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
TIP:
use of the product or functionality. or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information per-
taining to the topic.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important Rollover Warning Label
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that
the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death
toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
11
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly

Red Warning Lights
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Door Open Warning Light 1

Ú page 123
WARNING!
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its Light
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in seri- Ú page 123
ous injury or death.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Ú page 123
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the Ú page 124
definition of each symbol Ú page 111.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Warning Lights Ú page 124
Air Bag Warning Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 122
Ú page 124
Brake Warning Light
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 122
Ú page 124
Battery Charge Warning Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 123
Ú page 123
12
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Swing Gate Open Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 124 Ú page 126
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Equipped
Ú page 126
Ú page 124
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped Light (MIL)
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warn-
Yellow Warning Lights ing Light — If Equipped
Ú page 127
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 125 Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 127
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 125 — If Equipped
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Ú page 127
Light — If Equipped Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Ú page 126 Equipped
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Ú page 127
Equipped
Ú page 126
13
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Light — If Equipped
1
Ú page 127
Ú page 129
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warn-
ing Light Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights
Ú page 129
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light —
Ú page 129
If Equipped
Ú page 129
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129 Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129 Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 129
14
Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Ú page 130
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Indicator Lights Ú page 131
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Tar-
get Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Indicator Lights
Ú page 130
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped If Equipped
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped With A
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped Premium Instrument Cluster
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
With A Premium Instrument Cluster Equipped
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Equipped
Ú page 130
Ú page 131
15
White Indicator Lights Blue Indicator Lights

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
High Beam Indicator Light 1
Ú page 131
Ú page 131
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Base Instrument Cluster Gray Indicator Lights
Ú page 131 Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 132
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS NOTE:
WARNING!
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
KEY F OB if the key fob is located next to a mobile Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which phone, laptop, or other electronic device. with the key fob facing away from your body,
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry This may result in poor performance. especially your eyes and objects that may be
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), and  With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at damaged, such as clothing.
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
you to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate disabled. CAUTION!
from distances up to approximately 66 ft
The electrical components inside of the key
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed
fob may be damaged if the key fob is sub-
at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
jected to strong electrical shocks. In order to
fob also contains a mechanical key.
ensure complete efficiency of the electronic
devices inside of the key fob, avoid exposing
the key fob to direct sunlight.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
2 — LED Indicator
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
3 — Unlock Button
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Panic Button NOTE: 2
6 — Lock Button All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button through the
NOTE: Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
 In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key The recommended replacement battery is
fob battery condition may be indicated by a CR2450.
message in the instrument cluster display, or
by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key NOTE:
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob  Customers are recommended to use a
button pushes, then the key fob battery battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
requires replacement. coin battery dimensions may not meet the
 Improper disposal of key fob batteries may original OEM coin battery dimensions.
be harmful to the environment. Please see  Perchlorate Material — special handling may
an authorized dealer for proper battery apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
disposal Ú page 446. ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate on the back housing or the printed circuit
Push and release the unlock button on the key board.
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to  When a key fob battery is low, a warning will
unlock all the doors and swing gate. To lock all be indicated on the vehicle’s instrument
Key Fob the doors, push the lock button once. cluster, and the fob LED will no longer illumi-
nate with a button press.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the back cover of the fob by  Only key fobs that are programmed to the
inserting a flat-blade screw driver into the vehicle electronics can be used to start and
slot on the bottom of the fob. Pry until the operate the vehicle.
cover unsnaps being careful not to
damage the seal. Proceed WARNING!
counter-clockwise to pry the remaining  Always remove the key fobs from the
snaps until the battery cover can be vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
removed. vehicle unattended.
 Always remember to place the ignition in
Battery Replacement the OFF mode.
3. Install the new battery into the key fob,
making sure the positive (+) side is facing Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
up. Slide the battery until it is seated authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
securely below the tabs. programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it
is properly aligned before snapping it back NOTE:
in place.  When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
Programming And Requesting Additional you to an authorized dealer.
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a
Key Fobs  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery
removal slot and sliding the battery forward Programming the key fob may be performed by to match the vehicle locks.
and up being careful not to damage the an authorized dealer.
electronic board underneath. SENTRY KEY
NOTE:
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
engine. The system does not need to be armed
another vehicle.
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless

of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
CAUTION!
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to compatible with some aftermarket remote
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. starting systems. Use of these systems may
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed result in vehicle starting problems and loss of 2
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate security protection.
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off
in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to All of the key fobs provided with your new
start the engine. vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
START/STOP Ignition Button
electronics.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN 1 — OFF
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for NOTE: 2 — ACC
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light A key fob that has not been programmed is also 3 — RUN
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates considered an invalid key Ú page 446.
that there is a problem with the electronics. In The push button ignition can be placed in the
addition, if the light begins to flash after the IGNITION SWITCH following modes:
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an OFF
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of  The engine is stopped.
these conditions will result in the engine being If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.  Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
shut off after two seconds.
alarm, etc.) are available.
If the vehicle security light turns on during This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long ACC
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.  Engine is not started.
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, The START/STOP ignition button has several  Some electrical devices are available.
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by operating modes that are labeled and will
an authorized dealer. illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
RUN
WARNING! CAUTION!
 Driving position.
 All electrical devices are available.
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehi-
START
vehicle. cle and lock all doors when leaving the vehi-
 The engine will start. cle unattended.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
NOTE: with access to an unlocked vehicle.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-  Information on normal starting Ú page 134.
the push of the START/STOP ignition button, the
tended is dangerous for a number of
key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In  When opening the driver's door with the igni-
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
this situation, a backup method can be used to tion in the ON/RUN position (engine not
or fatally injured. Children should be
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of running), a chime will sound to remind you to
warned not to touch the parking brake,
the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key) place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
brake pedal or the gear selector.
against the START/STOP ignition button and tion to the chime, the message will display
push to operate the ignition switch.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the “Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
(GASOLINE)
power windows, other controls, or move the This system uses the key fob to start
vehicle. the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
 Do not leave children or animals inside
security. The system has a range of
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
328 ft (100 m).
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death. Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
Backup Starting Method weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE: twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
 The vehicle must be equipped with an auto- will shut the engine off. pushed)
matic transmission to be equipped with  Battery at an acceptable charge level
NOTE:
Remote Start.  Panic button not pushed
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run
 Obstructions between the vehicle and key
for 15 minutes.  System not disabled from previous Remote 2
fob may reduce this range Ú page 446. Start event
 Remote Start can only be used twice.
 Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
WARNING!  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down  Ignition in OFF position
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed
in 10 seconds.  Fuel level meets minimum requirement
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is  The park lamps will turn on and remain on  All removable doors must not be removed
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is during Remote Start mode.  Malfunction Indicator Light not illuminated
poisonous and can cause serious injury or  For security, power window operation is
death when inhaled. disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote WARNING!
Start mode.  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
 Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
door locks or other controls could cause position before the Remote Start sequence contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
serious injury or death. can be repeated for a third cycle. odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
All of the following conditions must be met poisonous and can cause serious injury or
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART before the engine will remote start: death when inhaled.
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”  Gear selector in PARK  Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
for additional information.  Doors closed tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
Push and release the Remote Start button on door locks or other controls could cause
 Hood closed
serious injury or death.
the key fob twice within five seconds. The  Swing gate closed
vehicle doors and swing gate will lock, the turn  Hazard switch off
signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE Button” will display in the instrument cluster The vehicle will adjust the climate control
display until you push the START/STOP igni- settings depending on the outside ambient
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
tion button. temperature.
for additional information.
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Start system, either push and release the ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the The climate controls automatically adjust to an
When remote start is active, and the outside
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless optimal temperature and mode, dependent on
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door the outside ambient temperature. When the
the system will automatically activate front
handles, and disarm the vehicle security system ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the climate controls will resume their previous
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/ settings.
the timer expires, the system will automatically
STOP ignition button. adjust the settings depending on ambient Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems Equipped
with another push and release of the Remote — If Equipped” in the next section for detailed  In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is operation. below, the climate settings will default to
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
position, the climate controls will resume the I F E QUIPPED vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
previously set operations (temperature, blower When remote start is activated, the front and  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
control, etc.). rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver based on the last settings selected by the
NOTE: driver.
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect  In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
system will disable for two seconds after Settings Ú page 211. In warm weather, the above, the climate settings will default to
receiving a valid Remote Start request. driver vented seat feature will automatically MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless turn on when the remote start is activated and on.
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the is programmed in the comfort menu screen.
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate

control settings, see Ú page 54.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) WARNING!
This system uses the key fob to start  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
NOTE: the engine conveniently from outside garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
These features will stay on through the duration the vehicle while still maintaining contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in security. The system has a range of odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is 2
the ON/RUN position. The climate control approximately 300 ft (91 m). poisonous and can cause serious injury or
settings will change, and exit the automatic Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold death when inhaled.
defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This  Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
all ambient conditions before the driver enters tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
includes turning the climate controls off using the vehicle.
the OFF button. door locks or other controls could cause
NOTE: serious injury or death.
REMOTE START C ANCEL MESSAGE
 The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
The following messages will display in the matic transmission to be equipped with
HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote Remote Start. Push and release the Remote Start button on
start or exits remote start prematurely: the key fob twice within five seconds. The
 Obstructions between the vehicle and the
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open key fob may reduce this range. vehicle doors and swing gate will lock, the turn
 Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp
 The Remote Start system will wait for the
 Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again
Wait To Start Indicator Light Ú page 122 to
will shut the engine off.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open extinguish before cranking the engine. This
 Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired allows time for the engine pre-heat cycle to NOTE:
pre-heat the cylinder air, and is normal in  With Remote Start, the engine will only run
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
cold weather. for 15 minutes.
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is  Remote Start can only be used twice.
placed in the ON/RUN position.  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
 The park lamps will turn on and remain on  Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illumi- the following audible and visible signals: the
during Remote Start mode. nated horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
 For security, power window operation is  Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated signals will flash, and the vehicle security light
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote in the instrument cluster will flash.
Start mode. WARNING!
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN  Do not start or run an engine in a closed Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
position before the Remote Start sequence garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
system:
can be repeated for a third cycle. contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
All of the following conditions must be met
poisonous and can cause serious injury or in the OFF position Ú page 134.
before the engine will remote start:
 Gear selector in PARK
death when inhaled. 2. Perform one of the following methods to
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera- lock the vehicle:
 Doors closed 
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,  Push lock on the interior power door lock
 Hood closed
door locks or other controls could cause switch with the driver and/or passenger
 Swing gate closed
serious injury or death. door open.
 Hazard switch off
 Push the lock button on the exterior
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
pushed)
The Vehicle Security system monitors the fob available in the same exterior zone
 Battery at an acceptable charge level
vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Ú page 26.
 Panic button not pushed ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
 Push the lock button on the key fob.
 Fuel meets minimum requirement When the alarm is activated, the interior
 System not disabled from previous Remote switches for door locks are disabled. The 3. If any doors are open, close them.
Start event Vehicle Security system provides both audible
and visible signals. If something triggers the NOTE:
 Vehicle Security system not active
alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
 Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated lock the doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will To unlock the door, push the rocker lever
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, rearward.
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
using any of the following methods:
 Push the unlock button on the key fob. REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM
 Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if If something triggers the alarm, and no action is 2
equipped) Ú page 26. taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
 Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5
OFF position. seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the
trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
NOTE: Security system will rearm itself.
 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. DOORS Manual Door Lock
 When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
CAUTION! NOTE:
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors. Careless handling and storage of the remov- The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
The Vehicle Security system is designed to able door panels may damage the seals, unlock the doors, swing gate (if equipped with a
protect your vehicle. However, you can create causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte- lock), glove compartment, and console storage.
conditions where the system will give you a false rior.
WARNING!
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security MANUAL D OOR L OCKS  For personal security reasons and safety in
system will arm regardless of whether you are in All doors are equipped with an interior a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door when drive, as well as when you park and exit the
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever vehicle.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. forward to the lock position and close the door. (Continued)
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

 When exiting the vehicle, always switch off  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
the ignition and remove the key from the tended is dangerous for a number of
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- reasons. A child or others could be seriously
ment may cause severe personal injuries or fatally injured. Children should be
and death. warned not to touch the parking brake,
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or brake pedal or the gear selector.
with access to an unlocked vehicle.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the
Power Door Lock Switch vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of dren. A child could operate power windows,
WARNING! other controls, or move the vehicle.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be  For personal security reasons and safety in
warned not to touch the parking brake, a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
brake pedal or the gear selector. drive, as well as when you park and exit the E NTRY (I F EQUIPPED)
vehicle. The Passive Entry system is a feature that
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-  When exiting the vehicle, always switch off allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
dren. A child could operate power windows, the ignition and remove the key from the door(s) and swing gate without having to push
other controls, or move the vehicle. vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
ment may cause severe personal injuries
NOTE:
POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED and death.
 Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
The power door lock switch is located on each  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or within the Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
front door panel. Push the switch forward to with access to an unlocked vehicle.
 The key fob may not be detected by the
unlock the doors, and rearward to lock the (Continued) vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
doors.
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may interfere
with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a
the Passive Entry system from locking/ START/STOP ignition. There are three situations
unlocking the vehicle. that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
 Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated entry vehicle:
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,  A lock request is made by a valid Passive
position lamps) for whichever time duration Entry key fob while a door is open.
2
is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.  A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two door handle while a door is open.
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
 A lock request is made by the door panel
 If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ Grab The Door Handle To Unlock switch while the door is open.
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
NOTE: When any of these situations occur, after all
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlock” is programmed open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
resulting in a slower response time.
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
front driver’s door handle. You can select inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the alert the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” within Uconnect using Uconnect system, the key protection
the Vehicle Security system.
Settings Ú page 211. described in this section remains active/
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side functional.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(FOBIK-Safe) NOTE:
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door To minimize the possibility of unintentionally The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a
handle will unlock the driver door automatically. locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
all doors and the swing gate automatically. with an automatic door unlock feature which vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
will function only if the ignition switch is in the following conditions are true:
OFF position.  A second valid passive entry key fob is
detected outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of a passive entry door handle).
 The doors are manually locked using the door select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
lock knobs. and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” within
 Three attempts are made to lock the doors Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
using the door panel switch, and then the
doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, pushing the passive entry
lock button will lock the vehicle doors and the DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
swing gate. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
To Lock The Swing Gate
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
built into the swing gate handle. With a valid
(1.5 m) of the swing gate handle, pushing the
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle
swing gate handle, grab the swing gate handle
doors and the swing gate.
to unlock the swing gate automatically, and pull
the swing gate to open. NOTE:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock NOTE:  After pushing the door handle button, you
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed must wait two seconds before you can lock or
NOTE: all doors & the swing gate will unlock when you unlock the doors, using any Passive Entry
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the grab hold of the swing gate handle. You can door handle. This is done to allow you to
door handle lock button. This could unlock the check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door(s). door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
 If Passive Entry is disabled using the To use the system, open each rear door, use a  After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
Uconnect Settings, the key protection flat blade screwdriver (or mechanical key) and system, always test the door from the inside
described in "Frequency Operated Button rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. to make certain it is in the locked position.
Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/  For emergency exit with the system engaged,
functional. move the lock lever rearward (located on the
 The Passive Entry system will not operate if door trim panel), roll down the window and 2
the key fob battery is depleted Ú page 446. open the door with the outside door handle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF WARNING!
EQUIPPED Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli-
The Automatic Door Lock feature default sion. Remember that the rear doors can only
condition is enabled. When enabled, the door be opened from the outside when the Child-
locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's Protection locks are engaged (locked).
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or NOTE:
NOTE:
disabled by an authorized dealer per written Always use this device when carrying children.
request of the customer. Please see an  When the Child-Protection Door Lock system After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
authorized dealer for service. is engaged, the door can be opened only by check for effective engagement by trying to
using the outside door handle even though open a door with the internal handle. Once the
CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi- Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
SYSTEM — R EAR D OORS tion. it is impossible to open the doors from inside
To provide a safer environment for small  After disengaging the Child-Protection Door the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors Lock system, always test the door from the sure to check that there is no one left inside.
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
system. position.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the

doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see
WARNING! an authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires
the doors removed as you will lose the protec- outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
tion they can provide. This procedure is fur- NOTE:
nished for use during off-road operation only.
 Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
 Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
Hinge Pin Screw
door reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb /
10 N·m). For off-road driving tips, see 3. Remove the plastic wiring access door
Ú page 202. under the instrument panel by sliding the
plastic panel along the door frame toward
 When front doors are removed, the message
the seats until the tabs are detached.
“Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
Power Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also
be unavailable.
Door Removal Warning Label
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
WARNING! damage.
 All occupants must wear seat belts during 2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
off-road operation with doors removed. For upper and lower outside hinges (using a
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 202. #T50 Torx head driver).
 Do not store detached doors inside of the NOTE:
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in Wiring Access Door
in the event of an accident. the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
NOTE:
Do not pry back to open, as this will break the
plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the
wiring harness.
2
Open Wiring Harness Door Check (Detached)

1 – Wiring Harness 8. With the door open, lift the door with the
2 – Black Security Tab help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
6. With the wiring harness open, pull
downward on the wiring connector to To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
Closed Wiring Harness unplug. Store the wiring connector in the steps in the reverse order.
1 – Locking Tab lower door basket.
NOTE:
2 – Wiring Harness 7. Remove the check screw from the center The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
door check (using a #T40 Torx head driver). used to assist in guiding the door into place
5. Push and hold down the black security tab
under the wiring harness, and lift the when reinstalling.
harness into the open position.
REAR DOOR REMOVAL (F OUR-DOOR WARNING! (Continued)

MODELS)
 Do not store detached doors inside of the
WARNING! vehicle, as they may cause personal injury
in the event of an accident.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the protec- NOTE:
tion they can provide. This procedure is fur-
 Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
nished for use during off-road operation only.
them.
 Hinge pin can break if overtightened during Hinge Pin Screw
door reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb /
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
10 N·m). For off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 202. 4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any access door from the bottom of the B-pillar.
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
Door Removal Warning Label
NOTE:
WARNING! The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
 All occupants must wear seat belts during floor.
off-road operation with doors removed. For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 202. Wiring Access Door
(Continued)
5. Unplug the wiring connector. STEERING WHEEL

NOTE: TILT/TELESCOPING S TEERING COLUMN
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring
harness. This will unlock the connector tab, This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
allowing the wiring connector to be unplugged. 2
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located on the steering
column.
Door Check (Attached)

7. With the door open, lift the door with the
help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous

Wiring Connector steps in the reverse order.
6. Remove the check screw from the center NOTE:
door check (using a #T40 Torx head driver). The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
used to assist in guiding the door into place
To unlock the steering column, push the control
when reinstalling.
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To

lock the steering column in position, push the
 Push the heated steering wheel button SEATS
once to turn the heating element on.
control handle upward until fully engaged. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
 Push the heated steering wheel button a System of the vehicle.
WARNING! second time to turn the heating element off.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driv- NOTE:
ing. Adjusting the steering column while driv- The engine must be running for the heated  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
ing or driving with the steering column steering wheel to operate. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con- For information on use with the Remote Start people riding in these areas are more likely
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn- system, see Ú page 22. to be seriously injured or killed.
ing may result in serious injury or death.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of
WARNING! your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — IF  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
EQUIPPED skin because of advanced age, chronic in these areas are more likely to be seri-
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica- ously injured or killed.
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
The heated steering wheel has only one ical conditions must exercise care when and using a seat belt properly.
temperature setting. Once the heated steering using the steering wheel heater. It may
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.  Do not place anything on the steering wheel
The heated steering wheel control button is that insulates against heat, such as a
located within the climate or controls screen of blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
the touchscreen. and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT FRONT S EATS WARNING!

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward  Adjusting a seat while driving may be
Adjustment dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward could result in loss of control which could
by using a bar located by the front of the seat cause a collision and serious injury or 2
cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, death.
lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion  Seats should be adjusted before fastening
and move the seat forward or rearward. the seat belts and while the vehicle is
Release the bar once you have reached the parked. Serious injury or death could result Seat Height Adjustment
desired position. Then, using body pressure, from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
move forward and rearward on the seat to be Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
sure that the seat adjusters have latched. Manual Seat Height Adjustment To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and
The driver's seat height can be raised or lean forward or backward, depending on the
lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located direction you would like the seatback to move.
on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on Release the strap when the desired position is
the handle to raise the seat, push downward on reached and the seatback will lock into place.
the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired
position.
Adjustment Bar Location
Recline Strap
WARNING!
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two 60/40 S PLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT —
Door Models FOUR DOOR MODELS
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against To provide additional storage area, each rear
the outboard side of the seat back, and slide seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
your chest. In a collision you could slide under the entire seat forward.
the seat belt, which could result in serious cargo space.
injury or death. NOTE:
 Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
Lumbar Support
and positioned forward. This will allow the
The lumbar control knob is located on the rear seat to fold down easily.
outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate
 The center head restraints must be in the
the control forward to increase and rearward to
lowest position to avoid contact with the
decrease the desired amount of lumbar
center console when folding the seat.
support.
WARNING!
Easy Entry Lever  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat collision, people riding in these areas are
rearward until the track locks. more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
NOTE:  Do not allow people to ride in any area of
 The front passenger seats have a track
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
memory, which returns the seat to its original and seat belts.
position.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
Lumbar Control Knob  The recline strap and easy entry lever should and using a seat belt properly.
not be used during the automatic returning of
the seat to its sitting position.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat NOTE: FOLD A ND T UMBLE REAR S EAT — TWO
There are two release levers located on each You may experience deformation in the seat D OOR MODELS
upper outboard side of the rear seat. The larger cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
of the two release levers folds down the seat are left folded for an extended period of time. NOTE:
and the head restraint simultaneously. The This is normal. By simply opening the seats to  Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
the open position, the seat cushion will return to 2
smaller lever folds down the head restraint sary to reposition the front seats.
independently for improved visibility. its normal shape over time.  Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release To Raise The Rear Seat and positioned forward. This will allow the
lever and slowly fold down the seatback. The rear seat to fold down easily.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then,
head restraint will fold automatically with the raise the head restraint until it locks into place. Folding The Rear Seat
seat when this lever is pulled. If interference from the cargo area prevents the 1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback from fully locking, you will have seatback forward.
difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
Seatback Release Lever
seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Using The Retention Straps Removing The Rear Seat

WARNING!
1. There are two retention straps located on 1. Push down on the release bar on each
the back of the rear seat and two side, and pull the seat out and away from  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
corresponding wire loops located on the the lower bracket. area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
back of each B-pillar. Open the collision, people riding in these areas are
hook-and-loop fastener on the strap and more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
thread through the wire loop. Fold the  Do not allow people to ride in any area of
hook-and-loop fastener over to keep the your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
seat in the folded position. This should be and seat belts.
done on both sides.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
 In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
Release Bar Location latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure that the seats are fully latched.
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED
steps.
The heated seat control buttons are located on
NOTE: the center instrument panel below the
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
2. To return the seat to its normal upright rear seat latches. touchscreen menu.
position, reverse these steps.
For information on use with the Remote Start

system, see Ú page 22.
WARNING!
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
2
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
Heated Seat Buttons using the seat heater. It may cause burns Rear Seat Armrest
even at low temperatures, especially if
 Push the heated seat button once to turn used for long periods of time. NOTE:
the HI setting on. The cupholder liner can be removed for
 Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
 Push the heated seat button a second cleaning.
back that insulates against heat, such as a
time to turn the MED setting on. blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat WARNING!
 Push the heated seat button a third time heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
to turn the LO setting on. been overheated could cause serious Be certain that the seatback is securely
burns due to the increased surface locked into position. If the seatback is not
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time
temperature of the seat. securely locked into position the seat will not
to turn the heating elements off.
provide the proper stability for child seats
NOTE: REAR SEAT A RMREST — IF E QUIPPED and/or passengers. An improperly latched
 The engine must be running for the heated seat could cause serious injury.
The center part of the rear seat can also be
seats to operate. used as a rear armrest with cupholders. To
 The level of heat selected will stay on until unfold it, grab the pull strap under the head
the operator changes it. restraint and pull it forward.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS on the head restraint. The release button does

WARNING!
not need to be pushed to adjust the head
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
restraint.  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
of injury by restricting head movement in the
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it collision or hard stop could cause serious
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
can go then push the adjustment button and injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
the release button at the base of each post Always securely stow removed head
is located above the top of your ear.
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall restraints in a location outside the occu-
WARNING! the head restraint, put the head restraint posts pant compartment.
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust  ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
 All occupants, including the driver, should
it to the appropriate height. stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their occupants. Follow the re-installation
proper positions in order to minimize the risk instructions above prior to operating the
of neck injury in the event of a crash. vehicle or occupying a seat.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted NOTE:

while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a Do not reposition the head restraint 180
vehicle with the head restraints improperly degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
adjusted or removed could cause serious to gain additional clearance to the back of the
injury or death in the event of a collision. head.
Front Head Restraints Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models

Front Head Restraint
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable,
1 — Release Button
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, but foldable head restraints.
2 — Adjustment Button
push the adjustment button located on the To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward release strap located on the upper outboard
side of each rear seat.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the

WARNING! inner release lever, located on the upper part of
 Do not drive the vehicle without the rear the rear seat.
seat head restraints installed while passen-
gers are occupying the rear seat. In a colli-
sion, people riding in this area without the 2
head restraints installed are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment. Rear Head Restraint Lever
 ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the reinstallation instruc-
tions above prior to operating the vehicle or
occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints Folded Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models
To return the head restraint to its upward The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable,
position, lift up on the head restraint until it but foldable, outboard head restraints, as well
locks into place. as an adjustable, removable center head
Rear Head Restraint Folded
For information on child seat tether routing restraint.
To return the head restraint to its upward
Ú page 305.
position, lift up on the head restraint until it
locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the

head restraint. To lower the center head WARNING! (Continued)
restraint, push the adjustment button, located  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
at the base of the head restraint, and push collision or hard stop could cause serious
down on the head restraint. injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
To remove the center head restraint, push the Always securely stow removed head
release button, located on the base of the head restraints in a location outside the occu-
restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint. pant compartment.
To install the head restraint, hold the release  ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
button while pushing downward on the head stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
restraint. For information on child seat tether occupants. Follow the reinstallation instruc-
routing Ú page 305. tions above prior to operating the vehicle or
occupying a seat.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
with the center console when folding the seat
down. I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
WARNING! these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
 Do not drive the vehicle without the rear Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
seat head restraints installed while passen- control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
gers are occupying the rear seat. In a colli- system.
sion, people riding in this area without the
head restraints installed are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
GET S TARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and 2
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first 1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
push the VR button, wait until after the beep, Send Or Receive A Text
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display then say your Voice Command. 2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS  You can interrupt the help message or Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
system prompts by pushing the VR button 3 — Push To End Call
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
and saying a Voice Command from the
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
current category. ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say: © 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
Commands. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 446.
again.
For Uconnect system support, call
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
Voice Recognition system’s status. week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through Uconnect Settings
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to Ú page 211.
Manual Mirror — If Equipped center on the view through the rear window.
CAUTION!
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
glare from vehicles behind you.
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly
center on the view through the rear window. NOTE: onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
reduced by moving the small control under the when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of driver’s view. I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
while set in the day position (toward the one of the visors and lift the cover.
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Vanity Mirror
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the These mirrors are heated to melt frost
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve or ice. This feature will be activated Using the mirror control switch, push any of the
the optimal view. whenever you turn on the rear window four arrows for the direction that you want the
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 54. mirror to move.
2
POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The power mirror controls are located on the
door panel next to the door handle.
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
Outside Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas-
senger side convex mirror will look smaller HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Power Mirror Switch
and farther away than they really are. Relying Use this QR code to access your
too much on your passenger side mirror could The power mirror controls consist of mirror
digital experience.
cause you to collide with another vehicle or select buttons and a four-way mirror control
other object. Use your inside mirror when switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the passenger side mirror.
 HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held Make sure your hand-held transmitter is I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
transmitters that operate devices such as programmed to activate the device you are R OLLING C ODE O R N ON-R OLLING C ODE
garage door openers, motorized gates, trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
lighting, or home security systems. The DEVICE
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles garage before you begin programming. Before programming a device to one of your
12 Volt battery. HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
It is recommended that you erase all the
 The HomeLink® buttons that are located in whether the device has a rolling code or
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
the overhead console or sunvisor designate non-rolling code.
for the first time.
the three different HomeLink® channels. Rolling Code Devices
 To operate HomeLink®, push and release
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. C HANNELS good indicator is its manufacturing date.
These buttons will activate the devices they To erase the channels, follow this procedure: Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
are programmed to with each press of the have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
corresponding HomeLink® button. will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
position.
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located located where the antenna is attached to the
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
above the center button. device. The button may not be immediately
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
visible when looking at the device. The name
NOTE: until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
and color of the button may vary slightly by
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
NOTE: manufacturer.
rity system is active Ú page 446.
Erasing all channels should only be performed NOTE:
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING when programming HomeLink® for the first The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
HOMELINK® time. Do not erase channels when programming you normally use to operate the device.
For efficient programming and accurate additional buttons.
Non-rolling Code Devices
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
recommended that a new battery be placed in
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A NOTE: Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final

Make sure the garage door opener motor is Steps
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/ 1. Push and hold the programmed
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to non-rolling code final steps. HomeLink® button and observe the
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps HomeLink® indicator light. If the
the steps below:
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
2
NOTE:
NOTE: constantly, programming is complete.
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using 2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
this procedure. You do not need to erase all to confirm that the garage door opener
final step 1.
channels when programming additional motor operates. If the garage door opener
buttons. 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN from the beginning.
button. This can usually be found where
position.
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter the garage door opener motor. Firmly push WARNING!
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”  Your motorized door or gate will open and
HomeLink® button you wish to program, button. close while you are programming the
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
2. Return to the vehicle and push the universal transceiver. Do not program the
light in view.
programmed HomeLink® button three transceiver if people or pets are in the path
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you times (holding the button for two seconds of the door or gate.
want to program while you push and hold each time). If the garage door opener motor  Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
the garage door opener transmitter button operates, programming is complete. or confined area while programming the
you are trying to replicate.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe to confirm that the garage door opener contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
the HomeLink® indicator light. The motor operates. If the garage door opener odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly motor does not operate, repeat the final poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and then rapidly. Once this happens, steps for the rolling code procedure. and others to be severely injured or killed.
release both buttons.
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE code or a non-rolling code. cycling process to prevent possible overheating
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, of the garage door or gate motor.
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
without starting the engine. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
opener Ú page 47. button until the HomeLink® Indicator light 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not HomeLink® button you wish to program
code, or non-rolling code before beginning the release the button. while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
programming process. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with light in view.
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
NOTE: Garage Door Opener” and follow all button, while you press and release
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans- remaining steps. (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several two seconds until HomeLink® has
seconds of transmission, which may not be long CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR successfully accepted the frequency signal.
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
P ROGRAMMING The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
law, some US gate operators are designed to For programming transmitters in Canada/
time-out in the same manner. The procedure United States that require the transmitter 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
may need to be performed multiple times to signals to “time-out” after several seconds of change flash rates. When it changes, it is
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® transmission. programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
buttons. Canadian radio frequency laws require or longer in rare cases. The garage door
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after may open and close while you are
REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE several seconds of transmission – which may programming.
HOMELINK® BUTTON not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up 5. Press and hold the programmed
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that the signal during programming. Similar to this HomeLink® button and observe the
has been previously trained, without erasing all Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are indicator light.
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be designed to time-out in the same manner.
sure to determine if the new device you want to
NOTE: EXTERIOR LIGHTS Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the

first detent for parking light and instrument
 If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage HEADLIGHT SWITCH panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
door/device should activate when the The headlight switch is located on the left side switch to the second detent for headlight,
HomeLink® button is pressed. of the instrument panel. This switch controls the parking light, and instrument panel light
operation. 2
 To program the two remaining HomeLink® operation of the headlights, parking lights,
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL S) — I F
button. DO NOT erase the channels. panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if
EQUIPPED
If you unplugged the garage door opener/ equipped).
The Daytime Running Lights are in a dedicated
device for programming, plug it back in at this
position below the headlight assembly. DRLs
time.
are active when the low beams are not on, and
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button the engine is running. DRLs may be deactivated
(Canadian/Gate Operator) by applying the parking brake.
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps: NOTE:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.  For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
when the front fog lights are turned on.
button until the indicator light begins to
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the Headlight Switch
Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on
button. 1 — Headlight Control
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with 2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control activated on that side), or on both sides of
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
step 2 and follow all remaining steps. 4 — Fog Light Switch are activated).
HIGH/LOW B EAM S WITCH from high beams to low beams until the AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
approaching vehicle is out of view.
Push the multifunction lever toward the This system automatically turns the headlights
instrument panel to switch the headlights to NOTE: on or off according to ambient light levels. To
high beams. The lever will return to the centered  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
position. To return the headlights to low beam, can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” clockwise to the last detent for automatic
pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push under “Auto High Beam” within your headlight operation. When the system is on, the
the lever toward the instrument panel. Uconnect Settings Ú page 211, as well as headlight time delay feature is also on. This
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO posi- means the headlights will stay on for up to
tion and placing the multifunction lever in the 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
high beam position. OFF position. To turn the automatic system off,
 Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will position.
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer NOTE:
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other The engine must be running before the head-
obstructions on the windshield or camera lights will come on in the automatic mode.
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly. LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
Multifunction Lever If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
FLASH-TO-P ASS
AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP You can signal another vehicle with your
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED position, a chime will sound when the driver’s
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction door is opened.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
system provides increased forward lighting at headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
night by automatically controlling the high lever is released.
beams through the use of a camera mounted
on the vehicle’s header. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
parking lights or low beam headlights and push
tive outside light bulb.
the fog light switch. Pushing the fog light switch
a second time will turn the front fog lights off. LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED 2
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
Dome Lights
INTERIOR LIGHTS When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme
I NTERIOR C OURTESY L IGHTS bottom position will cause all the interior lights
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front to turn off. This is also known as “Party” mode
doors are opened, by rotating the dimmer because it allows the doors to stay open for
Front Fog Light Switch controls on the headlight switch fully upward, extended periods of time without discharging
or, if equipped, when the unlock button is the vehicle’s battery.
TURN SIGNALS
pushed on the key fob.
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
The interior courtesy lights are located in the
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
center of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
one large center light and four smaller reading
proper operation.
lights. Each reading light can be turned on by
pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
DIMMER C ONTROLS WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The dimmer controls are part of the headlight The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
switch and are located on the left side of the located on the right side of the steering column.
instrument panel. The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located at the end of the lever.
Windshield/Intermittent Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
Dimmer Controls park position before turning off the engine. If
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever (If Equipped With the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control Rear Wipers) freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION restarted.
the right dimmer control upward will increase Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
the brightness of the instrument panel lights. detent past the intermittent settings for Intermittent Wipers
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of Use the intermittent wiper when weather
interior and ambient light levels (e.g. courtesy the lever upward to the second detent past the conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
lights in the footwell and front door handles). intermittent settings for high-speed wiper variable pause between cycles, desirable.
operation. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of four intermittent settings.
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between
1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
WARNING! REAR WINDOW W IPER/WASHER — IF
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. E QUIPPED
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. shield could lead to a collision. You might not A rotary switch on the center portion of the
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To windshield wiper/washer lever controls the
Windshield Washers
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during operation of the rear wiper/washer function. 2
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled freezing weather, warm the windshield with
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and the defroster before and during windshield
continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles washer use.
after the lever is released. Then, the
Mist
intermittent interval previously selected will
resume. Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a
single wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held
wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles.
up, the wipers will continue to operate.
Then, the wipers will turn off.
NOTE: Rear Wiper/Washer Control
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer Rotate the switch upward to the first
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed detent position for intermittent
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
on the windshield. The wash function must be operation and to the second detent
Once the switch is released the washer will
used in order to spray the windshield with for continuous rear wiper operation.
resume normal operation.
washer fluid.
Push the wiper lever toward the
For information on wiper care and replacement, instrument panel to activate the rear
see Ú page 382. washer. The washer pump and wiper
will continue to operate as long as the
lever is held.
NOTE: AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL MAX A/C Button

As a protective measure, the washer will stop if DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS Press and release the MAX A/C button
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. on the touchscreen to change the
Once the switch is released the washer will current setting to the coldest output
resume normal operation. of air. The MAX A/C indicator
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
automatically return to the “park” position. to exit.
When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the NOTE:
switch is set at. The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
CLIMATE CONTROLS Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
The Climate Control system allows you to performance. The button illuminates when MAX
Controls
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction A/C is on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The mode position can be adjusted to desired user
controls are located on the touchscreen (if settings. Pressing other settings will cause the
equipped) and on the instrument panel below MAX A/C to turn off.
the radio. A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
The A/C button allows the operator to manually AUTO Button defogging. When toggling the front defrost
activate or deactivate the A/C system. When the Set your desired temperature and mode button, the climate system returns to the
A/C system is turned on, cool dehumidified air press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and previous setting.
will flow through the outlets into the cabin. maintain your desired temperature by Rear Defrost Button
automatically adjusting the blower
Recirculation Button Press and release the Rear Defrost 2
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
Press and release this button on the button on the touchscreen, or push
recommended for efficiency. You can press and
touchscreen, or push the button on and release the button on the
release this button on the touchscreen, or push
the faceplate, to change the system faceplate, to turn on the rear window
the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on.
between recirculation mode and defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
on. Toggling this function will cause the system
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the illuminates when the rear window defroster is
to switch between manual mode and automatic
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation on. The rear window defroster automatically
mode. Ú page 59
can be used when outside conditions, such as turns off after 10 minutes.
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are Front Defrost Button
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. CAUTION!
Press and release this button on the
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen, or push and release the Failure to follow these cautions can cause
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that button on the faceplate, to change damage to the heating elements:
could create fogging on the inside of the the current airflow setting to Defrost  Use care when washing the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates rear window. Do not use abrasive window
manually without disturbing the mode control when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the cleaners on the interior surface of the
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation windshield and side window demist outlets. window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
mode may make the inside air stuffy and When the defrost button is selected, the blower washing solution, wiping parallel to the
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this level may increase. Use Defrost mode with heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
mode is not recommended. maximum temperature settings for best after soaking with warm water.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may windshield and side window defrosting and (Continued)
lead to excessive window fogging.
SYNC Button speed decreases as you turn the blower

CAUTION! (Continued) control knob counterclockwise.
Press the SYNC button on the
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or touchscreen to toggle the SYNC  Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
abrasive window cleaners on the interior feature on/off. The SYNC indicator reduce the blower setting and the large
surface of the window. illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC blower icon to increase the blower setting.
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the synchronizes the passenger temperature The blower can also be selected by pressing
window. setting with the driver temperature setting. the blower bar area between the icons.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting Mode Control
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And while in SYNC will automatically exit this
Down Buttons feature. Select one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen or press the Mode
Provides the driver and passenger with NOTE: button on the faceplate to adjust the
independent temperature control. The SYNC button is only available on the touch- airflow distribution. The airflow
Push the red button on the faceplate screen. distribution can be adjusted so air comes from
or touchscreen or press and slide the the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
temperature bar towards the red Blower Control defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
arrow button on the touchscreen for Blower Control regulates the amount
warmer temperature settings. of air forced through the Climate Panel Mode
Push the blue button on the faceplate Control system. Adjusting the blower Air comes from the outlets in the
or touchscreen or press and slide the will cause automatic mode to switch instrument panel. Each of these
temperature bar towards the blue to manual operation. There are seven blower outlets can be individually adjusted to
arrow button on the touchscreen for speeds available. The speeds can be selected direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
cooler temperature settings. using either the blower control knob on the the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. moved up and down or side to side to regulate
NOTE: airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
 Faceplate: The blower speed increases as
The numbers within the temperature display will located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
you turn the blower control knob clockwise
only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an the amount of airflow from these outlets.
from the lowest blower setting. The blower
Automatic Climate Control system.
Bi-Level Mode Climate Control OFF Button A/C Button

Air comes from the instrument panel Press and release the OFF button on Push the A/C button to engage the Air
outlets and floor outlets. A slight the touchscreen, or push the OFF Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
amount of air is directed through the button on the faceplate to turn the illuminates when A/C is on.
defrost and side window demister Climate Control ON/OFF.
NOTE: 2
outlets.
MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL  For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
NOTE: DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel active to prevent fogging of the windows.
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.  If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
Floor Mode side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase

blower speed if needed.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
 If your air conditioning performance seems
slight amount of air is directed
lower than expected, check the front of the
through the defrost and side window
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
demister outlets.
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Mix Mode Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Climate of the radiator and through the condenser.
Air is directed through the floor,
Controls
defrost, and side window demister Recirculation Button
outlets. This setting works best in cold MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped Push the recirculation button on the
or snowy conditions that require extra Set the temperature control knob to faceplate to change the system
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for the MAX A/C setting to change the between recirculation mode and
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on current setting to the coldest output outside air mode. The Recirculation
the windshield. of air. Moving the temperature control indicator and the A/C indicator (if equipped)
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the illuminate when the Recirculation button is
MAX A/C operation to exit. pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, temperature settings for best windshield and
or high humidity are present. Recirculation can side window defrosting and defogging. CAUTION! (Continued)
be used in all modes except for Defrost.  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions Rear Defrost Button window.
exist that could create fogging on the inside of Push and release the Rear Defrost
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected Control button to turn on the rear Temperature Control
manually without disturbing the mode control window defroster and the heated Temperature Control regulates the temperature
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation outside mirrors (if equipped). The of the air forced through the climate system.
mode may make the inside air stuffy and Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear The temperature increases as you
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this window defroster is on. The rear window turn the temperature control knob
mode is not recommended. defroster automatically turns off after clockwise.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if 10 minutes.
The temperature decreases as you
equipped), the Recirculation mode is not turn the temperature control knob
CAUTION!
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window counterclockwise.
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled Failure to follow these cautions can cause
automatically if this mode is selected. damage to the heating elements: Heater Only
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this  Use care when washing the inside of the Turning the temperature control knob clockwise
mode causes the LED in the control button to rear window. Do not use abrasive window increases the heating temperature and turning
blink and then turns off. cleaners on the interior surface of the the temperature control knob counterclockwise
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild decreases the heating temperature.
Front Defrost Setting
washing solution, wiping parallel to the NOTE:
Turn the Mode Control knob to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes The numbers within the temperature display will
after soaking with warm water.
from the windshield and side window only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an
demist outlets. When the Defrost  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or Automatic Climate Control system.
button is selected, the blower level may abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
(Continued)
Blower Control located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust Climate Control OFF
Blower Control regulates the amount the amount of airflow from these outlets. To turn the Climate Controls off, turn
of air forced through the climate Bi-Level Mode the blower control knob to the OFF (O)
system. There are seven blower position.
Air comes from the instrument panel
speeds available. The blower speeds
outlets and floor outlets. A slight AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE C ONTROL 2
increase as you turn the blower control knob
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
amount of air is directed through the (ATC) — I F EQUIPPED
defrost and side window demister
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower Automatic Operation
outlets.
control knob counterclockwise.
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
NOTE:
Mode Control the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
Turn the mode control knob to adjust Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
airflow distribution. The airflow Panel.
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
distribution mode can be adjusted so 2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
air comes from the instrument panel Floor Mode like the system to maintain by adjusting the
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist Air comes from the floor outlets. A driver and passenger temperature control
outlets. slight amount of air is directed buttons. Once the desired temperature is
through the defrost and side window displayed, the system will achieve and
Panel Mode automatically maintain that comfort level.
demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
instrument panel. Each of these Mix Mode
level, it is not necessary to change the
outlets can be individually adjusted to Air is directed through the floor, settings. You will experience the greatest
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of defrost, and side window demister efficiency by simply allowing the system to
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be outlets. This setting works best in cold function automatically.
moved up and down or side to side to regulate or snowy conditions that require extra
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel heat to the windshield. This setting is good for NOTE:
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on  It is not necessary to move the temperature
the windshield. settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may Vacation/Storage
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort only be used to adjust the interior temperature For information on maintaining the Climate
as quickly as possible. of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to Control system when the vehicle is being stored
 The temperature can be displayed in US or adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if for an extended period of time, see
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric equipped. Ú page 421.
customer-programmable feature within OPERATING T IPS
Uconnect Settings Ú page 211. Window Fogging
To provide you with maximum comfort in the NOTE: Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the Refer to the chart at the end of this section for mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine suggested control settings for various weather windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
warms up. The blower will increase in speed conditions. increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
and transition into Auto mode. Recirculation mode without A/C for long
Summer Operation periods, as fogging may occur.
Manual Operation Override The engine cooling system must be protected
This system offers a full complement of manual with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide Outside Air Intake
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front proper corrosion protection and to protect Make sure the air intake, located directly in
ATC display will be turned off when the system against engine overheating. OAT coolant front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
is being used in the manual mode. (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
CLIMATE VOICE C OMMANDS Winter Operation plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and To ensure the best possible heater and Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
keep everyone comfortable while you keep defroster performance, make sure the engine of ice, slush, and snow.
moving ahead. cooling system is functioning properly and the
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After proper amount, type, and concentration of Cabin Air Filter
the beep, say one of the following commands: coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation The climate control system filters out dust and
 “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
mode during Winter months is not pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
recommended, because it may cause window dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
 “Set the passenger temperature to
fogging. have it replaced when needed.
70 degrees”
Stop/Start System — If Equipped climate control functions will resume their

CONTROL
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control previous operation except, if the de-icer is WEATHER
active, the de-icer timer and operation will SETTINGS
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will continue. Operate in
be maintained upon return to an engine running Cool Sunny (Bi-Level Mode) posi-
Operating Tips Chart
tion.
2
condition.
NOTE: Set the mode control
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped The below chart is for Manual Override Opera- to (Floor Mode)
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating tion. Cool & Humid Condi-
element located at the base of the windshield. tions and turn (A/C) on
CONTROL to keep windows
It operates automatically once the following WEATHER
SETTINGS clear.
conditions are met:
Set the mode control Set the mode control
 Activation By Front Defrost
to (Panel Mode), to the (Floor
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
Mode) position. If
during a cold weather manual start with full (A/C) on, and
Hot Weather And Cold Weather windshield fogging
defrost, and when the ambient temperature blower on high. Roll
Vehicle Interior Is Very down the windows for starts to occur, move
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Hot a minute to flush out the control to the
 Activation By Rear Defrost (Mix Mode) position.
the hot air. Adjust the
The wiper de-icer activates automatically controls as needed to
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the achieve comfort.
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Turn (A/C) on and
 Activation By Remote Start Operation
set the mode control
When the Remote Start is activated and the Warm Weather
to the (Panel
outside ambient temperature is less than
Mode) position.
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT Console Storage Compartment

The center console has both an upper and lower
STORAGE storage compartment.
Glove Compartment To open the upper storage compartment, lift the
top latch. To access the lower storage
The glove compartment is located on the
compartment, lift the bottom latch.
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Rear Storage Cover
USB/AUX C ONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument
panel, below the climate controls. Behind the
media hub access door, the Media Hub
contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and
one standard USB port. Both USB ports allow
Console Storage Latches
you to play music from MP3 players /
1 — Upper Compartment Latch smartphones or USB devices through the
2 — Lower Compartment Latch vehicle’s sound system.
Glove Compartment
Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
WARNING! may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
The rear cargo area storage compartment is
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove com- features, if equipped. For further information,
located underneath the load floor.
partment in the open position. Driving with refer to "Android Auto™" or "Apple Carplay®"
the glove compartment open may result in To access the storage compartment, lift up on Ú page 252 or in the Owner's Manual
injury in a collision. the cargo strap at the rear of the cargo area. Supplement.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to

your device up to an hour after the vehicle is
turned off.
NOTE:
 Two devices can be plugged in at the same 2
time and both ports will provide charging
capabilities. Only one port can transfer data
to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear
and allow you to select the device transfer-
ring data. Media Hub USB On The Back Of The Center Console
 Both ports share a single data connection.
1 — AUX Port 1 — Type C And Standard USB USB Ports
The user cannot switch between Type A or 2 — Type C USB Port 2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
Type C. 3 — Type A USB Port
When a new device or smartphone is plugged
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type Located inside the center console, a second into the USB ports, the following message may
A USB port and another device is plugged into USB port allows you to play music from USB display depending on the device being utilized:
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and devices through your vehicle’s sound system.  “A new device is now connected. Previous
allow you to select which device to use.
Third and fourth USB ports (if equipped) are connection was lost”.
located behind the center console, above the  “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
power inverter. One is a charge only port, and connection was lost”.
can only charge USB devices. The other USB  “Another device is in use through the same
port allows you to play music from USB devices USB port. Please disconnect the first device
through your vehicle’s sound system. to use the second device”.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in a collision.
POWER O UTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories
designed for use with the standard power outlet Front Power Outlet Power Outlets Fuse Locations
adapters. On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, 1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (bat-
The front power outlet is located in the center of there is a second power outlet located in the tery powered at all times)
the instrument panel below the climate rear cargo area and is powered directly from the 2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (pow-
controls, and is powered from the ignition vehicle battery. ered when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or
switch. Power is available when the ignition ACC position)
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
CAUTION!
 Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
 Power outlets are designed for accessory  Many accessories that can be plugged in
located on the back of the center console to
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
convert DC current to AC current.
the power outlets as this will damage the when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the This outlet can power cellular phones, 2
the power outlet can cause damage not vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently electronics and other low power devices
covered by your New Vehicle Limited to degrade battery life and/or prevent the requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain video
Warranty. engine from starting. game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
 Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
WARNING! coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only use these intermittently and with
 Do not insert any objects into the recepta- greater caution.
cles.
 After the use of high power draw accesso-
 Do not touch with wet hands. ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
 Close the lid when not in use. started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an length of time to allow the alternator to
electric shock and failure. recharge the vehicle's battery. Power Inverter
 Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
The power inverter is designed with built-in All switches can be configured as follows:
overload protection. If the power rating of  Switch type operation: Latching or Momen-
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter tary
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical  Power source: Battery or Ignition
device has been removed from the outlet, the
 Ability to hold last state across key cycles: On
inverter should automatically reset. If the power
or Off
rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the
power inverter may have to be reset manually.
WARNING!
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
To avoid serious injury or death:
 Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
 Do not touch with wet hands.
 Close the lid when not in use.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an Auxiliary Switches
electric shock and failure. NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — I F EQUIPPED switch type is set to latching and power source Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower is set to ignition.
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a
switch bank of the instrument panel can be The auxiliary switches manage the relays that fused battery wire and ignition wire are also
used to power various electrical devices. You power four blunt cut wires. These wires are located in the interior, in the passenger side
have the ability to configure the functionality of located under the instrument panel in the under the instrument panel.
the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect Settings passenger compartment and under the hood to A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided
Ú page 211. the right, near the battery. with the auxiliary switches to aid in the
connection/installation of your electrical devices.
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations

Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Underhood (right side near battery)
2
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

The power window switches are located on the Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
instrument panel below the climate controls. and do not let children play with power win-
Push the switch downward to open the window dows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
and upward to close the window. vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.
The top left switch controls the left front window Occupants, particularly unattended children,
and the top right switch controls the right front can become entrapped by the windows while
window. operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or Power Window Switches
death.
To open the window part way (manually), push

WARNING! WIND B UFFETING
the window switch down briefly and release.
Wind buffeting can be described as the
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
NOTE: perception of pressure on the ears or a
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
The power window switches will remain active helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
objects from the window before closing.
for up to 10 minutes after ignition is placed in may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
the OFF position. Opening either front door will down in certain open or partially open positions.
WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH This is a normal occurrence and can be
cancel this feature.
Four-Door Models minimized by adjusting the window opening.
The lower left switch controls the left rear WRANGLER TOPS
passenger window, and the lower right switch
controls the right rear passenger window. PROVIDED TOOLS
NOTE: For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with
There are window switches located on the rear your vehicle located in the center console. This
of the center console for the rear passenger kit includes the necessary tools required for the
windows in the four-door model. operations described in the following sections.
All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.
AUTO-DOWN F EATURE Window Lockout Switch
NOTE:
The driver door power and the passenger door The window lockout switch allows you to disable
The soft top and the hard top are to be used
power window switches have an Auto-Down the window controls on the rear passenger
independently. Your vehicle warranty will not
feature. Push the window switch down, for a doors. To disable the window controls, rotate
cover damage resulting from both tops being
short period of time, and release and the the switch downward. To enable the window
installed at the same time.
window will go down automatically. controls, rotate the switch upward.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
LOWERING THE S OFT TOP INTO CAUTION!

SUNRIDER® POSITION
The soft top is not designed to carry any addi-
Use this QR code to access your tional loads such as roof racks, spare tires,
digital experience. building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/
or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a 2
structural member of the vehicle and, thus,
cannot properly carry any additional loads
other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
Provided Tools WARNING! If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
1 — #T50 Torx Head Driver the top has been folded down for a period of
 The fabric quarter windows and fabric top
2 — #T40 Torx Head Driver time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
are designed only for protection against the
3 — 15 mm Socket elements. Do not rely on them to contain you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
4 — Ratchet occupants within the vehicle or to protect caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or
against injury during an accident. acrylic materials of the fabric top.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top (four
Remember, always wear seat belts. Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
door models only), the soft top system will be
provided in a separate box located in the rear of  Make sure hands and fingers are clear of on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its
the vehicle for shipping purposes only. all pinch points when installing and original size and the top can then be installed. If
removing the soft tops. The lift assist mech- the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not
anism and side bows may cause serious attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or
injury if fingers or hands get caught in side curtains.
between.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

 Do not run a fabric top through an auto-  Do not fully lower the top with the windows Failure to follow these cautions may cause
matic car wash. Window scratches and wax installed. Window and top damage may interior water damage, stains or mildew on
build up may result. occur. the top material:
 Do not lower the top when the temperature  For important information on cleaning and  It is recommended that the top be free of
is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top caring for your vehicle's fabric top water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
may result. Ú page 423. opening a door or lowering a window while
 Do not move your vehicle until the top has  Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to the top is wet may allow water to drip into
been either fully attached to the windshield pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or the vehicle's interior.
frame, or fully lowered. retainers securing the soft top. Do not force  Careless handling and storage of the soft
(Continued) or pry the soft top framework when opening top may damage the seals, causing water
or closing. Damage to the top may result. to leak into the vehicle's interior.
(Continued)  The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
Four Door Side View Components

1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer
5 — #5 Bow
Two Door Side View Components

1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer
5 — #5 Bow
Two And Four Door Rear Components

1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
NOTE:
 All lowering and raising the soft top instruc-
tions are applicable to both two and four door
model vehicles.
 Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components
may differ.
The following options are available to you when
lowering your vehicle’s soft top:
 Sunrider® position with rear and quarter
Step Two Step Four
windows installed 3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on NOTE:
 Sunrider® position with rear and quarter the #1 Bow of the soft top to start the If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position,
panels removed operation. secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
 Sunrider® position with rear window fasteners provided in the center console.
installed and quarter panels removed
 Fully lowered position with rear and quarter
windows removed
Both quarter windows should be removed and
installed together.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the Step Three
crossbar by pulling the handle downward. 4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the Step Four
Make sure the hook is disengaged from its side link to fold the soft top rearward into
receiver. the Sunrider® position.
NOTE: the rear window. Store in soft window bag (if

 The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® equipped), or a safe location.
position with the rear window and quarter
panel assemblies fully installed or completely
removed.
2
 The rear window and rear quarter windows
must be removed before fully lowering the
soft top to prevent damage to the top. Clean
the side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during Step One
removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers 2. Grab the swing gate bar, rotate it outward
are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,
and upward releasing it from both the right
clean them with a mild soap solution and a Step Three
and left retainers.
small brush. Cleaning products are available 4. Remove the plastic retainers from both
through an authorized dealer. quarter window pillars.
Removing The Soft Top Windows
NOTE:
Before fully lowering the soft top, the rear
window and rear quarter windows must be
removed.
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear
window’s plastic retainers from the lower Step Two (Left Side Shown)
right and left corners. 3. While holding the window in place, slide the
Step Four
swing gate bar to the left separating it from
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to window moving toward the front of the
the left until it is completely separate from vehicle.
its retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the rear window. Damage to the
retainer could result.
Step One
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at
the upper front corner of each quarter
Step Three
window.
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to
the top of the front window.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:

1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom
corner outward and release tab from the
bottom of the window pillar.
Step Two
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove
Step Four
plastic retainer from along the bottom of the
5. While keeping the window level, slide NOTE:

rearward until it is completely separate from The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear
its retainer. Do not pull downward while window, does not store in the soft window
removing the window. Damage to the storage bag (if equipped).
retainer could result. 1. With the bag opened completely, fold both
fabric dividers downward and lay the first
2
quarter window all the way to the right side
with the inside of the window facing
downward and the window pillar to the
outside. Step One
NOTE: 1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on 2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
the inside of the window pillar.
2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the
first quarter window.
Step Five
6. Store in soft window bag (if equipped) or a
safe location.
NOTE:
For information on the use of the storage bag,
refer to the next section.
Soft Top Window Storage Bag — If

Equipped Step One
To safely store the soft top rear window, and Step Two
rear quarter windows, proceed as follows:
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the 6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe
first divider all the way to the left side with location.
the inside of the window facing downward
and the window pillar to the outside.
Step Four
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second
divider.
Step Six
Step Three Lowering The Soft Top All The Way

1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward 1. Remove the rear window and quarter panel
2 — Second Divider Folded Down windows Ú page 75.
2. From the Sunrider® position Ú page 69,
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering remove straps if previously secured and
the second quarter window. move to the rear of the vehicle.
Step Five
3. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6

Bow of the soft top on the left side.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
5. While pushing downward slightly on the 2

folded soft top, slide the lock lever on the
left and right side lift assist mechanisms to
the “lock” position.
Step Six
NOTE:
Step Three Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
4. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow
the soft top to slide rearward freely in the
guide tracks to the stowed position.
Step Five (Locked Position)

6. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position,
push downward on each side of the folded
soft top to ensure it is secure. An audible
“click” may be heard.
Step Six
Step Four
RAISING THE S OFT TOP 4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to

ensure the top is locked in the Sunrider®
Use this QR code to access your
position.
digital experience.
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top
toward the front of the vehicle manually
guiding the top into the closed position.
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered

Position
Step Two
1. From the fully lowered position, remove
straps if previously secured. 3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along
the guide track until it locks into the
CAUTION! Sunrider® position with an audible “click”.
Step Five
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top,
slide the lock lever on the left and right side
lift assist mechanisms to the “unlock”
position.
Step Three
1 — Unlocked Position
2 — #5 Bow Location
Step Five
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on Installing The Soft Top Windows
the header latch downward to engage the Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
hook into its receiver. Repeat on the other
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top
side.
of the window into the retainer and slide
forward while keeping the window level. 2
Repeat on the other side.
Step Two
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing
the hook, locking the latch into place. Step One
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar
into the top cover, and insert the bottom tab
into the clip.
Step Two
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install
steps could result in damage to the Soft Top
or vehicle.
Step Seven
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the 2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers
windows, ensuring they are fully engaged, at the bottom of the window from left to the
followed by the retainers along the bottom right.
of the windows.
Step Four
Install The Rear Window

1. Guide the rear window into the retainer
from left to right while keeping the window Step Two
Step Three level. 3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window right side retainers.
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the
upper front corner of each quarter window
by pressing firmly.
Step One
Step Three
4. Line up the rear window to the right side NOTE: 2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on
quarter window first, and engage the plastic For information on removing your soft top, refer both the left and right sides are in the “lock”
retainers. to the next section. position, and an audible “click” is heard
when pushing down on the #1 bow from
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window. REMOVING THE S OFT TOP
each of the lift assist mechanisms before
Use this QR code to access your removing. 2
digital experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top Ú page 78.
CAUTION!
Step Five Failure to follow the next steps could result in
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
Step Two
lower right and left corners.
Step Six
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver

and ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head
screws on each lift assist mechanism, then
lift the mechanism up and away from the
vehicle.
Step Four Step Six

and ratchet, unscrew the Torx screw on both
rear corners of the vehicle, removing the
retainers.
Step Three
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail Step Four

rearward to release the side link from the
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
track.
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and
away from the vehicle, careful to avoid the
vehicle’s sport bar, trim, and tire carrier. Step Seven
Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry
location.
I NSTALLING T HE SOFT T OP CAUTION!

1. If currently installed, remove the hard top
Do not over tighten Torx screws. Damage to
Ú page 91.
the retainers will occur.
2. Install the door rails, starting with the front,
followed by the rear on each side. For Torque Speci- 2
instructions and appropriate torque specifi- fication For Maximum Minimum
cations for the door rail Torx screws Torx Screw
Ú page 99.
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
3. Install the rear retainers on each side of the Step Four
rear of the vehicle using the provided 13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
#50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to
the table below for recommended torque CAUTION!
specifications.
4. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in

the “lock” position, lift the soft top into the
rear of the vehicle with the side links
pointing toward the front. Lower the lift
assist mechanisms onto its retainers on Step Four
both sides (on the inside of the sport bar).
Step Three
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver Torque Speci-

and ratchet, tighten the Torx screws by fication For Maximum Minimum
turning them clockwise. Secure them until Torx Screws
they are snug (refer to the table below for
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
recommended torque specifications), being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or 13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
overtighten. Repeat on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened. Step Six
7. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover.
6. While pulling the release lever on the top of This cover should be discarded. It was
the rail rearward, place the side link into the intended as a protective cover for shipping
guide track on the top of the rail then only.
release the lever.
8. Raise the soft top Ú page 80.
NOTE:
Step Five
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner
1 — Lock Position is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift
2 — Torx Head Screw the top.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL( S) R EMOVAL CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

Use this QR code to access your
digital experience. Failure to follow these cautions may cause  Careless handling and storage of the
interior water damage, stains or mildew: removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
 It is recommended that the top be free of 2
vehicle’s interior.
water prior to panel removal. Removing the
top, opening a door or lowering a window  The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
while the top is wet may allow water to drip erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
CAUTION! into the vehicle’s interior. can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
 The hard top is not designed to carry any  The hard top assembly must be positioned
additional loads, such as after-market roof properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
racks, spare tires, building materials, lation can cause water to leak into the
hunting or camping supplies, etc. For vehicle’s interior.
optional Mopar accessory roof racks (Continued)
Ú page 105.
 Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the front
header, sport bar, and body side or fully
removed.
(Continued)
Four Door Hard Top Components

1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
Two Door Hard Top Components

1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
NOTE: 3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down
 All hard top removal and installation instruc- located at the top of the windshield. so the loops and hooks are facing upward.
tions are applicable to both two and four door Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap.
model vehicles.
NOTE:
 Images shown are of four door models, and
 Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
appearance of two door model components
inserting the panel into the panels bag.
may differ.
 There is a pouch located on the front of the
 The left side panel must be removed before
bag to store the provided hard top edge
removing the right side panel.
protectors that are used when the hard top is
To remove the hard top front panel(s), proceed not installed on the vehicle.
as follows:
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the
1. Fold down the sun visor against the Step Three bag with the latches facing upward.
windshield. 1 — Header Panel Latched 2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left 2 — Unlatched Position divider is laying flat).
side panel (one at the front, the rear, and
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into
outside), unlocking them from the roof. 4. Remove the left side panel.
the bag with the latches facing downward.
5. Repeat the steps above to remove the right
side panel. NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag — If inserting the panel into the bag.
Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you
to store your hard top panels. The storage bag
contains two compartments.
Step Two
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top HARD T OP FRONT PANEL( S)
bag closed. I NSTALLATION
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield
frame with the locating pin in the front
receiver mounting hole followed by the left 2
side panel, making sure there is no
overhang. Also, make sure that the panels
are sitting flush with the body.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps Step Three
for removal in reverse order.
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that
NOTE: secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the
Step Four
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top interior bodyside — three screws on each
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle side) using the #50 Torx head driver.
panels should be clear of any dust and debris
with the hooks and straps facing the back of
prior to reinstallation.
the rear seat. Attach the clip at the bottom
of the bag to the child restraint anchorage, REMOVING THE H ARD TOP
located at the base of the rear seat. 1. Remove both front panels Ú page 87.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head 2. Open both front doors.
restraints and loop the strap through the
buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the
and ratchet, remove the two Torx head
Freedom Top bag securely against the rear
screws that secure the hard top at the
seat.
B-pillar (near the top of the front doors).
Step Four
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure 7. Release the locking tab by pushing it
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the downward.
rear window glass.
Step Eight
9. To remove the washer hose, push the
release button on hose connector, and pull
Step Seven
downward.
Step Five 8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose inward while pulling downward to
on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle. disconnect.
Step Nine
Step Six Step Eight

10. Secure the wire harness to the body side by I NSTALLING T HE HARD TOP
plugging it into the receptacle and
If the door frames are installed from soft top
reengaging the locking tab.
usage, they must be removed prior to
installation of the hard top. For removal
procedures Ú page 97. 2
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the
vehicle while making sure that the top is sitting
flush with the body at the sides and check to
ensure that there is a uniform gap between the
Step Eleven lift glass and hard top. Then follow the removal
12. Lower the rear window, and close the swing steps in reverse order.
gate.
NOTE:
Step Ten 13. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
Place the hard top on a soft surface to
11. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into replace if necessary.
prevent damage.
the top of the body side receptacle.  The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to
the body should be torqued as follows using
CAUTION! the provided #50 Torx head driver and
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four ratchet:
adults, one located on each corner. Failure to  Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb
follow this caution could damage the Free- (13.5 N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
dom Top.
 Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 3.5 N·m)
Step Eleven
POWER S LIDING TOP — IF E QUIPPED NOTE:

WARNING!
 The Power Top is non-removable. If desired,
CAUTION! the rear quarter windows can be removed  Never leave children unattended in a
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recom- and stored in the provided storage bag vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
mended in vehicles equipped with a Power Ú page 96. vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top as  The Power Top will not open in temperatures
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
well as the header seal. below -4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened children. Do not leave the ignition of a
at a higher temperature, it can be closed at vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding temperatures above -40°F (-40°C). in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
Top, the control switch can be found on the particularly unattended children, can
 The Power Top will not operate at vehicle
front trim panel, to the right of the driver’s side become entrapped by the power top while
speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h).
sun visor. operating the power top switch. Such
NOTE: entrapment may result in serious injury or
A slight pause in audio may be heard when death.
opening and closing the Power Sliding Top as a  In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
result of the Uconnect system switching thrown from a vehicle with an open power
between Power Top Closed and Power Top Open top. You could also be seriously injured or
audio modes. killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
 Do not allow small children to operate the
power top. Never allow your fingers, other
Power Sliding Top Control Switch body parts, or any object, to project through
1 — Open Switch the power top opening. Injury may result.
2 — Close Switch
Opening And Closing The Power Top Pinch Protect Feature Power Top Maintenance
Express Open/Close This feature will detect an obstruction in the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
Push the open switch and release it within opening of the power top during Express Close to clean the quarter window glass panel. For
one-half second and the power top will open operation. If an obstruction in the path of the important information on cleaning and caring
power top is detected, the power top will for your vehicle Ú page 422.
automatically from any position. The power top 2
will open fully and stop automatically. automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, push the close switch and Ignition Off Operation
Push the close switch and release it within
release to Express Close. The power top switch can remain active in
one-half second and the sunroof will close
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
automatically from any position. The power top WARNING! 10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed
will close fully and stop automatically.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the to the OFF position. Opening either front door
During Express Open or Express Close will cancel this feature.
operation, any other movement of the power power top is almost closed. To avoid personal
top switch will stop the sunroof. injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fin- NOTE:
gers and all objects from the top’s path Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Manual Open/Close
before closing. Uconnect system Ú page 211.
To open the power top manually, push and hold
the open switch to the full open position, then NOTE: Relearn Procedure
release.  The Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is
To close the power top manually, push and hold closing during a severe headwind. If this a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate
the close switch to the fully closed position, occurs, push and hold the Power Sliding Top the power top when the “Express Mode” stops
then release. switch again to close the top completely. working. To reset the power top, follow these
Any release of the switch during open or close  If three consecutive power top close steps:
operation will stop the power top movement. attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and
The top will remain in a partially opened position Pinch Protect will disable and the power top start the vehicle.
until the switch is operated and held again. must be closed in Manual Mode.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the
relearn procedure.
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed 3. Locate the rear quarter window latches NOTE:
position. (two on each window) on the interior of the Do not pull down or apply any weight to the
3. Push and hold the Close switch for windows. windows after the latches are released.
10 seconds. This will put the power top 4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to Damage could result to the pins holding the
into calibration mode. release. windows in place.
4. Continue holding down the close button 5. Rotate the right hand side latch counter-
while the top goes fully open and then back clockwise to release.
to fully close.
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully
closed position, release the close button.
The power top is now reset and ready to
use.
NOTE:
If the close button is released anytime during Step Six
the relearning process, the relearn may not be
complete, and the procedure must be repeated.
Step Five
Rear Quarter Window Removal
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, 2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
the rear quarter windows can be removed. To
remove these windows, follow the procedure 6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each
below: window upward and away from the vehicle.
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear
window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter Step Six
windows.
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the 2. Place the second window into the foam the forward most cargo hook on the load
provided storage bag and keep in a safe insert with the latches facing outward. Fully floor.
location, or securely fasten the bag to the close the bag.
rear seat.
NOTE:
Quarter Window Storage Bag Once both windows are placed inside the bag, 2
To use the storage bags for the rear quarter the outside of the windows will be facing each
windows, proceed as follows: other with all latches facing the outside of the
bag.
1. With the bag completely open and the
fabric divider raised, place the first quarter
window with the latches facing outward
into the foam insert. Fold divider over the
window once placed inside. Step Three
DOOR FRAME
WARNING!
 Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
Step Two with the door frame(s) removed as you will
lose the protection that they can provide.
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider
This procedure is furnished for use during
2 — Fully Closed Bag
off-road operation only.
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the  Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
Step One
cargo area of the vehicle by securing the with the doors removed as you will lose the
1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised bag in the vehicle’s cargo area. This is done protection that they can provide. This
2 — Lower Divider Over Window (Latches Facing by attaching the straps at the top of the bag procedure is furnished for use during
Outward) to the rear head restraints, as well as off-road operation only.
attaching the clip at the bottom of the bag to
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the

CAUTION! vehicle.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
 Opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
 Careless handling and storage of the
removable door frame(s) may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the Door Frame Screw Locations
vehicle's interior. 2. Once all the way loosened, remove the
screws by pulling downward.
 The door frame(s) must be positioned prop- Step Three
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation NOTE: 4. Store screws in a secure location.
can cause water to leak into the vehicle's Screws will not fall out once completely loose,
interior. 5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame
as they are held in place by an internal mecha-
(four door models).
nism.
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
WARNING!
NOTE:
In four door models, the rear door frames must  Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
be removed first, followed by the front door with the door frame(s) removed as you will
frames. lose the protection that they can provide.
This procedure is furnished for use during
and ratchet, loosen the Torx screws
located on the underside of each door (Continued)
frame (two per door).
Remove Screws From Below Frame
WARNING! (Continued)
 Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This
procedure is furnished for use during 2
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION FOUR

DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED Step Three Step Four
1. Install the front door rail first. Target Torque 5. Carefully position the top of the door frame
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the Specification onto the rear of the front door rail, making
Maximum Minimum sure rubber seals lay flat. Ensure the seals
rubber seal at the top of the windshield, and For Torx Fas-
line up the holes for the Torx head screws teners are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
(two for each door). 79.6 in-lbs 87.6 in-lbs 71.7 in-lbs
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of (9 N·m) (9.9 N·m) (8.1 N·m)
the rail, and insert the screws from
underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head
CAUTION!
driver until they are snug, being careful not
to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
Refer to the table below for the appropriate the screws if they are overtightened.
torque specifications for the door rail
screws. 4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on
top of the body side, just behind the rear
door opening. Position Of Frame Above Door
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of DOOR F RAME I NSTALLATION TWO D OOR Target Torque
the rail, and insert the screws from MODELS — IF EQUIPPED Specification
underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head Maximum Minimum
For Torx Fas-
driver until they are snug, being careful not 1. Carefully place the front door rail in the
teners
to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. rubber seal at the top of the windshield,
and line up the holes for the Torx head 79.6 in-lbs 87.6 in-lbs 71.7 in-lbs
Refer to the table above for the appropriate
screws (two for each door). (9 N·m) (9.9 N·m) (8.1 N·m)
screws. 2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from CAUTION!
underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx head Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
driver until they are snug, being careful not the screws if they are overtightened.
to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the table below for the appropriate
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
screws. CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recom-
mended in vehicles equipped with a Power
Step Six Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top as
well as the header seal.
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a

structural element that can provide some
protection in some accidents. The windshield
also provides some protection against weather,
road debris and intrusion of small branches and
Step Two
other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the

LOWERING T HE W INDSHIELD
windshield down, as you lose the protection this
1. Before completing the steps below:
structural element can provide.  Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind-
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft
If required for certain off-road uses, the shield is securely fastened, either up or
down. Top, the top MUST be lowered, and the
windshield can be folded down. However, the
protection afforded by the windshield is then
door rails must be removed prior to 2
 Eye protection, such as goggles, should be lowering the windshield.
lost. If you fold down the windshield, drive slowly worn at all times when the windshield is
and cautiously. It is recommended that the down.  If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph Top, the Freedom Panels MUST be
 Be sure that you carefully follow the instruc- removed prior to lowering the windshield.
(16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if
tions for raising the windshield. Make sure
you are driving off-road with the windshield Refer to the following instructions for
that the folding windshield, windshield 
folded down. more information:
wipers, side bars, and all associated hard-
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that ware and fasteners are correctly and tightly • Soft Top Lowering Ú page 78
required its removal is completed and before assembled before driving your vehicle. • Door Frame Ú page 97
you return to on-road driving. Both you and your Failure to follow these instructions may • Freedom Top Panels Ú page 87
passengers should wear seat belts at all times, prevent your vehicle from providing you and
on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the your passengers’ protection in some acci- CAUTION!
windshield is raised or folded down. dents.
Failure to follow this step will cause damage
WARNING!  If you remove the doors, store them outside to the vehicle’s header seal.
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
Carefully follow these warnings to help pro- loose door may cause personal injury.
tect against personal injury:
 Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down.
(Continued)
2. Manually remove the protective caps over

the windshield wiper hex bolts.
Step Five Step Six

1 — Outside Torx Screws 1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Inside Torx Screws 2 — Bumper
Step Two
3 — Tie-Down
3. Using the provided 15mm socket, remove NOTE:
the two hex bolts and remove the wiper Store all of the mounting bolts in their original 7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch
arms. threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping. strap through the tie-down on either side of
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower 6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the hood and on the windshield frame.
both sun visors. the tie-down bumpers (if equipped). Tighten the strap to secure the windshield
in place.
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
remove the four Torx screws located along
the interior of the windshield. CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the wind-
shield could result.
ACC/FCW Sensor Protective Cover — If RAISING THE W INDSHIELD reinstall the hex nut and tighten until snug.
Equipped Be careful not to over-tighten. Repeat for
1. Release the strap that secured the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective the other arm.
windshield in the lowered position.
cover that is to be used whenever the 5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper
2. Raise the windshield.
windshield is folded down in order to protect the arm hex bolts and push gently until they
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, 2
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward Collision snap into place.
Warning (FCW) sensor. To install the cover, reinstall the four Torx screws located along
follow the instructions below: the interior of the windshield. Secure them
until they are snug, being careful not to
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
hinges to the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that
it covers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured
properly.
NOTE: Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt

Be sure to remove the cover before returning
the windshield to the normal position. Store the 6. After completing the steps above:
cover in the cargo area.  If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft
Cleaning Instructions Interior Torx Screw Locations Top, reinstall the Door Rails and raise the
1 — Outside Torx Screws top.
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt
can accumulate in the cover and block the 2 — Inside Torx Screws  If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard
camera lens. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the Top, reinstall the Freedom Panels.
camera lens, module, and inside cover, being 4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using
careful not to damage or scratch the module. the provided 15 mm socket. First, align the
tips of the blade to the “T” mark in the glass.
Then, while holding the arm in that position,
HOOD CLOSING THE H OOD REAR SWING GATE

If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using
OPENING T HE HOOD for additional information. one of the following methods:
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” To close the hood, remove the support rod from
for additional information.  Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if
the slot and replace it on the hood panel equipped)
Release both the hood latches. retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure
 Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped)
both of the hood latches.
 Power door unlock switch on the front doors
WARNING! (if equipped)
 Passive Entry swing gate handle (if equipped)
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driv-
ing your vehicle. If the hood is not fully To open the swing gate, pull on the handle.
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,
CAUTION!
located in the middle of the hood opening. Push To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle, to hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
open the hood. You may have to push down the front center of the hood to ensure that
slightly on the hood before pushing the safety both latches engage. Do not fully open and Swing Gate Handle
latch. Unhook the support rod from the hood rest the hood on the windshield.
and insert it into the slot on the front end above
the radiator.
NOTE: CARGO AREA FEATURES Lift the loop to use.

Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
to close the swing gate (hard top models only). Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail
WARNING! system, a rail will be found built into the floor on
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow either side of the cargo area. Each rail contains 2
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You an adjustable anchor loop that can be used to
and your passengers could be injured by these secure cargo. The position of the adjustable
fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed when anchor loop can be adjusted by sliding the loop
you are operating the vehicle. along the rail.
To adjust the anchor loop, push down on the
center button while sliding the loop along the Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop
CAUTION!
rail to the desired position. Release the button
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing and move the loop slightly to the next fixed
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
the rear flip-up window, as damage to the position in the notches of the rail. NOTE:
blade will result.
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
NOTE: ONLY.
The swing gate hinges and check strap may The load carried on the roof, when equipped
require cleaning if a squeak can be heard when with a luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lbs
opening the swing gate. Progressive accumula- (45 kg), this includes the weight of the
tion on the check strap arm may cause failure of crossbars, and it should be uniformly
the check strap, requiring replacement. For distributed over the cargo area.
further information on vehicle cleaning proce- Crossbars should always be used whenever
dures Ú page 424. cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
Adjustable Anchor Loop straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)
dealer through Mopar parts.  To avoid damage to the roof rack and  Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
External racks do not increase the total load vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
total occupant and luggage load inside the loads as evenly as possible and secure the natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do load appropriately. add sudden upward lift. It is recommended
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.  Long loads, which extend over the wind- to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
shield, should be secured to both the front panels or surfboards, which may result in
WARNING! and rear of the vehicle. damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied down before driv-  Place a blanket or other protection  Load should always be secured to cross-
ing your vehicle. Improperly secured loads between the surface of the roof and the bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high load. tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
speeds, resulting in personal injury or prop- are intended as supplementary tie down
(Continued)
erty damage. Follow the roof rack cautions points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
when carrying cargo on your roof rack. nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
107
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster — Gasoline

108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster — Gasoline

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Base Instrument Cluster — Diesel

Premium Instrument Cluster — Diesel

I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING!

1. Tachometer
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
You or others could be badly burned by steam
per minute (RPM x 1000). or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your vehi-
CAUTION! cle overheats.
Do not operate the engine with the tachome- 3
ter pointer in the red area. Engine damage CAUTION!
will occur. Instrument Cluster Display Location
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
2. Temperature Gauge could damage your vehicle. If the tempera- 4. Fuel Gauge
 The temperature gauge shows engine ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
coolant temperature. Any reading within vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi- fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the normal range indicates that the tioner turned off until the pointer drops back the ON/RUN position.
engine cooling system is operating satis- into the normal range. If the pointer remains
 The fuel pump symbol points to the
factorily. on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
and call an authorized dealer for service.
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher door is located.
temperature when driving in hot weather, 3. Instrument Cluster Display 5. Speedometer
up mountain grades, or when towing a  The instrument cluster display features a  Indicates vehicle speed.
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed driver interactive display Ú page 111.
the upper limits of the normal operating INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
range.
Your vehicle will be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your The system allows the driver to select Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
instrument cluster display is designed to display information by pushing the following buttons
Using the left or right arrow button allows
important information about your vehicle’s mounted on the steering wheel:
you to cycle through the submenu screens of
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
the Main menu item.
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how OK Button
systems are working and give you warnings Push the OK button to access/select the
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted information screens or submenu screens of a
controls allow you to scroll through and enter main menu item. To reset displayed/selected
the main menus and submenus. You can features push and hold the OK button for two
access the specific information you want and seconds.
make selections and adjustments. The Main Menu items consist of the following:
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY  Speedometer
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
L OCATION AND CONTROLS 1 — Left Arrow Button
 Vehicle Info
The instrument cluster display is located in the  Off Road — If Equipped

2 — Up Arrow Button
center of the instrument cluster.  Driver Assist — If Equipped
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button  Fuel Economy
5 — OK Button  Trip Info

 Stop/Start — If Equipped
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:  Audio
Using the up or down arrow button allows  Messages
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.  Screen Setup
They also allow you to change the Main Screen
area and Menu Title area.
Instrument Cluster Display Location

OIL C HANGE R ESET — IF E QUIPPED Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Push and release the OK button to toggle
Procedure between MPH and km/h.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
Vehicle Info
Required” message will display in the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
instrument cluster display for five seconds after start the engine). Push and release the up or down arrow
a single chime has sounded to indicate the next button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil displayed in the instrument cluster display.
three times within ten seconds.
change indicator system is duty cycle based, Push and release the left or right arrow 3
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
which means the engine oil change interval may button to scroll through the information
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal submenus and push and release the OK button
driving style. NOTE: to select or reset the resettable submenus.
Unless reset, this message will continue to If the indicator message illuminates when you  Tire Pressure  Coolant Tempera-
display each time you place the ignition in the start the vehicle, the oil change indicator ture
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this  Transmission  Oil Temperature
temporarily, push and release the OK button. To procedure. Temperature —
reset the oil change indicator system (after I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY MENU Automatic Trans-
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer mission Only
to the following procedure.
I TEMS
 Oil Pressure  Oil Life
Oil Life Reset NOTE:
 Battery Voltage  Diesel Exhaust
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
Fluid Level — If
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start settings may vary.
Equipped
the engine).
Speedometer
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Off Road
Info" in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu icon is Push and release the up or down arrow
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge displayed in the instrument cluster display. button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed
resets to 100%. in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to speed for the feature to become available will Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on
scroll through the information submenus. also display. the steering wheel), and the following will
 Drivetrain
display in the instrument cluster display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
 Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
ACC SET
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
and numerical value of calculated When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the ACC systems.
average front wheel angle from the the instrument cluster.
steering wheel orientation. Push and release the up or down arrow The ACC screen may display once again if any of
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed the following ACC activity occurs:
 Transfer Case Lock Status: displays in the instrument cluster display.
“Lock” graphic only during 4WD High,  System Cancel
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If
4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.  Driver Override
Equipped
 System Off
 Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If The instrument cluster display displays the
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear  ACC Proximity Warning
current ACC system settings. The information
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar displayed depends on ACC system status.  ACC Unavailable Warning
connection graphic with text message Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the NOTE:
(connected or disconnected). steering wheel) until one of the following The instrument cluster display will return to the
 Pitch And Roll displays in the instrument cluster display: last display selected after five seconds of no
 Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control Off ACC display activity Ú page 170.
in the graphic with the angle number on When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
Fuel Economy
the screen. “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Push and release the up or down arrow
NOTE: button until the Fuel Economy icon is
When vehicle speed becomes too high to When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in setting has not been selected, the display will
Push and hold the OK button to reset average
place of the numbers, and the graphic will be read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
fuel economy feature.
greyed out. A message indicating the necessary
Toggle left or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
 Range – The display shows the estimated The Trip A and Trip B information will display the NOTE:
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with following: The call status will temporarily replace the
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the  Distance previous media source information displayed
Range value is less than 10 miles (16 kilome- on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
 Average Fuel Economy
ters), the Range display will change to a “LOW” displayed, the display will return to the last used
 Elapsed Time
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel screen.
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
and a new Range value will display. Range Stored Messages 3
Stop/Start — If Equipped
cannot be reset through the OK button. Push and release the up or down arrow
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu item is
NOTE: button until the Stop/Start icon/title is
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle highlighted. This feature shows the number of
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable stored warning messages. Pushing the right
The screen will display the Stop/Start status.
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range arrow button will allow you to see what the
displayed value. Audio stored messages are.
 Average – The display shows the average fuel Push and release the up or down arrow When no messages are present, main menu
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since button until the Audio Menu icon/title is icon will be a closed envelope, and “No Stored
the last reset. highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Messages” will display.
 Current – This display shows the current fuel This menu will display the audio source Screen Setup
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while information, including the Song name, Artist
driving. name, and audio source with an accompanying Push and release the up or down arrow
graphic. button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
Trip Info highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Phone Call Status
Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the OK button to enter the
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status submenus and follow the prompts on the
button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
the instrument cluster display, then push and
will remain until the phone is answered or allows you to change what information is
release the left or right arrow button to ignored.
select Trip A or Trip B. displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Upper Right  Driver Assist – If Equipped (show/hide)
Upper Left  None  Fuel Economy (show/hide)
 None  Compass  Trip Info (Show/Hide)
 Compass  Outside Temp  Stop/Start
 Outside Temp  Time  Audio (show/hide)
 Time  Range To Empty  Messages
 Range To Empty  Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)  Screen Setup
 Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)  Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L) Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
 Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)  Trip A Distance Settings)
 Trip A Distance  Trip B Distance  Cancel
 Trip B Distance Gear Display — If Equipped  Restore
Center  Full The menu with (show/hide) means user can

 None  Single
press OK button to choose show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
 Compass Current Gear — If Equipped
 Outside Temp  On Settings
 Time  Off The following menu/submenu items are
 Range to Empty Odometer — If Equipped available in the cluster display:
 Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)  Show Speed Warning:
 Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)  Hide Sets the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is
 Trip A Distance Favorite Menus notified of through a visual and acoustic
signaling (display of a message and a symbol on
 Trip B Distance  Speedometer
the display).
 Audio  Vehicle Info
 Speedometer  Off Road – If Equipped (show/hide)
 Menu Title
When the speed warning is set, the icon should vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
remain visualized for the same duration time of or will not restart after the current drive cycle. more of the following conditions:
the pop up. If the driver exceeded the set speed, When load reduction is activated, the message  The charging system cannot deliver enough
the icon should remain for however long the “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will electrical power to the vehicle system
vehicle is over the set speed. appear in the instrument cluster display. because the electrical loads are larger than
Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF” the capability of the charging system. The
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
should you choose not to use this feature. charging system is still functioning properly.
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped: electrical charge at a rate that the charging  Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads 3
system cannot sustain. (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and inte-
Front passenger air bag may be enabled or rior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt,
disabled. NOTE: 150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-
BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER  The charging system is independent from tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD load reduction. The charging system  Installing options like additional lights,
performs a diagnostic on the charging upfitter electrical accessories, audio
REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED systems, alarms and similar devices.
system continuously.
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
 If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional by long parking periods).
may indicate a problem with the charging
monitoring of the electrical system and status  The vehicle was parked for an extended
system Ú page 123.
of the vehicle battery. period of time (weeks, months).
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
In cases when the IBS detects charging system  The battery was recently replaced and was
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are not charged completely.
effected by load reduction:
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will  The battery was discharged by an electrical
 Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
take place to extend the driving time and distance load left on when the vehicle was parked.
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
 The battery was used for an extended period
or turning off non-essential electrical loads.  HVAC System
with the engine not running to supply radio,
Load reduction is only active when the engine is  150W Power Inverter System lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
running. It will display a message if there is a  Audio and Telematics System ances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles
risk of battery depletion to the point where the and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction DIESEL D ISPLAYS manages engine combustion to allow the
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
or “Battery Saver Mode”) Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
following messages display in the instrument
During a trip: or interaction on your part.
cluster display:
 Reduce power to unnecessary loads if  Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at WARNING!
possible: Consistent Speeds to Clear
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte- A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
 Exhaust Filter Full – Power Reduced See
rior) park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
Dealer
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
 Check what may be plugged in to power  Exhaust System Service Required – See contact with your exhaust system. Do not
outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB ports Dealer park or operate your vehicle in areas where
 Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-  Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service your exhaust system can contact anything
ture) Required See Dealer that can burn.
 Check the audio settings (volume)  Exhaust System Regeneration in Process
After a trip: Continue Driving
CAUTION!
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was  Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
The engine may be switched off even if the
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical DIESEL P ARTICULATE F ILTER (DPF) warning light is on: repeated interruptions of
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
MESSAGES the regeneration process could cause an
Off Draw currents). This engine meets all required diesel engine early deterioration of engine oil. For this rea-
emissions standards. To achieve these son it is always advisable to wait for the sym-
 Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped bol to go off before turning off the engine,
driving time and parking time).
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust following the instructions above. Do not com-
 The vehicle should have service performed if plete the DPF regeneration process when the
system. These systems are seamlessly
the message is still present during consecu- vehicle is stopped.
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle integrated into your vehicle and managed by
and driving pattern did not help to identify the the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
cause.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to  Exhaust System Regeneration in Process a dealer service is not performed, extensive
additional maintenance required on your Continue Driving — This message indicates exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.
vehicle or engine. Refer to the following that the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain your To correct this condition it will be necessary
messages that may be displayed on your current driving condition until regeneration is to have your vehicle serviced by an autho-
instrument cluster display: completed. rized dealer.
 Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at  Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed
NOTE:
Consistent Speeds to Clear — This message — This message indicates that the DPF
Failing to follow the oil change indicator,
will be displayed if the exhaust particulate self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
changing your oil and resetting the oil change
3
filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
indicator by 0 miles (0 kilometers) remaining
capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short alerting you of this condition.
will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
duration and low speed driving cycles, your  Exhaust System Service Required — See performing its cleaning routine. This will shortly
diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment Dealer — This messages indicates regenera- result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and
system may never reach the conditions tion has been disabled due to a system reduced engine power. Only an authorized
required to cleanse the filter to remove the malfunction. At this point the engine Power- dealer will be able to correct this condition.
trapped PM. If this occurs, the “Exhaust Filter train Control Module (PCM) will register a
XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to fault code, the instrument panel will display a CAUTION!
Remedy” message will be displayed. If this Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
message is displayed, you will hear one See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
chime to assist in alerting you of this condi- CAUTION! exhaust system could occur soon with contin-
tion. By simply driving your vehicle at highway ued operation.
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy exhaust system could occur soon with contin-
the condition in the particulate filter system FUEL SYSTEM MESSAGES
ued operation.
and allow your diesel engine and exhaust The following chart contains a list of different
after-treatment system to cleanse the filter to  Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See messages that may appear in the instrument
remove the trapped PM and restore the Dealer — This message indicates the PCM cluster, depending on different system or fuel
system to normal operating condition. has derated the engine to limit the likelihood conditions. Use the descriptions to interpret
of permanent damage to the after-treatment what the message means and determine the
system. If this condition is not corrected and best action to take.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Warning Messages:
The first low level warning will be given at around a 1,490 miles (2,400 km) range, and is determined
according to the current consumption rate. The “UREA Low Level” warning light and message will display on
the instrument panel. The UREA low level warning light will remain lit until the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is
topped up with at least 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of UREA.
If the level is not resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a certain threshold is reached until it
will no longer be possible to start the engine.
When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a message will appear
Low Diesel Emissions Additive on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound. When the range is at 0, the display will show a
AdBlue® (UREA) Level Warning dedicated message (if equipped). In this case, the engine will not restart.
It will be possible to restart the engine again as soon as AdBlue® (UREA) is added; the minimum amount
required is 1.32 gallons (5 Liters). Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at least 1.32 gal-
lons (5 Liters) of UREA. If filling is completed with autonomy tank AdBlue® (UREA) to zero, it could be possi-
ble to wait two minutes before starting the vehicle.
NOTE:
When the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, and the vehicle is stopped, it is no longer possible to restart the
vehicle until a minimum of 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of AdBlue® (UREA) is added to the AdBlue® (UREA) tank.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Fault Warning Messages:
This message will display if the AdBlue® (UREA) system issue detected is not serviced during the allowed
period. Your engine will not restart unless your vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer. If the level is not
Engine Will Not Restart Service
resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be
AdBlue® System See Dealer
possible to start the engine. When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® tank is empty, a
message will appear on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound. 3
NOTE:
 The display may take up to five seconds to update after adding 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) or more of AdBlue®
(UREA) to the AdBlue® (UREA) tank. If you have a fault related to the AdBlue® (UREA) system, the display
Engine Will Not Start Service AdBlue®
may not update to the new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
System See Dealer
 AdBlue® freezes at temperatures lower than 51.8°F (11°C). If the car stands for a long time at this
temperature, refilling could be difficult. For this reason, it is advised to park the vehicle in a garage and/
or heated environment, and wait for the AdBlue® (UREA) to return to liquid state before topping up.
Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) System Messages — If Equipped:
The engine control unit has detected an issue with the gasoline particulate filter system. See an authorized
Exhaust System Service Required
dealer.
The regeneration procedure is controlled automatically by the engine control unit according to the filter
Exhaust System Regeneration in Pro- conditions and car use conditions. The following may occur during regeneration: increased levels of Noise
cess Continue Driving Vibration and Harshness (NVH) and reduced engine performance. The driver should continue driving nor-
mally. This message will continue to appear until regeneration is complete.
Exhaust System Regeneration Com-
The exhaust gas filter regeneration has been completed. This message will briefly appear.
plete
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES If the light is not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
the instrument panel together with a dedicated possible. half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
message and/or acoustic signal when Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
applicable. These indications are indicative and Brake Warning Light the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
precautionary and as such must not be This warning light monitors various dropped below a specified level.
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to brake functions, including brake fluid The light will remain on until the cause is
the information contained in the Owner’s level and parking brake application. If corrected.
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully the brake light turns on it may
in all cases. Always refer to the information in indicate that the parking brake is applied, that NOTE:
this chapter in the event of a failure indication. the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a The light may flash momentarily during sharp
All active telltales will display first if applicable. problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
The system check menu may appear different reservoir. conditions. The vehicle should have service
based upon equipment options and current If the light remains on when the parking brake performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
may not appear. the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it necessary.
RED WARNING LIGHTS indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake WARNING!
Air Bag Warning Light Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
This warning light will illuminate to Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability dangerous. Part of the brake system may
indicate a fault with the air bag, and Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehi-
will turn on for four to eight seconds remain on until the condition has been cle. You could have a collision. Have the vehi-
as a bulb check when the ignition is corrected. If the problem is related to the brake cle checked immediately.
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
position. This light will illuminate with a single the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
chime when a fault with the air bag has been felt during each stop.
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will Warning Light
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of turn on. When driving, if the driver or front This warning light will turn on when
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the there's a fault with the EPS system
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on Ú page 163.
the ABS system is required. continuously and a chime will sound
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be Ú page 305.
WARNING!
checked by turning the ignition switch from the 3
Battery Charge Warning Light Continued operation with reduced assist
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two This warning light will illuminate when could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
seconds. The light should then turn off unless the battery is not charging properly. If ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is it stays on while the engine is running, possible.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have there may be a malfunction with the
the light inspected by an authorized dealer. charging system. Contact an authorized dealer Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
as soon as possible. Light
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the This indicates a possible problem with the This warning light will illuminate to
ON/RUN position. electrical system or a related component. indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
NOTE: Door Open Warning Light
the vehicle is running, the light will
This light shows only that the parking brake is This indicator will illuminate when a either stay on or flash depending on the nature
applied. It does not show the degree of brake door is ajar/open and not fully closed. of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
application. vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
NOTE: the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a position. The light should turn off. If the light
This warning light indicates when the remains on with the vehicle running, your
single chime.
driver or passenger seat belt is vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
unbuckled. When the ignition is first authorized dealer for service as soon as
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ possible.
NOTE: vehicle. If the temperature reading does not recommended to take the vehicle to an
This light may turn on if the accelerator and return to normal, turn the engine off authorized dealer as soon as possible.
brake pedals are pressed at the same time. immediately and call for service Ú page 355. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is corrected. This light does not indicate how
Hood Open Warning Light
running, immediate service is required and you much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
may experience reduced performance, an This indicator will illuminate when the must be checked under the hood.
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your hood is ajar/open and not fully
vehicle may require towing. The light will come closed. Oil Temperature Warning Light
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or NOTE: This warning light will illuminate to
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a indicate the engine oil temperature is
a bulb check. If the light does not come on single chime. high. If the light turns on while driving,
during starting, have the system checked by an stop the vehicle and shut off the
authorized dealer. Oil Pressure Warning Light engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
This warning light will illuminate, and temperature to return to normal levels.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
a chime will sound, to indicate low Swing Gate Open Warning Light
Light engine oil pressure. If the light and
This warning light warns of an chime turn on while driving, safely This warning light will illuminate when
overheated engine condition. If the stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon the swing gate is open.
engine coolant temperature is too as possible. After the vehicle is safely stopped,
high, this indicator will illuminate and restart the engine and monitor the Oil Pressure NOTE:
a single chime will sound. If the temperature Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will is still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and single chime.
sound for four minutes or until the engine is contact an authorized dealer for further
able to cool, whichever comes first. assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer — If Equipped
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning illuminated, the engine can be operated but it is This warning light will illuminate to
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the warn of a high transmission fluid
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the activated. It should go out with the engine
engine at idle or slightly faster, with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until Light continuously with the engine running, a
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you This warning light monitors the ABS. malfunction has been detected in the ESC
may continue to drive normally. The light will turn on when the ignition system. If this warning light remains on after
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
WARNING! RUN position and may stay on for as driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds 3
If you continue operating the vehicle when long as four seconds. greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light If the ABS light remains on or turns on while authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake the problem diagnosed and corrected.
over, come in contact with hot engine or system is not functioning and service is  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
exhaust components and cause a fire. required as soon as possible. However, the cator Light come on momentarily each time
conventional brake system will continue to the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
Light is not also on.  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
Continuous driving with the Transmission sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
eventually cause severe transmission dam-
RUN position, have the brake system inspected  This light will come on when the vehicle is in
age or transmission failure. an ESC event.
by an authorized dealer.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for This warning light will indicate when
approximately 15 seconds when the the Electronic Stability Control system
Vehicle Security system is arming, is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
and then will flash slowly until the the instrument cluster will come on
vehicle is disarmed. when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
Warning Light — If Equipped Equipped to alert serious conditions that could lead to
This warning light indicates the ESC is This warning light will illuminate when immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
off. the windshield washer fluid is low converter damage. The vehicle should be
Ú page 368. serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even Warning Light (MIL) WARNING!
if it was turned off previously. A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
The MIL is a part of an Onboard
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Diagnostic System called OBD II that enced above, can reach higher temperatures
Equipped monitors engine and automatic than in normal operating conditions. This can
transmission control systems. This cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
This warning light will illuminate when
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is flammable substances such as dry plants,
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
close the filler cap to disengage the
the bulb does not come on when turning the death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
light. If the light does not turn off,
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the pants or others.
please see an authorized dealer.
condition checked promptly.
Low Fuel Warning Light Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing CAUTION!
When the fuel level reaches gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this the light after engine start. The vehicle should
tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
light will turn on and a chime will be serviced if the light stays on through several
vehicle control system. It also could affect
sound. The light will remain on until typical driving styles. In most situations, the
fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is
fuel is added. vehicle will drive normally and will not require
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
towing.
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light — If Equipped Light — If Equipped Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate along This warning light will illuminate to The warning light switches on and a
with a dedicated message on the indicate a fault in the Forward message is displayed to indicate that
display (if equipped) if an unknown Collision Warning System. Contact an the tire pressure is lower than the
fluid not conforming with acceptable authorized dealer for service recommended value and/or that slow
characteristics is inserted, or if an average Ú page 297. pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may 3
detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — not be guaranteed.
as possible. If Equipped
Should one or more tires be in the condition
If the problem is not solved, a specific message This warning light will illuminate when mentioned above, the display will show the
will appear on the Instrument Cluster Display the Stop/Start system is not indications corresponding to each tire.
whenever a certain threshold is reached until it functioning properly and service is
will no longer be possible to start the engine. required. Contact an authorized CAUTION!
dealer for service.
When about 125 miles (200 km) are remaining Do not continue driving with one or more flat
before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a Cruise Control Fault Warning Light tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
continuous dedicated message will appear on the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer-
This warning light will illuminate to
the instrument panel, accompanied by a chime. ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi-
indicate the Cruise Control System is
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped not functioning properly and service is
contact an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
required. Contact an authorized
This warning light will illuminate to sible.
dealer.
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during Sway Bar Fault Warning Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
driving, it means that the 4WD system should be checked monthly when cold and
This light will illuminate when there is
is not functioning properly and that service is inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
a fault in the sway bar disconnect
required. We recommend you drive to the by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
system Ú page 154.
nearest service center and have the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
serviced immediately. vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
pressure label, you should determine the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
CAUTION!
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. the system is not operating properly. The TPMS The TPMS has been optimized for the original
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has malfunction indicator is combined with the low equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a tire pressure telltale. When the system detects and warning have been established for the
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of a malfunction, the telltale will flash for tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
your tires is significantly under inflated. approximately one minute and then remain able system operation or sensor damage may
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale continuously illuminated. This sequence will result when using replacement equipment
illuminates, you should stop and check your continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as that is not of the same size, type, and/or
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to long as the malfunction exists. When the style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat may not be able to detect or signal low tire cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
and can lead to tire failure. Under inflation also pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and occur for a variety of reasons, including the using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping installation of replacement or alternate tires or mended that you take your vehicle to an
ability. wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for from functioning properly. Always check the tion checked.
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
even if under inflation has not reached the level that the replacement or alternate tires and
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
pressure telltale. properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
This light indicates when the front Light — If Equipped
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped and/or rear axle locker fault has been This light will turn on when a ACC is
This light alerts the driver that the detected. not operating and needs service
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive Ú page 170.
mode, and the front and rear Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
driveshafts are mechanically locked Indicator Light — If Equipped Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
together forcing the front and rear wheels to This indicator light illuminates to This indicator light will illuminate 3
rotate at the same speed. indicate that Forward Collision when the front sway bar is
Warning is off Ú page 297. disconnected.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW This light indicates when the front, This indicator light will illuminate for
mode. The front and rear driveshafts rear, or both axles have been locked. approximately two seconds when the
are mechanically locked together The telltale will display the lock icon ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the on the front and rear axles to indicate position. Its duration may be longer
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear the current lock status. based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at will not initiate start until telltale is no longer
the wheels Ú page 154. Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped displayed Ú page 134.
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If vehicle is in the neutral mode. NOTE:
Equipped The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if
This light alerts the driver that the the intake manifold temperature is warm
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light enough.
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive part
time mode, and the front and rear This light indicates when the rear axle
driveshafts are mechanically locked lock has been activated Ú page 154.
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® 4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
CAUTION!
(UREA) Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the
The Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions The presence of water in the fuel system cir- vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
Additive AdBlue® (UREA) indicator cuit may cause severe damage to the injec- mode. The system will provide power
light illuminates when the AdBlue® tion system and irregular engine operation. If to all four wheels and shift the power
(UREA) level is low. the indicator light is illuminated, contact an between the front and rear axles as needed.
authorized dealer as soon as possible to This will provide maximum traction in dry and
Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as
bleed the system. If the above indications slippery conditions.
possible with at least 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of
come on immediately after refuelling, water
AdBlue® (UREA). Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
has probably been poured into the tank:
If filling the tank is done with a remaining range switch the engine off immediately and con- Equipped With A Premium Instrument
of AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to zero, you tact an authorized dealer. Cluster
may need to wait two minutes before starting
This indicator light will illuminate
the vehicle. GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS when the Cruise Control is set to the
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No desired speed Ú page 168.
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will Target Detected Indicator Light — If Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
illuminate when there is water Equipped This indicator light will illuminate
detected in the fuel filter. If this light
This light will turn on when the when the front fog lights are on
remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and Ú page 49.
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
there is no vehicle in front detected
prevent engine damage, and please see an Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 170.
authorized dealer.
This indicator light will illuminate
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With when the park lights or headlights are
Target Light — If Equipped turned on.
This will display when the ACC is set
and a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 170.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If 2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped NOTE:
Equipped With a Premium Instrument Cluster If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
This indicator light will illuminate This light alerts the driver that the Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in
when the Stop/Start function is in vehicle is in the two wheel drive high the instrument cluster display.
“Autostop” mode. mode. Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light Equipped With A Premium Instrument
When the left or right turn signal is — If Equipped Cluster 3
activated, the turn signal indicator will This indicator shows when the HDC This light will turn on when the Cruise
flash independently and the feature is turned on. The lamp will be Control has been turned on, but not
corresponding exterior turn signal on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can set.
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated only be armed when the transfer case Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
when the multifunction lever is moved down is in the “4WD Low” position and the vehicle
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
(left) or up (right). speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use This indicator light will illuminate
NOTE: when the Cruise Control is set.
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is flash on/off.
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on. Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if Equipped High Beam Indicator Light
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. This light will turn on when This indicator light will illuminate to
WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS “Selec-Speed Control” is activated. indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light activated, push the multifunction
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensure the
— If Equipped vehicle is in 4WD Low and push the button on lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
This light will turn on when the vehicle the Instrument Panel. turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
equipped with ACC has been turned lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
on, but not set.
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
WARNING!
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario. soon as possible.  ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
GRAY I NDICATOR L IGHTS CAUTION! connection port in order to read the VIN,
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could diagnose, or service your vehicle.
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster cause further damage to the emission  If unauthorized equipment is connected to
This light will turn on when the Cruise control system. It could also affect fuel the OBD II connection port, such as a
Control has been turned on, but not economy and driveability. The vehicle must driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
set. be serviced before any emissions tests can
 Be possible that vehicle systems,
be performed.
including safety related systems, could
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated running, severe catalytic converter damage could occur that may result in an acci-
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This and power loss will soon occur. Immediate dent involving serious injury or death.
system monitors the performance of the service is required.
 Access, or allow others to access, infor-
emissions, engine, and transmission control mation stored in your vehicle systems,
systems. When these systems are operating ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM
including personal information.
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
connection port to allow access to information
government regulations. related to the performance of your emissions MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
If any of these systems require service, the OBD controls. Authorized service technicians may In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator need to access this information to assist with to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions control system. Failure to pass could
and other information to assist your service emissions system Ú page 210. prevent vehicle registration.
technician in making repairs. Although your
For states that require an Inspection 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
and Maintenance (I/M), this check the ON position, you will see the see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on come on as part of a normal bulb check. failure or replacement, you may need to do
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
system is ready for testing. things will happen: normally would in order for your OBD II system
The OBD II system may not be ready if your to update. A recheck with the above test routine
 The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a may then indicate that the system is now ready. 3
and then return to being fully illuminated
depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the until you turn OFF the ignition or start the Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
OBD II system should be determined not ready engine. This means that your vehicle's system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. OBD II system is not ready and you during normal vehicle operation you should
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, should not proceed to the I/M station. have your vehicle serviced before going to the
which you can use prior to going to the test I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system  The MIL will not flash at all and will because the MIL is on with the engine running.
is ready, you must do the following: remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
engine. This means that your vehicle's
but do not crank or start the engine.
OBD II system is ready and you can
NOTE: proceed to the I/M station.
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
134
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE WARNING! (Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) EQUIPPED
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
heat build-up may cause serious injury or PARK position (vehicle can also be started in
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
death. NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting to
fasten your seat belts.
any driving range.
WARNING! MANUAL T RANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED NORMAL STARTING
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
the key fob from the ignition and lock your in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before START/STOP Button
vehicle. starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or NEUTRAL.
not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to
with access to an unlocked vehicle. the floor. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
tended is dangerous for a number of once.
In 4WD Low mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the
reasons. A child or others could be seriously 3. The system takes over and attempts to start
engine will start regardless of whether or not
or fatally injured. Children should be the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This
warned not to touch the parking brake, starter will disengage automatically after
feature enhances off-road performance by
brake pedal or the gear selector. 10 seconds.
allowing the vehicle to start when in 4WD Low
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the without having to press the clutch pedal. The 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- “4WD Low Indicator Light” will illuminate when engine prior to the engine starting, push the
dren. A child could operate power windows, the transfer case has been shifted into this button again.
other controls, or move the vehicle. mode.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
NOTE: remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode) 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm if the engine is turned off when the third time to return the ignition to the OFF
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing transmission is not in PARK. mode (instrument cluster will display
the accelerator pedal. “OFF”).
NOTE:
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
The system will automatically time out and the AUTOPARK
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in
and release the ENGINE START/STOP placing the vehicle in PARK should the
the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and
button. situations on the following pages occur. It is a
the transmission is in PARK.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
back up system and should not be relied upon 4
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With as the primary method by which the driver shifts
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or the vehicle into PARK.
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/ NEUTRAL Position)
The conditions under which AutoPark will
STOP button is pushed once, the The ENGINE START/STOP button operates engage are outlined on the following pages.
transmission will automatically select PARK similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
and the engine will turn off while the ignition OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition WARNING!
will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF modes without starting the vehicle and use the
mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the  Driver inattention could lead to failure to
accessories, follow these steps:
PARK position, or it could roll. place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode. VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), to place the ignition to the ACC mode indicated in the instrument cluster display
pushing the START/STOP button once will (instrument cluster will display “ACC”). and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
turn the engine off. The ignition will remain is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
in the ACC mode. 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
an added precaution, always apply the
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
mode (instrument cluster will display “ON/
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be RUN”). (Continued)
held for two seconds (or three short pushes in
a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
WARNING! (Continued) the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle vehicle may AutoPark.
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not may AutoPark. AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
designed to replace the need to shift your AutoPark will engage when all of these is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system conditions are met: The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
and should not be relied upon as the  Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
primary method by which the driver shifts transmission cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
the vehicle into PARK.
 Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is (1.9 km/h).
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns removed and the driver is not on the seat
(seat pad sensor detects driver missing) WARNING!
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these  Vehicle is not in PARK If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
conditions are met:  Driver’s door is removed the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
 Vehicle is equipped with an eight-speed  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
transmission  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
position can roll. As an added precaution,
 Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is  Brake pedal is not pressed always apply the parking brake when exiting
removed and the driver is not on the seat The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then the vehicle.
(seat pad sensor detects driver missing) Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
 Vehicle is not in PARK cluster. 4WD LOW
 Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
NOTE:
 Ignition switched from RUN to OFF vehicle in 4WD Low.
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
NOTE:
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P” displayed in the instrument cluster.
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will to select desired gear. Additional customer warnings will be given
change to ACC mode. when both of these conditions are met:
 Vehicle is not in PARK
 Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be

WARNING! AFTER S TARTING
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
The idle speed is controlled automatically and
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle  Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
will decrease as the engine warms up.
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed. into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle attempt to start the vehicle. This could STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the result in flash fire causing serious personal
instrument cluster display and on the gear injury. (IF EQUIPPED)
selector. As an added precaution, always apply  Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your
EXTREME COLD W EATHER (B ELOW automatic transmission cannot be started seat belts. 4
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the The starter is allowed to crank for up to
–22°F O R −30°C) catalytic converter and once the engine has 30-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
To ensure reliable starting at these started, ignite and damage the converter between such intervals will protect the starter
temperatures, use of an externally powered and vehicle. from overheating.
electric engine block heater (available from an  If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
authorized dealer) is recommended. booster cables may be used to obtain a WARNING!
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART start from a booster battery or the battery in  Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
If the engine fails to start after you have another vehicle. This type of start can be complete stop, then shift the automatic
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 352. transmission into PARK and apply the
followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedure, it may be flooded. Push parking brake.
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and CAUTION!  Always make sure the wireless ignition
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than node is in the OFF mode, key fob is
To prevent damage to the starter, do not con-
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
tinuously crank the engine for more than
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in locked.
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal before trying again. (Continued)
and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
required for cold starts with temperatures

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! under -20°F (-28°C).
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or  The engine is allowed to crank as long as
NOTE:
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving 30 seconds. If the engine fails to start
during this period, please wait at least two The engine block heater cord is a factory
children in a vehicle unattended is
minutes for the starter to cool before installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally repeating start procedure. heater cords are available from an authorized
injured. Children should be warned not to Mopar dealer.
 If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light”
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the  A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter
remains on, DO NOT START engine before
gear selector. housing aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is
you drain the water from the fuel filters to
controlled by a built-in thermostat.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the avoid engine damage Ú page 375.
 A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION engine starting and reduces the amount of
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go white smoke generated by a warming engine.
Start the engine with the transmission gear
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could selector in the PARK (P) position. Apply the NORMAL STARTING
operate power windows, other controls, or brake before shifting to any driving range. Observe the instrument cluster lights when
move the vehicle. starting the engine.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior The engine block heater is a resistance heater NOTE:
heat build-up may cause serious injury or installed in the water jacket of the engine. It Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
death. requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Its the accelerator pedal.
NOTE: use is recommended for environments that 1. Always apply the parking brake.
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature routinely fall below -10°F (-23°C). It should be
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
could result in evident white smoke. This condi- used when the vehicle has not been running
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
tion will disappear as the engine warms up. overnight or longer periods and should be
once.
plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is
NOTE: STARTING FLUIDS WARNING! (Continued)

A delay of the start of up to five seconds is
The engine is equipped with a glow plug
possible under very cold conditions. The "Wait  Do not leave the key fob in or near the
preheating system. If the instructions in this
to Start" telltale will be illuminated during the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
manual are followed, the engine should start in
pre-heat process. When the engine “Wait To dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
all conditions and no type of starting fluid
Start” telltale goes off the engine will automati- vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
should be used.
cally crank. in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
WARNING! operate power windows, other controls, or
CAUTION! move the vehicle.
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains 4
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid death. Observe the following when the diesel engine is
engine damage Ú page 375. operating:
 When leaving the vehicle, always make
 All message center lights are off.
3. The system will automatically engage the sure the keyless ignition node is in the
starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
fails to start, the starter will disengage vehicle and lock the vehicle.  Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
automatically after 25 seconds.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or  Voltmeter operation.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the with access to an unlocked vehicle. The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
engine prior to the engine starting, push the Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- various engine temperatures. This is caused by
ENGINE START/STOP button again. tended is dangerous for a number of the glow plug heating system. The number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light
or fatally injured. Children should be controlled by the engine control module. Glow
has turned off.
warned not to touch the parking brake, plug heater operation can run for several
6. Release the parking brake. brake pedal or the gear selector. minutes. Once the heater operation is
(Continued) complete, the voltmeter needle will stabilize.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS

Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may require special considerations. The following charts suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels (ULSD)” ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart

*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions 0°F (-18°C) exist.
NOTE: Winter Front Cover ENGINE IDLING

 Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number A Winter front or cold weather cover can be Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling
1 ULSD Fuel results in a noticeable decrease used in ambient temperatures below 32°F may be harmful to your engine because
in fuel economy. (0°C), especially during extended idle combustion chamber temperatures can drop so
 Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number conditions. This cover is equipped with four low that the fuel may not burn completely.
2 ULSD Fuel and Number 1 ULSD Fuel which flaps for managing total grille opening in varying Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
reduces the temperature at which wax crys- ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head
tals form in fuel. weather cover is to be used, the flaps should be valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned
 The fuel grade should be clearly marked on in the full open position to allow air flow to the fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
the pump at the fuel station. cooling module and automatic transmission oil and causing rapid wear to the engine. 4
 The engine requires the use of “Ultra Low cooler. When ambient temperatures drop below
0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Sulfur Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel
could result in engine and exhaust system suitable cold weather cover is available from a After full load operation, idle the engine for a
damage Ú page 434. Mopar dealer. few minutes before shutting it down. This idle
period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant
 If climatized or Number 1 ULSD Fuel is not Engine Warm-Up to carry excess heat away from the
available, and you are operating below 20°F
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is turbocharger.
(-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equiva- NOTE:
engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the
lent) is recommended to avoid gelling (see Refer to the following chart for proper engine
Fuel Operating Range Chart). oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
shutdown.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate
Engine Oil Usage the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes
See Engine Fluids and Lubricants for the correct before full loads are applied.
engine oil viscosity Ú page 438.
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
NOTE:  Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission NOTE:

Under certain conditions the engine fan will run gear. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
after the engine is turned off. These conditions  Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily. corrected. This light does not show how much
are under high load and high temperature oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
conditions. NOTE: checked under the hood.
If the coolant temperature is too high, the A/C
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS — AUTOMATIC will automatically turn off. CAUTION!
TRANSMISSION If oil pressure falls to less than normal read-
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
To reduce the potential for engine and ings, shut the engine off immediately. Failure
Pressure
transmission overheating in high ambient to do so could result in immediate and severe
temperature conditions, take the following If the low oil pressure warning light turns on
engine damage.
actions: while driving, stop the vehicle and shut down
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
 City Driving — When stopped, shift the trans-
sound when the light turns on.
mission into NEUTRAL (N) and increase
engine idle speed.
 Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed

WARNING!
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the Remember to disconnect the engine block
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in heater cord before driving. Damage to the
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause
the engine requires service. Some important electrocution.
clues are:
 Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
 Sudden loss of power GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
Diesel Engine Block Heater Cord Location 4
 Unusual engine noises A long break-in period is not required for the
The engine block heater cord is found under the
 Fuel, oil or coolant leaks engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
hood bundled up next to the Power Distribution
 Sudden change, outside the normal oper- your vehicle.
Center (PDC).
ating range, in the engine operating tempera- Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
For diesel engines, its use is recommended for
ture (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
environments that routinely fall below -10°F
 Excessive smoke speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
(-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has
 Oil pressure drop desirable.
not been running for long periods of time and
should be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED use is required for cold starts with temperatures within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
The engine block heater warms the engine, and under -20°F (-28°C). to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
The engine block heater cord is found under the
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC should be avoided.
hood bundled in front of the battery tray.
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire The engine oil installed in the engine at the
extension cord. factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality  Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push
grades see Ú page 438.  Vary throttle position at highway speeds the center button, then lower the lever
when carrying or towing significant weight. completely.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
or no load operation will extend the time before
NOTE: the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel
A new engine may consume some oil during its economy and power may be seen at this time.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera- The engine oil installed in the engine at the
tion. This should be considered a normal part of factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — vehicle operations will occur. For recommended Parking Brake Lever
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) viscosity and quality grades see Ú page 438.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
The diesel engine does not require a break-in MUST NEVER BE USED. the instrument cluster will illuminate.
period due to its construction. Normal operation
is allowed, providing the following PARKING BRAKE NOTE:
recommendations are followed: Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the  When the parking brake is applied and the
 Warm up the engine before placing it under parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to automatic transmission is placed in gear, the
load. leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle
 Do not operate the engine at idle for manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert
prolonged periods. gear. the driver. Fully release the parking brake
 Use the appropriate transmission gear to
before attempting to move the vehicle.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
prevent engine lugging. console. To apply the parking brake, pull the  This light only shows that the parking brake is
 Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera- lever up as firmly as possible. To release the applied. It does not show the degree of brake
ture indicators. application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the

front wheels toward the curb on a downhill WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!
grade and away from the curb on an uphill  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic with access to an unlocked vehicle. the parking brake released, a brake system
transmission, apply the parking brake before Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- malfunction is indicated. Have the brake sys-
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the tended is dangerous for a number of tem serviced by an authorized dealer immedi-
load on the transmission locking mechanism reasons. A child or others could be seriously ately.
may make it difficult to move the gear selector or fatally injured. Children should be
out of PARK. warned not to touch the parking brake, MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
brake pedal or the gear selector.
WARNING! 4
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the WARNING!
 Never use the PARK position on an auto- vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- You or others could be injured if you leave the
matic transmission as a substitute for the dren. A child could operate power windows, vehicle unattended without having the park-
parking brake. Always apply the parking other controls, or move the vehicle. ing brake fully applied. The parking brake
brake fully when parked to guard against should always be applied when the driver is
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
vehicle movement and possible injury or not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
damage.
lead to brake failure and a collision.
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove CAUTION!
 Always fully apply the parking brake when
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause  Never drive with your foot resting on the
vehicle.
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle
(Continued) an automatic transmission in PARK, a on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear
gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle on the clutch.
to roll and cause damage or injury.
 Do not drive with your hand resting on the
gear selector as the force exerted, even if
slight, could lead over time to premature
wear of the gearbox internal components.
NOTE: NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
increased effort in shifting until the transmission is normal. This noise can be most notice-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal. able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but
it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the trans-
mission is warm. This noise is normal and is not
an indication of a problem with your clutch or
Shift Pattern transmission.
SHIFTING Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly for both fuel economy and performance, it
Transmission Gear Selector press the accelerator pedal. should be upshifted as listed in recommended
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal You should always use FIRST gear when starting shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds
and place the gear selector into the desired from a standing position. listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or
gear position (the diagram for the engagement pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
of the gears is displayed on the handle of the speeds may not apply.
selector).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below
the knob and move the gear selector all the way
left and then forward.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
3.6L
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)
2WD High and 4WD High only. Vehicle speeds in Do not downshift for additional engine brak-  When descending a hill, be very careful to
4WD Low would be significantly less. ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels downshift one gear at a time to prevent 4
could lose their grip, and the vehicle could overspeeding the engine which can cause
DOWNSHIFTING
skid. engine damage, and/or clutch damage,
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
recommended to preserve brakes when driving transfer case is in low range the vehicle
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at CAUTION!
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage
the right time provides better acceleration when  Skipping gears and downshifting into lower are significantly lower.
you desire to resume speed. Downshift gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage
 Failure to follow the maximum recom-
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid the engine and clutch systems. Any attempt
mended downshifting speeds may cause
overspeeding the engine and clutch. to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal
the engine damage and/or damage the
pressed may result damage to the clutch
NOTE: clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
system. Shifting into lower gear and
The manual transmission shift system is releasing the clutch may result in engine  Descending a hill in low range with clutch
equipped with gear blockers, which will prevent damage. pedal pressed could result in clutch
downshifts into FIRST or SECOND gear above damage.
(Continued)
certain vehicle speeds.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
2WD High and 4WD High only, vehicle speeds in  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
4WD Low would be significantly less. NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
above idle speed. move the transmission gear selector out of
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF  Before shifting into any gear, make sure PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
EQUIPPED your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK. WARNING!  The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
 Never use the PARK position as a substi- vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
CAUTION!
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
after the vehicle has come to a complete to guard against vehicle movement and without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
stop. possible injury or damage. completely stopped, and the PARK position is
(Continued) (Continued) properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
NOTE:
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than with access to an unlocked vehicle. engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- tended is dangerous for a number of mode) before exiting the vehicle.
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You reasons. A child or others could be seriously
could lose control of the vehicle and hit or fatally injured. Children should be
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
someone or something. Only shift into gear warned not to touch the parking brake, I NTERLOCK SYSTEM
when the engine is idling normally and your brake pedal or the transmission gear This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that 4
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. selector. holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Do not leave the key fob in or near the unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle dren), and do not leave the ignition in the running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
while the engine is running. Before exiting a ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
vehicle, always come to a complete stop, operate power windows, other controls, or from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
then apply the parking brake, shift the move the vehicle. vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni- EIGHT–S PEED AUTOMATIC
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
TRANSMISSION
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
securing the vehicle against unwanted Interlock which requires the transmission to be The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is
movement. in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the displayed both beside the gear selector and in
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing push the lock button on the gear selector and
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
the transmission in PARK. This system also move the selector rearward or forward. To shift
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the the transmission out of PARK, the engine must
vehicle.
ignition is in the OFF mode. be running and the brake pedal must be
(Continued)
pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE The transmission gear selector provides PARK, (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into
speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
driving. made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
NOTE:
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position Gear Ranges
In the event of a mismatch between the gear Do not press the accelerator pedal when
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
selector position and the actual transmission shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
the transmission gear, and will display the
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
current gear in the instrument cluster
driving), the position indicator will blink continu- NOTE:
Ú page 153.
ously until the selector is returned to the proper After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
position, or the requested shift can be to allow the selected gear to engage before
completed. accelerating. This is especially important when
The electronically-controlled transmission the engine is cold.
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, PARK (P)
along with environmental and road conditions. This range supplements the parking brake by
The transmission electronics are locking the transmission. The engine can be
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on started in this range. Never attempt to use
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
a normal condition, and precision shifts will parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
develop within a few hundred miles Transmission Gear Selector range.
(kilometers). When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE NOTE:
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
when the accelerator pedal is released and the If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
the brake pedal when shifting between these pushed forward), it is probably in the
curb on an uphill grade.
gears. AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
When exiting the vehicle, always:

 Apply the parking brake.
 Shift the transmission into PARK.  The transmission may not engage PARK if  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
 Turn the ignition OFF.
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
 Remove the key fob from the vehicle. PARK, and verify that the transmission gear while the engine is running. Before exiting a
NOTE: position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is then apply the parking brake, shift the
transfer case is in a drive position. completely stopped, and the PARK position transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
is properly indicated, before exiting the tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
4
WARNING! vehicle. mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or securing the vehicle against unwanted
 Never use the PARK position as a substi- movement.
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
to guard against vehicle movement and the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
possible injury or damage. erate quickly forward or in reverse. You key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
could lose control of the vehicle and hit vehicle.
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and someone or something. Only shift into gear
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
when the engine is idling normally and your with access to an unlocked vehicle.
move the transmission gear selector out of foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
(Continued) tended is dangerous for a number of
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle. reasons. A child or others could be seriously
(Continued) or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
(Continued)
 Look at the transmission gear position

WARNING! (Continued) display and verify that it indicates the PARK CAUTION!
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the position (P), and is not blinking.  Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-  With brake pedal released, verify that the any other reason with the transmission in
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the gear selector will not move out of PARK. NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could REVERSE (R) damage.
operate power windows, other controls, or For Recreational Towing Ú page 199.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. 
move the vehicle.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has  For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 357.
come to a complete stop.
CAUTION! NEUTRAL (N) DRIVE (D)
 Before moving the transmission gear Use this range when the vehicle is standing for This range should be used for most city and
selector out of PARK, you must start the prolonged periods with the engine running. highway driving. It provides the smoothest
engine, and also press the brake pedal. Apply the parking brake and shift the upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector transmission into PARK if you must exit the economy. The transmission automatically
could result. vehicle. upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from position should be used for all normal operating
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, WARNING! conditions.
as this can damage the drivetrain. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off When frequent transmission shifting occurs
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are (such as when operating the vehicle under
The following indicators should be used to unsafe practices that limit your response to heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
ensure that you have properly engaged the changing traffic or road conditions. You might traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
transmission into the PARK position: lose control of the vehicle and have a colli- a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
 When shifting into PARK, push the lock sion. to select a lower gear Ú page 153. Under these
button on the gear selector and firmly move conditions, using a lower gear will improve
the gear selector all the way forward until it performance and extend transmission life by
stops and is fully seated. reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may may be illuminated. A message in the engine turns off.
be modified depending on engine and instrument cluster will inform the driver of the 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
transmission temperature as well as vehicle more serious conditions, and indicate what
5. Restart the engine.
speed. Normal operation will resume once the actions may be necessary.
transmission temperature has risen to a In the event of a momentary problem, the 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
suitable level. transmission can be reset to regain all forward problem is no longer detected, the
MANUAL (M) gears by performing the following steps: transmission will return to normal
operation.
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE NOTE:
position) enables full manual control of AutoStick 4
 In cases where the instrument cluster
transmission shifting also known as AutoStick
message indicates the transmission may not AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
mode. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
re-engage after engine shutdown, perform feature providing manual shift control, giving
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
this procedure only in a desired location you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
position will manually select the transmission
(preferably, at an authorized dealer). allows you to maximize engine braking,
gear, and will display the current gear in the
 Even if the transmission can be reset, we eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
instrument cluster Ú page 153.
recommend that you visit an authorized and improve overall vehicle performance. This
Transmission Limp Home Mode dealer at your earliest possible convenience. system can also provide you with more control
Transmission function is monitored An authorized dealer has diagnostic equip- during passing, city driving, cold slippery
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a ment to assess the condition of your trans- conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
condition is detected that could result in mission. many other situations.
transmission damage, Transmission Limp  If the transmission cannot be reset, autho- Operation
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the rized dealer service is required. To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
transmission may operate only in certain gears, 1. Stop the vehicle. selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if the DRIVE position). The current transmission
be severely degraded and the engine may stall. possible. If not, shift the transmission to gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In some situations, the transmission may not NEUTRAL. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually

shift the transmission.
 Holding the gear selector in the (-) position
will downshift the transmission to the lowest
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
AutoStick mode has the following operational gear possible at the current speed. WARNING!
benefits:  Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
Failure to engage a transfer case position
 The transmission will automatically down- when AutoStick is enabled.
completely can cause transfer case damage
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine  The system may revert to automatic shift or loss of power and vehicle control. You
lugging) and will display the current gear. mode if a fault or overheat condition is could have a collision. Do not drive the vehi-
 The transmission will automatically down- detected. cle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop. NOTE:
After a stop, the driver should manually When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick FOUR-P OSITION T RANSFER CASE — IF
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is is not active. EQUIPPED
accelerated.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
 You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4WD Low or out of the AutoStick position at any time
range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow
without taking your foot off the accelerator
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
pedal.
SECOND or THIRD gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions. WARNING!
 If a requested downshift would cause the
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
 The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
too low of a vehicle speed. skid, causing a collision or personal injury. Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides four mode positions: N (Neutral) The transfer case is intended to be driven in the
 2H (2WD High) — Two-Wheel Drive High 2WD High position for normal street and
Range WARNING! highway conditions, such as hard-surfaced
 4H (4WD High) —Four-Wheel Drive High You or others could be injured or killed if you roads.
Range leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer In the event that additional traction is required,
 N (Neutral) case in the (N) Neutral position without first the transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer positions can be used to lock the front and rear
 4L (4WD Low) — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
case (N) Neutral position disengages both the driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear
For additional information on the appropriate front and rear driveshafts from the power- wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if High and 4WD Low positions are intended for 4
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or loose, slippery road surfaces only and not
2WD High manual transmission is in gear). The parking intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for brake should always be applied when the High and 4WD Low positions on hard-surfaced
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard driver is not in the vehicle. roads will cause increased tire wear and
surfaced roads. damage to the driveline components. Refer to
4WD High N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the “Shifting Procedures” in this section for further
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. information on shifting into 4WD High or 4WD
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
To be used for flat towing behind another Low.
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
vehicle Ú page 199. The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction 4WD Low vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing into the 4WD High position.
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
speed. This range provides additional traction engine speed will be approximately three times
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2WD
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph High or 4WD High positions at a given road
(40 km/h). speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles NOTE: position. Do not pause with the transfer case in
depends on tires of equal size, type, and  Do not attempt to make a shift while only the N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
circumference on each wheel. Any difference front or rear wheels are spinning. The front the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for release the clutch pedal on a manual
to the transfer case. the shift to take place. Shifting while only the transmission.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
NOTE:
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe damage to the transfer case.
Shifting into or out of 4WD Low is possible with
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster  Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
than road conditions permit. experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or culty may occur due to the mating teeth not being
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle properly aligned. Several attempts may be
Shifting Procedures loading, or cold temperatures. required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
2WD High To 4WD High Or 4WD High To 2WD  Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is completion to occur. The preferred method is with
High normal. the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
Shifting between 2WD High and 4WD High can During cold weather, you may experience Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4WD
be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. increased effort in shifting until the transfer Low with the vehicle moving faster than 1 to
The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to case fluid warms up. This is normal. 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion,
4WD High To 4WD Low Or 4WD Low To 4WD
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster WARNING!
High
if you momentarily release the accelerator Failure to engage a transfer case position
pedal after completing the shift. Do not With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into completely can cause transfer case damage
accelerate while shifting the transfer case. or loss of power and vehicle control. You
Apply a constant force when shifting the NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is could have a collision. Do not drive the vehi-
transfer case lever. cle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired
FIVE-P OSITION TRANSFER CASE — IF For additional information on the appropriate N (Neutral)
E QUIPPED use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below: WARNING!
2WD High You or others could be injured or killed if you
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard case in the (N) Neutral position without first
surfaced roads. fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
4WD High AUTO case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range
sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if 4
the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
drive system will be automatically engaged
manual transmission is in gear). The parking
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction.
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector brake should always be applied when the
Additional traction for varying road conditions.
driver is not in the vehicle.
The transfer case provides five mode positions: 4WD High PT
 2H (2WD High) — Two-Wheel Drive High Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This Neutral — This range disengages both the front
Range range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
 4H AUTO (4WD High AUTO) — Four-Wheel forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Drive Auto High Range same speed. This range provides additional Ú page 199.
 4H PT (4WD High PT) — Four-Wheel Drive Part traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. 4WD Low
Time High Range Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
 N (Neutral) provides low speed four-wheel drive. It
 4L (4WD Low) — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the motion, the transfer case will engage/
the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and disengage faster if you momentarily release the
four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for rear driveshafts are locked together. The light accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do
normal street and highway conditions on dry will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted not accelerate while shifting the transfer case.
hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD into the 4WD High position. Apply a constant force when shifting the
will have greater fuel economy benefits as the When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the transfer case lever.
front axle is not engaged in 2WD. engine speed will be approximately three times 2WD High/4WD High AUTO To 4WD High PT Or
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2WD 4WD High PT To 2WD High/4WD High AUTO
mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle High or 4WD High positions at a given road Shifting between 2WD High/4WD High AUTO to
is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine. 4WD High PT can be made with the vehicle
the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses depends on tires of equal size, type, and speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With
a loss of traction. Because the front axle is circumference on each wheel. Any difference the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel will adversely affect shifting and cause damage engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
economy than the 2WD mode. to the transfer case. release the accelerator pedal after completing
In the event that additional traction is required, Because four-wheel drive provides improved the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
the transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe transfer case. Apply a constant force when
positions can be used to lock the front and rear turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster shifting the transfer case lever.
driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear than road conditions permit.
wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD NOTE:
High and 4WD Low positions are intended for Shifting Procedures  Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
loose, slippery road surfaces only and not 2WD High To 4WD High AUTO Or 4WD High front or rear wheels are spinning. The front
intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4WD AUTO To 2WD High and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for
High and 4WD Low positions on hard-surfaced the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
Shifting between 2WD High and 4WD High
roads will cause increased tire wear and damage front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
AUTO can be made with the vehicle stopped or
to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting damage to the transfer case.
in motion. The preferred shifting speed would
Procedures” in this section for further information
be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in
on shifting into 4WD High or 4WD Low.
 Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or completion to occur. The preferred method is with
WARNING!
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip dif-
loading, or cold temperatures. Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4WD ferential, never run the engine with one rear
 Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is Low with the vehicle moving faster than 1 to wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive
normal. 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). through the rear wheel remaining on the
During cold weather, you may experience ground and cause you to lose control of your
WARNING! vehicle.
increased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal. Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage AXLE LOCK (T RU-L OK) F RONT A ND 4
4WD High PT/4WD High AUTO To 4WD Low Or
4WD Low To 4WD High PT/4WD High AUTO
or loss of power and vehicle control. You REAR — IF E QUIPPED
could have a collision. Do not drive the vehi- The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to cle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into instrument panel (to the right of the steering
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a column).
TRAC-L OK REAR AXLE — IF E QUIPPED
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant
transfer case lever firmly to the desired driving force to both rear wheels and reduces
position. Do not pause with the transfer case in wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one
N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place driving wheel. If traction differs between the two
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or rear wheels, the differential automatically
release the clutch pedal on a manual proportions the usable torque by providing
transmission. more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
NOTE: driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
Shifting into or out of 4WD Low is possible with slippery surface, a slight application of the Axle Lock Switch Panel
the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi- accelerator will supply maximum traction.
culty may occur due to the mating teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be
This feature will only activate when the following AXLE LOCK (T RU-L OK) REAR ONLY — IF  Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4WD High.
conditions are met: EQUIPPED  The vehicle must be in Off Road+ active
 Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4WD Low. Ú page 162.
The rear axle may be locked in 4WD High if the
 Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h)  Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode
proper conditions are met.
or less. Ú page 287.
 Both right and left wheels on axle are at the WARNING!  Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel
same speed. slip or tight cornering condition.
This mode is intended for off-highway or
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK off-road use only and should not be used on To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK
switch down to lock the rear axle only (the any public roadways. switch down to lock the rear axle only (“REAR
“REAR ONLY” will illuminate), push the switch ONLY” will illuminate).
up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK
“FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear instrument panel (to the right of the steering OFF button.
axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch column). Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
again will lock or unlock the front axle. out of 4WD High, Off Road+ is turned off by the
NOTE: driver, ESC “Full Off” is exited, or the ignition
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are switch is turned to the OFF position.
fully locked or unlocked. NOTE:
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle
button. is fully locked or unlocked.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken The rear axle lock system may temporarily
out of 4WD Low, or the ignition switch is turned disengage the rear locker under some
to the OFF position. conditions.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above Axle Lock Switch Panel If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically
30 mph (48 km/h), and will automatically This feature will only activate when the following re-lock as soon as the system allows.
re-lock once vehicle speed is less than 10 mph conditions are met:
(16 km/h).
ELECTRONIC SWAY B AR DISCONNECT — met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in NOTE:
I F EQUIPPED on-road mode during normal driving conditions. The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differ-
Your vehicle may be equipped with an WARNING! ences. This condition is due to driving surface
electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. differences or vehicle loading. In order for the
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected
This system allows greater front suspension stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at
travel in off-road situations. the right and left halves of the bar must be
speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a discon-
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR nected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to aligned. This alignment may require that the
switch located on the instrument panel (to the the loss of vehicle control, which could result vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked
right of the steering column). from side to side.
in serious injury. Under certain circum- 4
stances, the front stabilizer/sway bar To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
enhances vehicle stability and assists with switch again.
vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabi- WARNING!
lizer/sway bar at speeds over 18 mph If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
(29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle
speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to
the system will once again attempt to return drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
to off-road mode. Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a
SWAY BAR Switch
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contrib-
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to ute to the loss of vehicle control, which could
system. Push the switch again to deactivate the either 4WD High or 4WD Low and push the result in serious injury.
system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” (located SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road position
in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when Ú page 154. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will
the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
Indicator Light” will flash during activation disconnected.
transition, or when activation conditions are not
OFF R OAD+ — I F EQUIPPED When Off Road+ is active, the following features 4H (4WD High)
will activate:  Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved
 The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the sand performance/ wheel slip focus, change
instrument cluster display in shift schedule for sport mode, pedal cali-
 A mode specific message will display the bration set to aggressive, operates at
instrument cluster display elevated vehicle speeds
 Off Road pages will launch on the radio  Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip
head-unit if selected in radio settings tuning brake lock differential with no engine
 The Off Road Camera will launch if selected
management
in radio settings  Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to unlimited speed

Off Road+ Switch  Off Road+: Will default to OFF between igni-
behave in different ways depending on the 4WD
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to mode in use. The following enhancements will tion cycles
improve the user experience when using occur when using Off Road+. Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
specific Off Road driving modes. To activate Off (ACC) will not function while using Off Road+.
4L (4WD Low)
Road+, push the Off Road+ switch in the switch A dedicated cluster message will display
bank. The vehicle’s performance will improve  Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl
indicating this if either feature is activated while
depending on which Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) and controllability focus, change in shifting
in Off Road+.
mode is activated. schedule when rock crawling, pedal calibra-
tion shifted to de-gain and low range, oper- If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off
NOTE: ates at lower vehicle speeds Road+, the following will occur on the vehicle:
Off Road+ will not function in 2WD High mode.  Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differ-  Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control
If the button is pushed while in 2WD High mode, ential tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear will turn off, but Stability Control will remain
the cluster display will show the message “Off  Off Road+: Recall the last status between
active.
Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD”. ignition cycles  Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds:
Traction Control and Stability Control will turn
off.
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an

icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
Your vehicle is equipped with an screen, it indicates that extreme steering TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
electro-hydraulic power steering system that maneuvers may have occurred, which caused The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is
will give you good vehicle response and an over temperature condition in the power developed to reduce fuel consumption. The
increased ease of maneuverability in tight steering system. You will lose power steering system will stop the engine automatically during
spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide assistance momentarily until the over a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
light efforts while parking and good feel while temperature condition no longer exists. Once met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the
driving. If the electro-hydraulic power steering driving conditions are safe, then pull over and accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the
system experiences a fault that prevents it from let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
providing power steering assist, then the
engine. 4
turns off Ú page 111.
system will provide mechanical steering ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy
capability. NOTE: duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
 Even if power steering assistance is no longer upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
CAUTION! operational, it is still possible to steer the engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
a substantial increase in steering effort, additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
electrically driven pump to reduce or stop
especially at very low vehicle speeds and from vehicle deceleration for use on engine
power steering assistance in order to prevent
during parking maneuvers. startup after a stop as well as providing launch
damage to the system. Normal operation will
 If the condition persists, see an authorized
torque assist.
resume once the system is allowed to cool.
dealer for service. NOTE:
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message It is recommended that Stop/Start system be
and a flashing icon are displayed on the disabled during off-road use.
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance Ú page 111.
Secondary Battery AUTOSTOP MODE POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES

Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
WARNING! N OT AUTOSTOP
battery used to power the Stop/Start system
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The  Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
secondary battery is located behind the wheel equipped with two batteries. Both the main
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
well for the front passenger wheel. and the supplemental batteries must be
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
12 Volt electrical system.
Start Screen. Situations when the engine will
 Serious injury or death could result if you do not stop include (but not limited to):
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
to properly disconnect, see an authorized
 Driver’s door is not closed.
dealer.
 Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every  Battery charge is low.
driver ignition start. At that time, the system will  The vehicle is on a steep grade.
go into STOP/START READY and if all other
 Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
Battery Locations conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
1 — Primary Battery AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode. achieved.
2 — Secondary Battery To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following  Gear selector in MANUAL (M) mode.
Must Occur:
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
 The system must be in STOP/START READY blower speed.
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
 HVAC set to MAX A/C.
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 111.  Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
 The vehicle must be completely stopped.
 Engine temperature too high.
 The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.  The transmission is not in a forward gear.
 Hood is open. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/
 Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral). Automatically While In Autostop Mode: S TART S YSTEM
 Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient  The transmission selector is moved out of
pressure. DRIVE.
 Accelerator pedal input.  To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
 Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from  Actual cabin temperature is significantly
previous auto-stop. different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
 Steering angle beyond threshold (ESS  HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
Models Only).  HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted higher.
4
 ACC is on and speed is set.
 Vehicle is at high altitude.  Battery voltage drops too low.
 System fault present.  Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven  A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
several times without the Stop/Start system  STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time switch bank). The light on the switch will
going into a STOP/START READY state under exceeds 5 minutes. illuminate. The “Stop/Start OFF” message will
more extreme conditions of the items listed  Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral). appear in instrument cluster display within the
above.  Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold Stop/Start section, and the autostop function
TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN (ESS Models Only). will be disabled Ú page 111.
AUTOSTOP MODE NOTE:
While in a forward gear, the engine will start The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle an ON condition every time the ignition is turned
pedal is pressed. The transmission will off and back on.
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/ a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
S TART S YSTEM met. Pressing the clutch pedal will
automatically restart the vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
off.
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
system, the system will not shut down the additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” from vehicle deceleration for use on engine Battery Locations
message will appear in the instrument cluster startup after a stop as well as providing launch 1 — Primary Battery
display Ú page 111. torque assist. 2 — Secondary Battery
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” NOTE:
message appears in the instrument cluster It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled AUTOSTOP MODE
display, have the system checked by an during off-road use. WARNING!
authorized dealer. Secondary Battery
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the  Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary equipped with two batteries. Both the main
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key battery used to power the Stop/Start system
start. and the supplemental batteries must be
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The disconnected to completely de-energize the
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL secondary battery is located behind the wheel
well for the front passenger wheel.
12 Volt electrical system.
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)  Serious injury or death could result if you do

not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is to properly disconnect, see an authorized
developed to reduce fuel consumption. The dealer.
system will stop the engine automatically during
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN
driver ignition start. It will remain in STOP/  Outside temperature is less than 10°F AUTOSTOP MODE
START NOT READY until you drive forward with a (–12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C).
vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the
 Actual cabin temperature is significantly
that time, the system will go into STOP/START engine will start when the clutch pedal is
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC. pressed (does not require complete/full pedal
READY and if all other conditions are met, can
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode. press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START
go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE
 Engine has not reached normal operating SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle
mode.
temperature. speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP
 Battery discharged. Conditions that will cause the engine to start
ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur: 4
 When driving in REVERSE. automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP
 The system must be in STOP/START READY
 Hood is open. ACTIVE mode
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster  Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral). The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
Ú page 111.  Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is  Actual cabin temperature is significantly
 Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph open. different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
(3 km/h).  Vehicle is at high altitude.  HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
 The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL  The vehicle is on a steep grade.  HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
position and the clutch pedal must be fully  Forward Gear is engaged.
manually adjusted higher.
released  STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time
 Steering angle beyond threshold. (ESS
POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE DOES Models Only). exceeds 5 minutes.
 Battery voltage drops too low.
N OT AUTOSTOP  System fault is present.
 Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check  HVAC set to MAX A/C.
many safety and comfort conditions to see if  STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
they are fulfilled. Situations when the engine several times without the Stop/Start system  Transfer case is in 4WD Low or N (Neutral).
will not stop include (but not limited to): going into a STOP/START READY state under  Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
more extreme conditions of the items listed (ESS Models Only).
above.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ 5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to an ON condition every time the ignition is
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
S TART S YSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
turned off and back on.
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
the switch bank). The light on the switch TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP/ (ACC) system:
will illuminate.  Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
S TART S YSTEM
preset speed.
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off. a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION automatically adjust the preset speed.
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start NOTE:
system, the system will not shut down the In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
message will appear in the instrument cluster will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
display Ú page 111. Always be aware of the mode selected.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear message appears in the instrument cluster CRUISE C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
in the instrument cluster Ú page 111. display, have the system checked by an When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the authorized dealer. accelerator operations at speeds greater than
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the 20 mph (32 km/h).
stopped. vehicle may not auto start and will need a key The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned start. right side of the steering wheel.
off, the engine can only be started and
stopped by cycling the ignition switch.
To Set A Desired Speed

WARNING!
Turn the Cruise Control on.
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. NOTE:
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi- The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
tions, and you could lose control and have an speed and on level ground before pushing the
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy SET (+) or SET (-) button.
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, When the vehicle has reached the desired
snow-covered or slippery. speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
Cruise Control Buttons release. Release the accelerator and the 4
To Activate vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
To Vary The Speed Setting
3 — SET (-)/Decel To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
4 — On/Off
turn the system off, push the on/off button a When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
5 — RES/Resume
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
NOTE: off. The system should be turned off when not in decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise use. U.S. Speed (mph)
Control system has been designed to shut down  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
WARNING!
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise Leaving the Cruised Control system on when subsequent tap of the button results in an
Control system can be reactivated by pushing not in use is dangerous. You could acciden- adjustment of 1 mph.
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting tally set the system or cause it to go faster  If the button is continually pushed, the set
the desired vehicle set speed. than you want. You could lose control and speed will continue to adjust until the button
have an accident. Always leave the system off is released, then the new set speed will be
when you are not using it. established.
Metric Speed (km/h)  Engine overspeed occurs

WARNING!
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once  Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmis-
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Cruise Control can be dangerous where the sion only)
Each subsequent tap of the button results in system cannot maintain a constant speed. Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
an adjustment of 1 km/h. Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi- in the OFF position erases the set speed from
 If the button is continually pushed, the set tions, and you could lose control and have an memory.
speed will continue to adjust until the button accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
is released, then the new set speed will be traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F
established. snow-covered or slippery. EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
To Accelerate For Passing To Resume Speed driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
While the Cruise Control is set, press the To resume a previously set speed, push the RES while traveling on highways and major
accelerator to pass as you would normally. button and release. Resume can be used at any roadways. However, it is not a safety system
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). and not designed to prevent collisions. The
return to the set speed. Cruise Control function performs differently if
To Deactivate
Using Cruise Control On Hills your vehicle is not equipped with ACC
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC Ú page 168.
The transmission may downshift on hills to (cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
maintain the vehicle set speed. slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise NOTE:
NOTE: Control without erasing the set speed from  If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up memory. ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
and down hills. A slight speed change on The following conditions will also deactivate the (not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
moderate hills is normal. Cruise Control without erasing the set speed matically to maintain a preset following
from memory: distance, while matching the speed of the
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
vehicle ahead.
occur so it may be preferable to drive without  Vehicle parking brake is applied
Cruise Control.  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
 Stability event occurs
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
 Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and

Forward Collision Warning system. WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC  Cannot take street, traffic, and weather  You should switch off the ACC system:
distance not set) will not detect vehicles conditions into account, and may be  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the limited upon adverse sight distance snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
mode selected Ú page 446. conditions. driving situations (i.e., in highway
WARNING!  Does not always fully recognize construction zones).
complex driving conditions, which can  When entering a turn lane or highway
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- result in wrong or missing distance off ramp; when driving on roads that
nience system. It is not a substitute for warnings. are winding, icy, snow-covered, slip-
4
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,  On vehicles with an automatic trans- pery, or have steep uphill or downhill
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle mission, will bring the vehicle to a slopes.
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, complete stop while following a vehicle  When towing a trailer up or down steep
most importantly, brake operation to ensure ahead and hold the vehicle for two slopes.
safe operation of the vehicle under all road seconds in the stop position. If the
vehicle ahead does not start moving  When circumstances do not allow safe
conditions. Your complete attention is
within two seconds the ACC system will driving at a constant speed.
always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow display a message that the system will
these warnings can result in a collision and release the brakes and that the brakes
death or serious personal injury. must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are
 The ACC system:
released.
 Does not react to pedestrians, (Continued)
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Adaptive Cruise Control Off When the system is turned on and in the ready
The buttons on the right side of the steering When ACC is deactivated, the display will read state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
wheel operate the ACC system. “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When the system is off, the instrument cluster
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
setting has not been selected, the display will NOTE:
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” You cannot engage ACC under the following
Adaptive Cruise Control Set conditions:
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is  When in 4WD Low
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”  When the brakes are applied
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the  When the parking brake is applied
instrument cluster display.  When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons The ACC screen may display once again if any of REVERSE or NEUTRAL
1 — Distance Setting Increase the following ACC activity occurs:  When the manual transmission is in FIRST
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off  System Cancel gear
3 — Distance Setting Decrease  Driver Override  When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
 System Off (32 km/h) (manual transmission)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
 ACC Proximity Warning  When the vehicle speed is below the
The instrument cluster display will show the minimum speed range
 ACC Unavailable Warning
current ACC system settings. The information it
The instrument cluster display will return to the  When the brakes are overheated
displays depends on ACC system status.
last display selected after five seconds of no  When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
ACC display activity.  When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
button until one of the following appears in the
low speeds
instrument cluster display: Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
 ESC Full Off mode is active
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Activate/Deactivate different modes, push the ACC on/off button On vehicles equipped with a manual
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise transmission, the ACC system cannot be set
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Control on/off button will result in turning on (32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in FIRST gear.
Ready.” (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
NOTE:
To turn the system off, push and release the WARNING!  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
again. At this time, the system will turn off and In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
the instrument cluster display will read system will not react to vehicles ahead. In
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” addition, the proximity warning does not acti-
the instrument cluster display. 4
vate and no alarm will sound even if you are
 If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
WARNING! too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sys- system will not be controlling the distance
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be
tem on when not in use is dangerous. You between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
sure to maintain a safe distance between
could accidentally set the system or cause it The vehicle speed will only be determined by
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
to go faster than you want. You could lose the position of the accelerator pedal.
aware which mode is selected.
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it. To Cancel
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
To Set A Desired Speed Speed Cruise Control systems:
20 mph (20 km/h).
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,  The brake pedal is applied
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button NOTE:  The CANC button is pushed
and release. The instrument cluster display will Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
 The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
show the set speed. 20 mph (32 km/h).
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
NOTE: position
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
be the current speed of the vehicle.
an ACC distance set. To change between the Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
 The vehicle parking brake is applied To Resume To Vary The Speed Setting
 The braking temperature exceeds normal If there is a set speed in the memory, push the To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
range (overheated) RES button and then remove your foot from the After setting a speed, you can increase the set
 The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
 The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph display will show the last set speed. decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
(24 km/h) (manual transmission only) Resume can be used at any speed above U.S. Speed (mph)
 The clutch is pressed for more than 10 20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
seconds (manual transmission only) Cruise Control is being used. will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
 The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph subsequent tap of the button results in an
than 10 seconds (manual transmission only) (0 km/h) when ACC is active. adjustment of 1 mph.
 The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual trans- NOTE:  If the button is continually pushed, the set
mission only) ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. ments until the button is released. The new
system: set speed is reflected in the instrument
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds WARNING! cluster display.
 Driver door is opened at low speeds The Resume function should only be used if Metric Speed (km/h)
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
To Turn Off a set speed that is too high or too low for pre- will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed vailing traffic and road conditions could Each subsequent tap of the button results in
in memory if: cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate an adjustment of 1 km/h.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off too sharply for safe operation. Failure to fol-  If the button is continually pushed, the set
button is pushed low these warnings can result in a collision speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button and death or serious personal injury. increments until the button is released. The
is pushed new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position
 4WD Low is engaged
NOTE: Setting The Following Distance In ACC To increase the distance setting, push the
When you override and push the SET (+) button The specified following distance for ACC can be Distance Setting Increase button and release.
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the set by varying the distance setting between four Each time the button is pushed, the distance
current speed of the vehicle. bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars setting increases by one bar (longer).
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set: (medium) and one bar (short). Using this To decrease the distance setting, push the
 When you use the SET (-) button to decel- distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle Each time the button is pushed, the distance
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set ahead. This distance setting displays in the setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
speed, the brake system will automatically instrument cluster display. If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
slow the vehicle. maintain the set speed. If a slower moving 4
 The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a Target Light. The system will then adjust vehicle
standstill, after two seconds the driver will speed automatically to maintain the distance
either have to push the RES (resume) button, setting, regardless of the set speed.
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
the ACC to the existing set speed. until:
 The ACC system maintains set speed when  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight above the set speed
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In Distance Settings
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
addition, downshifting may occur while 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
view of the sensor
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This 2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
is normal operation and necessary to main-  The distance setting is changed
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-  The system disengages Ú page 173
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
however, the driver can always apply the brakes signal and will only be active when passing on
WARNING!
manually, if necessary. the left hand side. When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
NOTE: ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the Transmission Only) Failure to follow these warnings can result in
ACC system applies the brakes. In the event that the ACC system brings your a collision and death or serious personal
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC vehicle to a standstill while following a vehicle injury.
predicts that its maximum braking level is not ahead, your vehicle will resume motion, without
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this any driver interaction, if the vehicle ahead Display Warnings And Maintenance
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
instrument cluster display and a chime will coming to a standstill. If the vehicle ahead does Warning
sound while ACC continues to apply its not start moving within two seconds of your
maximum braking capacity. The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver needs
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
NOTE: to push the RES (resume) button or press the
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster accelerator pedal to reengage ACC to the
performance.
display is a warning for the driver to take action existing set speed.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
and does not necessarily mean that the NOTE: such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
Forward Collision Warning system is applying After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a may also become temporarily blinded due to
the brakes autonomously. standstill for approximately three consecutive obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
minutes, the parking brake will be activated, cases, the instrument cluster display will display
Overtake Aid
and the ACC system will be cancelled. “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
door is opened, the parking brake will be Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled. while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle  Do not attach or install any accessories near display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
has left these areas. Under rare conditions, the sensor, including transparent material or Front Windshield” and the system will have
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an degraded performance.
objects in its path this warning may temporarily ACC system failure or malfunction. The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
occur. When the condition that deactivated the system Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
is no longer present, the system will return to displayed while driving in adverse weather
NOTE:
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
resume function by simply reactivating it. after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available. rare conditions, when the camera is not
NOTE:
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this 4
warning may temporarily occur.
should examine the sensor. It may require Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle mud, or other obstruction, have the radar should examine the windshield and the camera
behind the lower grille. sensor realigned at an authorized dealer. located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is “Clean Front Windshield” Warning an obstruction.
important to note the following maintenance The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
items: When the condition that created limited
Front Windshield” warning will display and a functionality is no longer present, the system
 Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe chime will sound when conditions temporarily will return to full functionality.
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious limit system performance. This most often
not to damage the sensor lens. occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in NOTE:
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor. snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Doing so could cause an ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
malfunction or failure and require a sensor obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
realignment. windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
 If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is these cases, the instrument cluster display will windshield and forward facing camera
damaged due to a collision, see an autho- inspected at an authorized dealer.
rized dealer for service.
“Service ACC/FCW” Warning The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
If the system turns off, and the instrument line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition Turn Or Bend Example
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
Using ACC On Hills
dealer.
ACC performance may be limited when driving
Precautions While Driving With ACC Offset Driving Condition Example on hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your
In certain driving situations, ACC may have lane depending on the speed, vehicle load,
Turns And Bends
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
following are examples of these types of
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
situations:
curve the system will resume your original set
Towing A Trailer speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC. functionality.
Offset Driving NOTE:
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may ACC Hill Example
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is Some narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles,
completely in the lane in which you are traveling near the outer edges of the lane or
traveling. In the lane changing example below, merging into the lane are not detected until they
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing have moved to the center of the lane. There may
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example 4
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
Narrow Vehicle Example distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
a parking maneuver). For limitations of this
ACC does not react to stationary objects and system and recommendations, see
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not Ú page 183.
react in situations where the vehicle you are
Lane Changing Example ParkSense will retain the last system state
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled region, the display will show a single solid arc in
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
at this gear selector position, the system will the center rear region and will produce a
the instrument cluster display Ú page 111. It
remain active until the vehicle speed is one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
provides visual warnings to indicate the
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
above. When in REVERSE and above the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
the detected obstacle.
system's operating speed, a warning will appear sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
within the instrument cluster display indicating PARKSENSE DISPLAY continuous.
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
become active again if the vehicle speed is cluster display will show the park assist ready rear region, the display will show a single
decreased to speeds less than approximately system status. flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
6 mph (9 km/h). The system will indicate a detected obstacle by and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
PARKSENSE SENSORS showing a single arc in one or more regions vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
based on the obstacle’s distance and location display will show the single arc moving closer to
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
relative to the vehicle. the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
continuous.
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches
79 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
(200 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Single 1/2- Sec-
Slow Slow Fast
Audible Alert ond Tone
None (for rear center (for rear center (for rear center Fast Continuous
Chime (for rear center
only) only) only)
only)
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: When the ParkSense switch is pushed The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, to disable the system, the instrument ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
if on, when the system is sounding an audio cluster display Ú page 111 will show ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
tone. the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
approximately five seconds. When the gear pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
ENABLING A ND DISABLING P ARKSENSE
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with disabled, the instrument cluster display will LED will remain on.
the ParkSense switch located below the show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
Uconnect display. long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4WD
Low).
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
ASSIST SYSTEM
display, see an authorized dealer.  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM taking care not to scratch or damage them.
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
condition, the instrument cluster display will Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use so can result in the system not working prop-
and it will display the “PARKSENSE rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches could provide a false indication that an
REQUIRED” message. (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or 4
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE poke the sensors.
 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
and the system has detected a faulted PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
condition, the instrument cluster display will carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
PRECAUTIONS
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE NOTE: bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the  Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of system misinterpreting a close object as a
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
ParkSense will not operate. ParkSense system operating properly. UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR to be displayed in the instrument cluster
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster display.
tions could affect the performance of Park-
display, make sure the outer surface and the Sense.
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
 When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
message continues to appear, see an remains off until you turn it on again, even if
authorized dealer. you cycle the ignition.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera

WARNING! CAUTION!
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
 Drivers must be careful when backing up  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is bottom of the Uconnect display.
even when using ParkSense. Always check unable to recognize every obstacle,
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind including small obstacles. Parking curbs
the Rear View Camera system on.
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, might be temporarily detected or not
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and detected at all. Obstacles located above or When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
blind spots before backing up. You are below the sensors will not be detected (with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera
responsible for safety and must continue to when they are in close proximity. mode is exited and the previous screen appears
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure  The vehicle must be driven slowly when again.
to do so can result in serious injury or using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
death. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is (with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the driver looks over image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
recommended that the ball mount and his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or the touchscreen button “X” to disable display
or damage to vehicles or obstacles The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be activated through the “Backup Camera” button
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball displayed in the touchscreen display along with in the “Controls” menu, and the vehicle speed is
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
on its size and shape, giving a false indica- across the top of the screen. After five seconds display timer for the image is initiated. The
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is image will continue to be displayed until the
located on the rear of the vehicle in the center display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
of the spare tire.
NOTE: The following table shows the approximate

distances for each zone:
CAUTION!
 If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
Distance To The Rear
be displayed continuously until deactivated Zone only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
Of The Vehicle
via the touchscreen button “X”, the transmis- camera is unable to view every obstacle or
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is 0 - 1 ft object in your drive path.
Red
placed in the OFF position. (0 - 30 cm)
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
 The touchscreen button “X” to disable display 1 ft - 6.5 ft be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
Yellow
of the camera image is made available ONLY (30 cm - 2 m) able to stop in time when an obstacle is
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
Green
6.5 ft or greater seen. It is recommended that the driver 4
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on (2 m or greater) look frequently over his/her shoulder when
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle using ParkView.
and its projected backup path based on the WARNING!
steering wheel position. A dashed center line NOTE:
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to Drivers must be careful when backing up If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/ even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
receiver. Camera. Always check carefully behind your rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, not cover the lens.
When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
spots before backing up. You are responsible TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Different colored zones indicate the distance to for the safety of your surroundings and must Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam
the rear of the vehicle. continue to pay attention while backing up. that allows you to you see an on-screen image
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or of the front view of your vehicle. The image will
death. be displayed on the touchscreen display along
with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by NOTE:

pressing the icon on the Backup Camera  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
view. The Backup Camera view can also be (13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
activated by pressing the icon on the TrailCam image will be displayed continu-
TrailCam view. ously until deactivated via the touchscreen
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE button “X”, the transmission is shifted into
(with Camera Delay turned off) and TrailCam PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
view is active, the TrailCam mode is exited and position.
the previous screen appears again.  The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
Front View Camera When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE display of the camera image is made avail-
NOTE: (with Camera Delay turned on) and the TrailCam able ONLY when the vehicle is not in
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low. view is active, the TrailCam image will be REVERSE.
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the  The TrailCam view will stay active regardless
The TrailCam System has programmable
settings that may be selected through the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the of the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD
Uconnect system Ú page 211. transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is Low.
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen Cleaning The TrailCam
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
button “X” to disable display of the TrailCam Press and hold the “Clean Camera” soft button
TrailCam view can be activated via the below view is pressed. located on the TrailCam view to wash the
methods:
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated TrailCam. Washer fluid will stop when the
 Press the “FWD Camera” button on the through the Manual Activation Methods, and button is released.
controls screen. the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to  The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds
 Press the “Forward Facing Camera” button 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image at a time while holding the button.
on the apps menu. is initiated. The image will continue to be  The “Clean Camera” system is not available
 Press the “TrailCam” button on the Off Road displayed until the display timer exceeds when windshield washing is in process.
Pages. 10 seconds.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
 Press the “Off Road+” button when “Auto
projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam
Launch Off Road+” (if equipped) has been
view based on the steering wheel position.
selected under camera settings.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE CAUTION!

ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)  Damage to the fuel system or emission
control system could result from using an
FUEL F ILLER CAP improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side could let impurities into the fuel system.
of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
correct one for this vehicle. (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
Fuel Filler Cap 4
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
WARNING! “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or
NOTE:
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.  When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
 Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
This is in violation of most state and federal
until you hear one click. This is an indication
fire regulations and may cause the
that the cap is properly tightened.
Fuel Filler Door “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
 If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly,
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tight-
portable container that is inside of a ened every time the vehicle is refueled.
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
LOOSE FUEL F ILLER CAP MESSAGE NOTE:

After fuel has been added, the vehicle  When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler fuel tank is full.
cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or  Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, until you hear one click. This is an indication
the “gASCAP” message will display in the that the cap is properly tightened.
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a
"clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication CAUTION!
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the For diesel engines, only use diesel fuel for
odometer reset button to turn the message off. Fuel Filler Door motor vehicles in accordance with EN 590
If the problem persists, the message will appear European specifications. The use of other
the next time the vehicle is started. This might products or mixtures may damage the engine
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is beyond repair and consequently void the war-
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on ranty, due to the damage caused. If you acci-
the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL dentally introduce other types of fuel into the
off. tank, do not start the engine. Empty the tank.
If the engine has been run for even an
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE extremely limited amount of time, you must
(IF EQUIPPED) not only drain the fuel tank, but the rest of the
supply circuit as well.
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or 1 — Diesel Fuel Filler AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the 2 — DEF Filler Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
correct one for this vehicle.
cause severe damage to the engine fuel
system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel
filter and fuel tank is essential see Ú page 375.
BULK FUEL S TORAGE — D IESEL FUEL The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce  Temperature sensors
levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from  SCR catalyst
If you store quantities of fuel, good
engines) that are harmful to our health and the The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst
maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential.
environment to a near-zero level. A small enable the achievement of diesel emissions
Fuel contaminated with water will promote the
quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is requirements; while maintaining outstanding
growth of “microbes.” These microbes form
injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst fuel economy, drivability, torque and power
“slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system
where, when vaporized, it converts ratings.
and lines. Drain condensation from the supply
smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
tank and change the line filter on a regular For system messages and warnings see
harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O),
basis. Ú page 111.
two natural components of the air we breathe. 4
NOTE: You can operate with the comfort that your NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier  Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system. world environment for this and generations to system. You may occasionally hear an
If the vehicle will not start see Ú page 378. come. audible clicking noise from under the vehicle
at a stop. This is normal operation.
WARNING! System Overview
 The DEF pump will run for a period of time
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust
Do not open the high pressure fuel system after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective
with the engine running. Engine operation system. This is normal operation and may be
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel audible from the rear of the vehicle.
emission requirements.
spray can cause serious injury or death.
The DEF injection system consists of the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID following components: Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
 DEF tank stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective
 DEF pump kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet the
(-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one
very stringent diesel emissions standards  DEF injector
year.
required by the Environmental Protection  Electronically-heated DEF Lines
Agency.  NOx sensors
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest DEF Fill Procedure you have a fault related to the DEF system,
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at the gauge may not update to the new level.
NOTE: See an authorized dealer for service.
temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The
For the correct DEF fluid type see Ú page 438.
system has been designed to operate in this  The DEF gauge may also not immediately
environment. 1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in update after a refill if the temperature of the
fuel door). DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
NOTE:
tank heater will possibly warm up the DEF
When working with DEF, it is important to know
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
that:
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
 Any containers or parts that come into tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
contact with DEF must be DEF compatible reflect the new fill level for several drives.
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,  Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel should result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu-
be avoided as they are subject to corrosion rate level readings.
by DEF.
Refilling With Nozzles
 If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely. Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler Proceed as follows:
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler  Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument refilling and stop refilling at the first
cluster display) will display the level of DEF 2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the
remaining in the tank Ú page 111. inlet. DEF tank is full). Do not proceed with the
NOTE: refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,  The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds  Extract the nozzle.
etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used to update after adding a gallon or more of
in your vehicle. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If
Refilling With Containers

CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)
Proceed as follows:
 DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below  Never add anything other than DEF to the
 Check the expiration date.
12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
 Read the advice for use on the label
to work in temperatures below the DEF such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives,
before pouring the content of the bottle freezing point, however, if the tank is over- gasoline, or any other petroleum-based
into the DEF tank. filled and freezes, the system could be product. Even a very small amount of these,
 If systems which cannot be screwed in damaged. less than 100 parts per million or less than
(e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contam-
 When DEF is spilled, clean the area imme-
indication appears on the instrument inate the entire DEF system and will require
diately with water and use an absorbent 4
panel display Ú page 107 fill the DEF replacement. If owners use a container,
material to soak up the spills on the ground.
tank with no more than 2 Gallons funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it
(8 liters).  Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is should either be new or one that is has only
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank been used for adding DEF. Mopar provides
 If containers which can be screwed to the
as it can result in severe damage to your an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this
filler are used, the reservoir is full when
engine, including but not limited to failure purpose.
the DEF level in the container stops
of the fuel pump and injectors.
pouring out. Do not proceed further.
(Continued) 3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when
CAUTION! any of the following happen: DEF stops
flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF fill
 To avoid DEF spillage, and possible inlet, DEF splashes out the fill inlet, or a DEF
damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
(Continued)
VEHICLE LOADING Payload Inflation Pressure

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
CERTIFICATION LABEL allowable load weight a truck can carry, vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety including the weight of the driver, all GAWR.
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a passengers, options and cargo.
certification label affixed to the driver's side Curb Weight
door or pillar. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
This label contains the month and year of The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating the front and rear axles. The load must be including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number of each axle is not exceeded. loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is Each axle GAWR is determined by the weight values are determined by weighing your
included on this label and indicates the Month, components in the system with the lowest load vehicle on a commercial scale before any
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). occupants or cargo are added.
that appears on the bottom of the label is your Heavier axles or suspension components
Loading
VIN. sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily The actual total weight and the weight of the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) increase the vehicle's GVWR. front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your best be determined by weighing it when it is
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, Tire Size loaded and ready for operation.
options and cargo. The label also specifies The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
maximum capacities of front and rear axle represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Replacement tires must be equal to the load not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not capacity of this tire size. rear of the vehicle should then be determined
exceeded. separately to be sure that the load is properly
Rim Size distributed over the front and rear axle.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
size listed. of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the towing a trailer, carefully review this information The recommended way to measure GTW is to
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted to tow your load as efficiently and safely as put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate possible. The entire weight of the trailer must be
until the specified weight limitations are met. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty supported by the scale.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure coverage, follow the requirements and
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
recommendations in this manual concerning
loose items securely before driving. vehicles used for trailer towing. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of
Improper weight distributions can have an your vehicle and trailer when weighed in
COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS combination.
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
The following trailer towing related definitions
and handles and the way the brakes operate. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) 4
will assist you in understanding the following
CAUTION! information: The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your not exceed either front or rear GAWR
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo Ú page 192.
it can change the way your vehicle handles. and tongue weight. The total load must be
This could cause you to lose control. Also limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR WARNING!
overloading can shorten the life of your vehi- Ú page 192. It is important that you do not exceed the
cle.
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
driving condition can result if either rating is
TRAILER TOWING The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the exceeded.
In this section you will find safety tips and weight of all cargo, consumables and
information on limits to the type of towing you equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Carrying Hitch stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
The TW is the downward force exerted on the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
as part of the load on your vehicle. at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of and may be required depending on vehicle and
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Frontal Area commonly used to tow small and medium sized Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
The frontal area is the maximum height trailers.
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of WARNING!
a trailer. Weight-Distributing Hitch  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying Hitch system may reduce handling,
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped leverage through spring (load) bars. They are stability, braking performance, and could
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be typically used for heavier loads to distribute result in a collision.
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front  Weight Distributing Systems may not be
trailer tongue. It typically provides adjustable axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
friction associated with the telescoping motion accordance with the manufacturer's directions, Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying it provides for a more level ride, offering more turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
motions while traveling. consistent steering and brake control thereby dealer for additional information.
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,721 kg) 4
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

GCWR (Gross Max. GTW (Gross Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area
Combined Wt. Rating) Trailer Wt.) (See Note)
Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
2.0L
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
3.6L
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.0L Diesel Four–Door 8,427 lbs (3,822 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Remember that everything put into or on the WARNING! (Continued)
part of the combined weight of occupants and trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,  When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do
cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should additional factory-installed options or not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire dealer-installed options must be considered as loading can cause a loss of control, poor
and Loading Information placard Ú page 404. part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to performance, or damage to brakes, axle,
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT chassis structure, or tires.
the maximum combined weight of occupants
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight and cargo for your vehicle.
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.  Safety chains must always be used
TOWING REQUIREMENTS between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the frame or hook
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
are recommended:
enough slack for turning corners.
WARNING!  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow on a grade. When parking, apply the
these guidelines to make your trailer towing parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
as safe as possible: tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
 Make certain that the load is secured in the
Weight Distribution  GCWR must not be exceeded.
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
Consider the following items when computing When trailering cargo that is not fully (Continued)
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
 The tongue weight of the trailer. may be difficult for the driver to control. You
 The weight of any other type of cargo or could lose control of your vehicle and have
equipment put in or on your vehicle. a collision.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers. (Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
 Total weight must be distributed between to the safe and satisfactory operation of your  Do not connect trailer brakes to your
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the vehicle. vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
following four ratings are not exceeded: load your brake system and cause it to fail.
 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
You might not have brakes when you need
 GVWR pressures before trailer usage.
them and could have an accident.
 GTW  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.  Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
 GAWR ping distance. When towing, you should
 Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
allow for additional space between your 4
hitch utilized. vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
and GAWR limits.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
 For further information Ú page 404.
CAUTION!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes CAUTION!
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
system or vacuum system of your vehicle (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad- brakes and they should be of adequate
be damaged.
equate braking and possible personal injury.
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accel-
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)  An electronically actuated trailer brake erated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over controller is required when towing a trailer effort, and longer stopping distances.
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts with electronically actuated brakes. When
at full throttle. This helps the engine and towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the surge actuated brake system, an electronic
heavier loads. brake controller is not required.
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And 3 — Right Stop/Turn

Wiring 4 — Electric Brakes
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the 5 — Ground
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the 6 — Left Stop/Turn
trailer are required for motoring safety. 7 — Running Lamps
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
TOWING TIPS
approved trailer harness and connector. Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping and backing the trailer in an area away
NOTE: Four-Pin Connector from heavy traffic.
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s 1 — Ground If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer
wiring harness. 2 — Park towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid
The electrical connections are all complete to 3 — Left Stop/Turn excessive clutch slippage.
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a 4 — Right Stop/Turn
trailer connector. Refer to the following Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
illustrations. Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
NOTE:
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
 Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical select a lower gear.
connect) into water.
 Be sure to reconnect once clear from water NOTE:
area. Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
Seven-Pin Connector performance and extend transmission life by
1 — Battery reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
2 — Backup Lamps
This action will also provide better engine shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired Cruise Control — If Equipped
braking. speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”  Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
AutoStick — If Equipped  When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
 To prevent excess heat generation, avoid ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
 When using the AutoStick shift control, select continuous driving at high RPM. Return to a (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
the highest gear that allows for adequate higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and to cruising speed.
performance and avoids frequent down- road conditions allow.
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) 4

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
 Automatic transmission in PARK.
Flat Tow NONE  Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
 Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
 Tow in forward direction.
Front NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
 Before recreational towing, perform the You or others could be injured or killed if you
NOTE: procedure outlined under “Shifting Into (N) leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
The transfer case must be shifted into (N) Neutral” to be certain that the transfer case case in the (N) Neutral position without first
Neutral, automatic transmission must be in is fully in (N) Neutral. Otherwise, internal fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
PARK, and manual transmission must be in damage will result. case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above front and rear driveshafts from the power-
requirements can cause severe transmis- train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
CAUTION! the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
sion and/or transfer case damage.
 DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing Damage from improper towing is not manual transmission is in gear). The parking
with only one set of wheels on the ground covered under the New Vehicle Limited brake should always be applied when the
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis- Warranty. driver is not in the vehicle.
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
 Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or WARNING!
clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
bumper face bar will be damaged. You or others could be injured or killed if you
 Tow only in the forward direction. Towing leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
this vehicle backwards can cause severe Shifting Into (N) Neutral
case in the (N) Neutral position without first
damage to the transfer case. Use the following procedure to prepare your fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
 Automatic transmissions must be placed in vehicle for recreational towing: case (N) Neutral position disengages both the
PARK for recreational towing. front and rear driveshafts from the power-
 Manual transmissions must be placed in train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
gear (not in NEUTRAL) for recreational the automatic transmission is in PARK. The
towing. parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
(Continued)
11. Firmly apply the parking brake. 6. Turn the engine off.
CAUTION!
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place 7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
It is necessary to follow these steps to be cer- manual transmission in gear (NOT in position.
tain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neu- NEUTRAL).
tral before recreational towing to prevent NOTE:
damage to internal parts. CAUTION! When shifting the transfer case out of (N)
Neutral, the engine should remain off to avoid
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on Damage to the transmission may occur if the gear clash.
level ground. transmission is shifted into PARK with the
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
transfer case in (N) Neutral and the engine
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. or place manual transmission in NEUTRAL. 4
running. With the transfer case in (N) Neutral
3. Shift the automatic transmission into ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting 9. Release the brake pedal.
NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a the transmission into PARK. 10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
manual transmission.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a 11. Start the engine.
4. Turn the engine off.
suitable tow bar. 12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
14. Release the parking brake. 13. Release the parking brake.
6. Start the engine.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. Shifting Out of (N) Neutral brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal Use the following procedure to prepare your transmissions), and check that the vehicle
on manual transmissions) for five seconds vehicle for normal usage. operates normally.
and ensure that there is no vehicle 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
movement. leaving it connected to the tow vehicle. DRIVING TIPS
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual
ON-R OAD D RIVING T IPS
3. Start the engine. Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
transmission in FIRST gear.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal. and a narrower track to make them capable of
10. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics

give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt Underside Nuts Bolt #1
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, 2. Remove the side step assembly.
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Bumper End Cap Removal
OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS The end caps on your vehicle’s front fascia/
bumper can be removed by following the steps
Side Step Removal — If Equipped below:
NOTE: NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be Bumper end caps are removable on steel
removed to prevent damage if so equipped. fascia/bumper only.
1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the 1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR Bolt #2
underside of the vehicle for each bracket. bracket (Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap 2. Remove the remaining 8 bolts.
using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle
remove the bolts.
and store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving

WARNING! CAUTION!
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down Do not use 4WD Low when operating the
and area before proceeding. There are many cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projec- vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware
types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, tiles in an off-road situation. damage can result.
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice.
Every surface has a different effect on your
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
CAUTION!
vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Operation
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or Many off-road driving conditions require the
Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to
other combustible materials. The heat from
successful off-road driving, so always keep a
your vehicle exhaust system could cause a
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle 4
firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a (two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs,
fire. or other stepped objects, using light brake
good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle
When To Use 4WD Low Range
there are no road signs, posted speed limits or from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use When off-road driving, shift into 4WD Low for used when you need to stop and restart a
your own good judgment on what is safe and additional traction and control on slippery or vehicle on a steep incline.
what is not. When on a trail, you should always difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low speed pulling power. Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and
changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future This range should be limited to extreme Snow
driving route while remembering what you are situations such as deep snow, mud, steep
In heavy snow or for additional control and
currently driving over. inclines, or sand where additional low speed
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission
pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD
NOTE: excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
Low if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear
It is recommended that the Stop/Start System when in 4WD Low.
than necessary to maintain headway.
be disabled during off-road use.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while
still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to Sand Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with Points)
momentum. full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy While driving off-road, you will encounter many
spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's types of terrain. These varying types of terrain
CAUTION! momentum and do not stop. The key to driving bring different types of obstacles. Before
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at in soft sand is using the appropriate tire proceeding, review the path ahead to determine
high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt the correct approach and your ability to safely
engine braking may cause skidding and loss maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
of control. momentum. If you are going to be driving on Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the
Mud pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to vehicle forward until it makes contact with the
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a
around the tires and is very difficult to get tire pressure will drastically improve your light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up
through. You should use DRIVE, with the traction and handling while driving on the soft and over the object.
transfer case in the 4WD Low position to sand, but you must return the tires to normal air
maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to pressure before driving on pavement or other WARNING!
a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure. system loading which could cause you to lose
additional traction. Mud holes pose an control of your vehicle.
increased threat of vehicle damage and getting CAUTION!
stuck. They are normally full of debris from Reduced tire pressures may cause tire Using A Spotter
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good unseating and total loss of air pressure. To There are many times where it is hard to see the
practice before entering any mud hole, get out reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a obstacle or determine the correct path.
and determine how deep it is, if there are any reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and Determining the correct path can be extremely
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. difficult when you are confronting many
safely recovered if stuck. obstacles. In these cases have someone guide
you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have
the person stand a safe distance in front of you
where they can see the obstacle, watch your crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do Then ease the vehicle off the log using your
tires and undercarriage, and guide you through. not attempt to cross any large obstacle with brakes.
Crossing Large Rocks steep sides at an angle great enough to put the
vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in CAUTION!
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
which ensures you drive over the largest of
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use diameter than the running ground clearance
them with your tires. This will lift your
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the or the vehicle will become high-centered.
undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of
turnout you just created. You should now be
the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
able to drive out following the trench you just Getting High-Centered
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
created at a 45-degree angle. If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, 4
ahead and make every effort to cross the large
rocks with your tires. get out of the vehicle and try to determine what
WARNING! the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting
CAUTION! There is an increased risk of rollover when the underbody and what is the best direction to
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are
 Never attempt to straddle a rock that is
sides. in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a
large enough to strike your axles or under-
few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of
carriage. Crossing Logs the high point when you let the vehicle down.
 Never attempt to drive over a rock which is To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
large enough to contact the door sills. (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows the vehicle off the object.
one front tire to be on top of the log while the
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or other just starts to climb the log. While climbing CAUTION!
Rut the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. objects increases the risk of underbody dam-
a large rut, the angled approach is the key to age.
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let
each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when
Hill Climbing Driving Up Hill

WARNING!
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a Once you have determined your ability to
good understanding of your abilities and your proceed and have shifted into the appropriate Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or
vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest turn around on a steep grade. Driving across
problems. Some are just too steep to climb and possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
should not be attempted. You should always throttle and apply more power as you start up which may result in severe injury.
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;
the abrupt change of grade could cause you to Driving Downhill
You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle. lose control. If the front end begins to bounce, Before driving down a steep hill, you need to
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
back on the ground. As you approach the crest
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?
steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is
see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to
the trail straight up and down? What is on top accelerator and maintain headway by turning regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn you feel confident in your ability to proceed,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh then make sure you are in 4WD Low and
you safely recover the vehicle if something goes "bite" into the surface and will usually provide proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
wrong? If everything looks good and you feel enough traction to complete the climb. If you do control the descent and apply your brakes, if
confident, shift the transmission into a lower not make it to the top, place the vehicle in necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
gear with 4WD Low engaged, and proceed with REVERSE and back straight down the grade
caution, maintaining your momentum as you using engine resistance along with the vehicle WARNING!
climb the hill. brakes. Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
Driving Across An Incline transmission), with the transfer case in the

WARNING! 4WD Low position and proceed very slowly with
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline.
If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. If the engine stalls or you lose headway or a constant slow speed of {3 to 5 mph (5 to
Driving across an incline places more weight on cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the
the downhill wheels, which increases the grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, the crossing. After crossing any water higher
sure the surface has good traction with firm and which may result in severe injury. Always back than the bottom of the axle differentials, inspect
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
an angle heading slightly up or down. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only ingestion.
the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally 4
WARNING! across a hill, always drive straight up or down. CAUTION!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of  Water ingestion into the axles, transmis-
Driving Through Water sion, transfer case, engine or vehicle inte-
a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type rior can occur if you drive too fast or
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway of water. Water crossings should be avoided, if through too deep of water. Water can cause
If you stall or begin to lose headway while possible, and only be attempted when permanent damage to engine, driveline or
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come necessary in a safe, responsible manner. Only other vehicle components, and your brakes
to a stop and immediately apply the brake. drive through areas which are designated and will be less effective once wet and/or
Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. approved. Tread lightly and avoid damage to the muddy.
Back slowly down the hill allowing engine environment. Know your vehicle's abilities and  When driving through water, do not exceed
braking to control the descent and apply your be able to recover it if something goes wrong. 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires Never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing before entering as a precaution, and check
to lock. deep water unless you ingested water into the all fluids afterward. Driving through water
engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not may cause damage that may not be
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested covered by the New Vehicle Limited
water first. The key to any crossing is low and Warranty.
slow. Shift into FIRST gear (manual
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
As you approach any type of water, you need to easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to Before you proceed, determine the speed of the
determine if you can cross it safely and determine you can safely cross, than proceed current, the water's depth, approach angle,
responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk using the low and slow method. bottom condition and if there are any obstacles.
through the water or probe it with a stick. You Then cross at an angle heading slightly
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
CAUTION! upstream using the low and slow technique.
current and bottom condition. Be careful of Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
murky or muddy waters; check for hidden effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
WARNING!
obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding radiator. Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping
if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or it out of control. This could put you and your
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On Other Flowing Water passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively Flowing water can be extremely dangerous.
increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or After Driving Off-Road
sure to consider this when determining the river even in shallow water. Fast moving water Off-road operation puts more stress on your
depth and the ability to safely cross. can easily push your vehicle downstream, vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
Other Standing Water water, a high current can still wash the dirt out for damage. That way you can get any problems
from around your tires putting you and your taken care of right away and have your vehicle
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of ready when you need it.
areas normally contain murky or muddy waters.
personal injury and vehicle damage with slower  Completely inspect the underbody of your
These water types normally contain hidden
water currents in depths greater than the vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
vehicle's running ground clearance. You should suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
accurate water depth, approach angle, and
never attempt to cross flowing water which is
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
deeper than the vehicle's running ground clean as required.
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior
clearance. Even the slowest current can push
the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of
control if the water is deep enough to push on
 Check threaded fasteners for looseness, NOTE:  If you experience unusual vibration after
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo- Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten transmission bell housing for mud and debris check the wheels for impacted material.
them, if required, and torque to the values and clean as required. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
specified in the Service Manual. ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
 Check for accumulations of plants or brush. WARNING! the situation.
These things could be a fire hazard. They Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts. braking. You might not have full braking
 After extended operation in mud, sand, power when you need it to prevent a collision. 4
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the If you have been operating your vehicle in
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as necessary.
cleaned as soon as possible.
210
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
WARNING!
For detailed information about your Uconnect unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle  It is not possible to know or to predict all of
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, systems and wireless communications. Vehicle the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual software technology continues to evolve over systems are breached. It may be possible
Supplement. time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, that vehicle systems, including safety
NOTE: evaluates and takes appropriate steps as related systems, could be impaired or a
Uconnect screen images are for illustration needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, loss of vehicle control could occur that may
your vehicle may require software updates to result in an accident involving serious injury
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
improve the usability and performance of your or death.
ware for your vehicle.
systems or to reduce the potential risk of  ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
CYBERSECURITY unauthorized and unlawful access to your your vehicle if it came from a trusted
vehicle systems. source. Media of unknown origin could
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to possibly contain malicious software, and if
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
send and receive information. This information most recent version of vehicle software (such as possibility for vehicle systems to be
allows systems and features in your vehicle to Uconnect software) is installed. breached.
function properly.  As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to the
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA 211
NOTE: UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES

 FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
contact you directly regarding software
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
updates.
faceplate located on the center of the
 To help further improve vehicle security and
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
minimize the potential risk of a security
access and change the Customer
breach, vehicle owners should:
Programmable Features. Many features can
 Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com vary by vehicle.
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
available Uconnect software updates.
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
 Only connect and use trusted media there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on 5
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen and Faceplate
USBs, CDs). through menus and change settings. Push the Buttons
center of the control knob one or more times to 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
Privacy of any wireless and wired
select or change a setting. 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display,
and private communications without your
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display, and the
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. Press the Apps button, then press the
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” Ú page 132. Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Settings button on the touchscreen to display
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
212 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: When making a selection, only press one button press the X button on the touchscreen to close
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
settings may vary. desired menu, press and release the preferred Down Arrow button on the right side of the
 All settings should be changed with the igni-
setting “option” until a check mark appears screen will allow you to toggle up or down
tion in the ON/RUN position. next to the setting, showing that setting has through the available settings.
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The avail-
Language
able languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the sys-
tem set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically
Display Mode
adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to
adjust the brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
MULTIMEDIA 213

This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
Control Screen Time-Out
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the 5
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will determine whether the vehicle will start up with
Auto Launch With Off-Road+
Off-Road+ activated. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:

US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pres-
Custom
sure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or
lb-ft) units of measurement independently.
214 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
Voice Response Length
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The
“Always” setting will also show the command list. The “With Help” setting
Show Command List
will show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The sys-
Sync Time With GPS
tem will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
Set Time And Format/Time Format
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
Set Time Hours off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
MULTIMEDIA 215

This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
Set Time Minutes be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar/Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.

This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when shift-
ParkView Backup Camera Delay 5
ing out of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the fixed backup camera guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the forward facing camera guidelines on or off.
216 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance

When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.

This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or
off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only”
Forward Collision Warning setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected.
The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warn-
ing alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is
closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have a FCW system signal
when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
ParkSense
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The avail-
Front ParkSense Volume
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The avail-
Rear ParkSense Volume
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
MULTIMEDIA 217

This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Blind Spot Alert Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when shift-
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
ing out of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Active Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Fixed Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off. 5
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the forward facing camera guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.

Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
218 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
Headlight Off Delay lights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Interior Ambient Lights This setting will allow you to turn on or off the interior ambient lights.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
Headlight Illumination On Approach/Illuminated Approach lights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wiper are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams/Automatic High Beam Headlamps This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.

This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
Auto Door Locks
the vehicle reaches speeds of 12 mph (19 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA 219

This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
Auto Unlock On Exit
the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
Sound Horn With Lock/Horn With Lock pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
lock button is pushed twice.
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from 5
Sound Horn With Remote Start/Horn With Remote Start
the key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/ 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the unlock but-
ton.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Passive Entry — If Equipped
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
220 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems

When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if
equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
Auto-On Driver Heat Seat & Steering Wheel — If Equipped
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the com-
fort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate
the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
AUX Switches — If Equipped

When the AUX button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches:

This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or
from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you
AUX 1-4
can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX
switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or
“Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and
the power source is set to Ignition.
MULTIMEDIA 221
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options

After pressing the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
Doors On Key Off Power Delay/Doors On Power Delay is turned on. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay/Doors Off Power Delay is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
Headlight Off Delay on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount 5
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
Balance/Fade back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
Equalizer
audio.
222 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher set-
Speed Adjusted Volume ting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The avail-
able settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
AUX Volume Offset
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
Auto Play
device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.

This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings
Do Not Disturb are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
MULTIMEDIA 223

This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Clus-
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
ter Display.
This setting will activate your smartphone to be projected on the vehicle’s
Smartphone Projection Manager — If Equipped
touchscreen.
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning. 5
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
Tune Start
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
Channel Skip
list will display of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Subscription Info
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
224 MULTIMEDIA
Reset/Restore Settings
When the Reset/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back
to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.

Reset App Drawer To Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will restore all installed apps. This feature is used if there is
Restore Apps
an issue using or installing apps.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings
default.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all per-
Clear Personal Data
sonal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.

Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
This will display different ways to update maps of the radio into your sys-
Map Update tem. “Download System Information To USB” or “Generate Request
Code” will appear as the two options to select from.
MULTIMEDIA 225
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration
SYSTEM O VERVIEW purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

5
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 1 — Radio Button
1 — Radio Button 2 — Media Button
2 — Media Button 3 — Climate Button
3 — Phone Button 4 — Apps Button
4 — Volume & On/Off Button 5 — Controls Button
5 — Mute Button 6 — Phone Button
6 — Compass Button 7 — Settings Button
7 — Settings Button
8 — More Button
9 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
10 — Screen Off Button
226 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Radio/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 228.
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
Phone
phone system Ú page 241.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 211.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio sys-
tem off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds
to reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen
from freezing or being stuck.
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
MULTIMEDIA 227
Feature Description
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated
Controls
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
Climate
control functions Ú page 54.
DRAG & D ROP MENU B AR 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app Please read this manual carefully before using
to replace an existing shortcut in the main the system. It contains instructions on how to
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your menu bar. use the system in a safe and effective manner.
preference. Simply follow these steps: NOTE: Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. 5
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in Doing so can result in damage to the
PARK. touchscreen.
SAFETY AND G ENERAL I NFORMATION Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
Safety Guidelines or property damage.
 Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
WARNING! If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the park in a safe location and set the parking
steering wheel. You have full responsibility brake.
and assume all risks related to the use of the  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop Uconnect features and applications in this Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
1. Press the Apps button to open the App vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to to the product. See an authorized dealer for
screen. do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci- repair.
dent involving serious injury or death.
228 MULTIMEDIA
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set Care And Maintenance
to a level that still allows you to hear outside  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
traffic and emergency vehicles. or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System etc.), which could scratch the surface.
 Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
the system. lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
 If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
your music or sound system at loud volumes. Remote Sound System Controls
Exercise caution when setting the volume on with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
the system. alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the with a push button in the center and controls
 Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
solvent manufacturer's precautions and the volume and mode of the sound system.
ture away from the system. Besides damage
directions Ú page 446. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
to the system, moisture can cause electric
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
shocks as with any electronic device. UCONNECT MODES the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
NOTE: STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Pushing the center button will make the radio
Many features of this system are speed depen- switch between the various modes available
The remote sound system controls are located
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
use some of the touchscreen features while the The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
three and nine o’clock positions.
vehicle is in motion. a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
MULTIMEDIA 229
The following describes the left-hand control RADIO MODE

operation in each mode:
Radio Controls
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode 5
1 — Radio Bands
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next 2 — Preset Radio Stations
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ 3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
4 — Status Bar
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch 1 — Preset Radio Stations
5 — Browse Button
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the 2 — All Preset Radio Stations
6 — Seek Down
beginning of the previous track if it is within 3 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
7 — Tune Button
eight seconds after the current track begins to 4 — Seek Down
8 — Seek Up
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch 5 — Tune
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight 9 — Audio Settings
6 — Station Info
seconds into the current track. 10 — Bottom Bar
7 — Seek Up
8 — Audio Settings The radio is equipped with the following modes:
 AM
 FM
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
230 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to Seek Info — If Equipped

enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner The Seek Up and Down functions are activated Press the Info button to display information
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the double arrow buttons on the related to the currently playing song and radio
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio touchscreen to the right and left of the radio station.
Mode. station display or by pressing the left steering Direct Tune
Volume & On/Off Control wheel audio control button up or down. Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn Seek Up and Seek Down the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
on and off the Uconnect system. Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down radio station or channel.
The electronic volume control turns button to tune the radio to the next available Press the available number button on the
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off function, if the radio reaches the starting station. Once a number has been entered, any
control knob clockwise increases the volume, station after passing through the entire band numbers that are no longer possible (stations
and counterclockwise decreases it. two times, the radio will stop at the station that cannot be reached) will become
When the audio system is turned on, the sound where it began. deactivated/grayed out.
will be set at the same volume level as last Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down Undo
played. You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up
Mute Button or Seek Down button to advance the Back button on the touchscreen.
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the radio through the available stations or channels GO
system. at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next Once the last digit of a station has been
Tune/Scroll Control available station or channel when the button on entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob the touchscreen is released. close, and the system will automatically tune to
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to NOTE: that station.
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Radio Voice Commands
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection. Seek Down button will scan the different Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
frequency bands at a slower rate. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
MULTIMEDIA 231
like to hear. (Subscription or included All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.) SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
Push the VR button on the steering wheel those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
and wait for the beep to say a command. See USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
some examples below. also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
service is available throughout their satellite
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1” service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
push the VR button and say “Help”. The SiriusXM® This functionality is only available for radios
system provides you with a list of commands. equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct 5
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. outside with a clear view to the sky.
Equipped
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
Manual kit for more information. radio does not receive a signal in underground
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold parking garages or tunnels.
separately after the trial included with the new No Subscription
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
service at the end of your trial subscription, the require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill When the Radio does not have the necessary
at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Preview channel only.
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
232 MULTIMEDIA
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription In addition to the tuning operation functions

To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/ Weather button, and Favorite button functions
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112 are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Canadian residents visit https://
www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
When in Satellite Mode: Radio
 The SXM button on the touchscreen is high- 1 — Browse
lighted. 2 — Replay
 The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the 3 — Seek Down Button
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
top of the screen. 4 — Direct Tune Button
Radio
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed 5 — Seek Up Button
1 — Browse
in the center. 6 — Audio Settings Button
2 — Radio Bands
 The Program Information is displayed at the
3 — Direct Tune Replay
bottom of the Channel Number.
4 — Info Button The replay function provides a means to store
 The SiriusXM® function buttons are
5 — Next Button and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
displayed below the Program Information.
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
MULTIMEDIA 233
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay
time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
Play/Pause rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play
button again on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of
five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two
Rewind
seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point
at which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in
5
steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the
content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
Forward
continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is
release.
Live Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
Favorites The favorites feature enables you to set a Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen favorite artist or song that is currently playing. a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
to activate the favorites menu, which will time The radio then uses this information to alert you the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
out within 20 seconds in absence of user when either the favorite artist or song is being button on the touchscreen.
interaction. played at any time by any of the SiriusXM® Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of Channels. a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the X button. The maximum number of favorites that can be the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
stored in the Radio is 50. button on the touchscreen.
234 MULTIMEDIA
Browse In SXM  Channel List Press the Channel List to display Favorites
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can Press the Favorites button on the Browse
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and screen.
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob. the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
 Genre List Press the Genre button on the
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
list.
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
the content in the selected Genre. Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Presets — If Equipped the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
1 — All Button operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
2 — Presets Button Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen. Remove Favorites
3 — Favorites Button
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
4 — Game Zone Button
and Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump the Tune/Scroll knob as well. press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® Preset Selection be deleted.
Channel List. A preset can be selected by pressing any of the Alert Settings
This Screen contains many submenus. You can listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
pressing the Back arrow. currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the allows you to choose from a visual alert or
All Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset. audible and visual alert when one of your
Deleting A Preset favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse channels.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available: screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
MULTIMEDIA 235
Game Zone Alert Settings

Press the Game Zone button, located at the left Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
with the ability to select teams, edit the choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
selection, and set alerts. start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
On-Air one or more of your selections is airing on any
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The of the SiriusXM® channels.
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently Tune Start
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and Tune Start begins playing the current song from
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the the beginning when you tune to a music Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
radio to that channel. channel using one of the 12 presets. This The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped feature occurs the first time the preset is and are activated by pressing any of the Preset 5
selected during that current song. buttons, located at the top of the screen.
Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on
the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll When you are on a station that you wish to save
Setting Presets
list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of as a preset, press and hold the numbered button
all teams within the league will appear, then you on the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
can select a team by pressing the The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all Radio Modes.
teams that are chosen. A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon You can switch between the radio presets list by
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
screen. Press the Delete All button on the right of the radio touchscreen.
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
be deleted. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
236 MULTIMEDIA
Preset Features — If Equipped Audio Settings

Browse In AM/FM Press the Audio button within the settings main
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is The audio settings can also be accessed on the
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button. Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
Scrolling Preset List button. You can return to the Radio screen by
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can pressing the X button.
scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/
Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down
Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
1 — Balance/Fade
Preset Selection From List
2 — Equalizer
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the 3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
4 — Surround Sound
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
5 — Loudness
currently highlighted Preset.
6 — AUX Volume Offset
When selected, the radio tunes to the station 7 — Radio Off With Door
stored in the Presets. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Deleting Presets 1 — Balance/Fade
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse 2 — Equalizer
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the 3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
corresponding preset. 4 — Surround Sound
Return To Main Radio Screen 5 — Loudness
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by 6 — AUX Volume Offset
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button 7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
when in the Browse Presets screen.
MULTIMEDIA 237
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
Balance/Fade
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
Equalizer decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
Speed Adjusted Volume
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed 5
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direc-
Surround Sound — If Equipped
tion as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
AUX Volume Offset alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
Auto Play — If Equipped device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
238 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA M ODE select the Browse button on the touchscreen to

be given these options:
Operating Media Mode  Now Playing
 Artists
 Albums
 Genres
 Songs
 Playlists
 Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode Info button on the touchscreen for artist
1 — Repeat information on the current song playing.
2 — Select Source For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode 3 — Track Time Mode is entered by pushing the Media button
4 — Shuffle located on the faceplate.
1 — Seek Down
5 — Info
2 — Seek Up Types of Media Modes
6 — Bluetooth®
3 — Browse
7 — Tracks USB Mode
4 — Source
5 — Pause/Play Overview
Audio Source Selection
6 — Info USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
7 — More Options device into the USB port, or by selecting the USB
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
Source Select/Select Source button and then
button located on the faceplate. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped) or by pushing
sources available. When available, you can
the MEDIA button on the faceplate and then
selecting the USB button.
MULTIMEDIA 239
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you Controlling The Auxiliary Device
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
display will show the track number and index cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
the start of track 1. Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
Bluetooth® Mode the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
Overview the attached device.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® NOTE:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
device, containing music, to the Uconnect AUX Mode output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
system. Overview the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set 5
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio the radio unit to play the music on the device.
communicate with the Uconnect system. jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX Seek Up /Seek Down
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the button on the left side of the touchscreen, or In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
Media button located on the faceplate. Once in under the Source Select button (if equipped) or touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
Media Mode, press the Source button on the pushing the Media button on the faceplate and device. Press and release the Seek Down
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button then selecting the Source button and then the button on the touchscreen to return to the
Ú page 241. AUX button. beginning of the current selection, or to return
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you USB device is within the first three seconds of
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the current selection.
Source button (if equipped). the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
and begin to play. Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
240 MULTIMEDIA
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on Info
current selection, or return to the beginning of the touchscreen to select the desired audio In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is source: Bluetooth®. button on the touchscreen to display the
within the first second of the current selection. In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the current track information. Press the Info or X
Browse touchscreen to select the desired audio source: button on the touchscreen a second time to
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the AUX. cancel this feature.
touchscreen to display the browse window. In Repeat Tracks
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
displays a list of ways you can browse through touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
the contents of the USB device. If supported by The Repeat button on the touchscreen is with the Song List. The song currently playing is
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist, highlighted when active. The Radio will continue indicated by an arrow and lines above and
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as below the song title. When in the Tracks List
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
screen. The center of the browse window shows again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue highlight a track (indicated by the line above
items and its sub-functions, which can be to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long and below the track name) and then push the
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down as the repeat function is active. To cancel Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time. In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
also be used to scroll. Shuffle supports this feature, press the Tracks button
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll touchscreen to play the selections on the USB Song List. The currently playing song is
through and select a desired track on the device. device in random order to provide an interesting indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the below the song title.
wish to cancel the Browse function. touchscreen a second time to turn this feature Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
Media Mode off. while the pop-up is displayed will close the
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the Audio pop-up.
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
USB. Audio button Ú page 229.
MULTIMEDIA 241
Media Voice Commands The feature supports the following:  Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Voice Activated Features Messages.
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice  Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John  Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
operation is only available for connected USB Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”). easy access to connect to them quickly.
and AUX devices.  Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your NOTE:
Push the VR button located on the steering incoming SMS messages. Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following  Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
commands and follow the prompts to switch one of 18 predefined SMS messages to properly.
your media source or choose an artist. incoming calls/text messages. Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
 “Change source to Bluetooth®”  Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
 “Change source to AUX”  Calling Back the last incoming call number will automatically mute your radio when using
 “Change source to USB” (“Call Back”). the Uconnect Phone. 5
 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming For Uconnect customer support:
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed  US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical” Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”). 877-855-8400
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the  Searching Contacts phone number (“Search  Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB for John Smith Mobile”). 800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
device. Your Voice Command must match Screen Activated Features 800-387-9983
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
information is displayed.  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone- between the system and your mobile phone as
PHONE MODE books displayed on the touchscreen. you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
 Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
mute the system's microphone for private
Overview conversation.
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, screen.
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
It allows you to dial a phone number with your Call logs.
mobile phone.
242 MULTIMEDIA
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your You will be prompted for a specific command
WARNING! signal to give a command. and then guided through the available options.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Voice Command Button  Prior to giving a voice command, one must
steering wheel. You have full responsibility wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
The Voice Command button on your steering
and assume all risks related to the use of the prompt or another prompt.
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
Uconnect features and applications in this  For certain operations, compound
are already in a call or want to make another
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to commands can be used. For example,
call.
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci- instead of saying “Call” and then “John
dent involving serious injury or death. The button on your steering wheel is also used
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
to access the Voice Commands for the
compound command can be said: “Call John
The Phone feature is driven through your Uconnect Voice Command features if your
Smith mobile.”
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. vehicle is equipped.
 For each feature explanation in this section,
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
Phone Operation only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
electronic devices to connect to each other Operation
the commands into parts and say each part
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you Voice commands can be used to operate the of the command when you are asked for it.
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu For example, you can use the compound
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to structure. Voice commands are required after command form voice command “Search for
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two John Smith,” or you can break the compound
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or general methods for how Voice Command command form into two voice commands:
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can works: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
be used with the system at a time. 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone Button Smith mobile”. Phone works best when you talk in a normal
The Phone button on your steering wheel is 2. Say the individual commands and allow the conversational tone, as if speaking to
used to get into the Phone Mode and make someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
system to guide you to complete the task.
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, you.
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
MULTIMEDIA 243
Natural Speech To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a simply push the Phone button (if active) on your mobile phone compatibility information.
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. steering wheel and say a command or say
Natural speech allows the user to speak “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
commands in phrases or complete sentences. the VR button or the Phone button.
The system filters out certain non-word Cancel Command
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
The system handles fill-in words such as “I “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
would like to”. menu.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same You can also push the VR button or Phone
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone button on your steering wheel when the system
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in is listening for a command and be returned to Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 5
the same phrase or sentence, the system the main or previous menu.
identifies the topic or context and provides the
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone Use this QR code to access your
call was requested but the specific name was digital experience.
not recognized. To begin using your Uconnect
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the Phone, you must pair your
system requires more information from the compatible Bluetooth®-
user, it will ask a question to which the user can enabled mobile phone. Mobile
respond without pushing the Voice Command phone pairing is the process of
button on the steering wheel. establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
Help Command NOTE:
To complete the pairing process, you will need
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you to reference your mobile phone’s manual.  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
want to know your options at any prompt, say phone to complete this procedure.
“Help” following the beep.  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
244 MULTIMEDIA
Follow the steps below to pair your phone: sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the system automatically when entering the
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone. vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
position. 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
2. Press the Phone button.
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
NOTE: main screen. mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
 If there are no phones currently connected screen, and the Uconnect system will
 Press the Paired Phones button.
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.  Search for available devices on your
NOTE:
 This pop-up only appears when the user Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s) below). When prompted on the phone,
phone priority is determined by the order in
have previously been paired. If the system select “Uconnect” and accept the
which it was paired. The most recent phone
has a phone previously paired, even if no connection request.
paired will have the higher priority.
phone is currently connected with the 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
system, this pop-up will not appear. NOTE:
screen while the system is connecting. During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. 7. When your mobile phone finds the pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
4. Search for available devices on your Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.” system to access your “messages” and
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
 Press the Settings button on your mobile accept the connection request from your contacts with the Uconnect system.
phone. Uconnect. You can also use the following VR command to
 Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is 9. When the pairing process has successfully bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile completed, the system will prompt you to screen on the radio:
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® choose whether or not this is your favorite  “Show Paired Phones”
connections. phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
NOTE:
NOTE: the highest priority. This phone will take
Software updates on your phone or the
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a precedence over other paired phones within
Uconnect system may interfere with the
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make range and will connect to the Uconnect
MULTIMEDIA 245
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
repeat the pairing process. However, first make screen while the system is connecting. buttons.
sure to delete the device from the list of phones 7. When the pairing process has successfully 3. Press to select the particular phone or the
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to completed, the system will prompt you to particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your choose whether or not this is your favorite appear; press “Connect Phone”.
phone’s Bluetooth® settings. device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device the highest priority. This device will take screen.
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth® precedence over other paired devices
streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3 within range. Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
With 5-inch Display radio Ú page 243. Device
NOTE:
1. Press the Media button on the For devices which are not made a favorite, the
touchscreen to begin. device priority is determined by the order in 5
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”. which it was paired. The most recent device
paired will have the higher priority.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio You can also use a following VR command to
Devices screen. bring up a list of paired audio devices:
 “Show Paired Phones”
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen. Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to 1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
If there is no device currently connected with
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio 2 — Make Favorite
the system, a pop-up will appear.
Device within range. If you need to choose a 3 — Delete Device/Phone
5. Search for available devices on your particular phone or audio device follow these
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When steps:
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
1. Press the Settings button on the
shown on the Uconnect screen.
touchscreen.
246 MULTIMEDIA
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
screen. with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile
screen, press the Settings button located
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
to the right of the device name for a “Voice Command” in this section.
different phone or audio device than the
 Automatic download and update of a phone-
currently connected device or press the
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display book, if supported, begins as soon as the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
2 — Make Favorite 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
3 — Delete Device/Phone 3. Press the Make Favorite button on the after you start the vehicle.
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device  A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or move to the top of the list. four numbers per contact will be downloaded
Settings button. 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings and updated every time a phone is
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources screen. connected to the Uconnect Phone.
buttons.  Depending on the maximum number of
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook entries downloaded, there may be a short
3. Press the Settings button located to the
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped delay before the latest downloaded names
right of the device name for a different
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
phone or audio device than the currently
has the ability to download contact names and ously downloaded phonebook is available for
connected device or press the preferred
number entries from the mobile phone’s use.
Connected Phone from the list.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with  Only the phonebook of the currently
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. connected mobile phone is accessible.
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete feature. Your mobile phone may receive a  This downloaded phonebook cannot be
Device button on the touchscreen. pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
system to access your messages and contacts. These can only be edited on the mobile
MULTIMEDIA 247
phone. The changes are transferred and favorites. This will bring up the options for Call Controls
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next that Favorite contact. The touchscreen allows you to control the
phone connection. 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the following call features:
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped Favorite.
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites: Phone Call Features
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press The following features can be accessed through
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
and then press one of the +Add Favorite available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
Contact buttons that appears on the list. mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, 5
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
and then select the appropriate number. for the features that you have.
Press the Down Arrow button next to the
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
selected number to display the option’s
Uconnect:
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to 1 — Answer
Favorites”.  Redial
2 — Mute/Unmute
 Dial by pressing in the number 3 — Ignore
NOTE:
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, 4 — Transfer
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
remove an existing favorite.
Call Back)
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped  Favorites
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”  Mobile Phonebook
from the Phone main screen.  Recent Call Log
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the  SMS Message Viewer
contact you want to remove from your
248 MULTIMEDIA
4. Use the numbered buttons on the

touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped

You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
 All Calls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display  Incoming Calls or Calls Received
1 — Answer  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
2 — End  Missed Calls Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
3 — Mute/Unmute These can be accessed by pressing the Recent 1 — Answer Button
4 — Transfer Calls button on the phone main screen. 2 — Caller ID Box
5 — Join Calls You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
Other phone call features include:
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
 End Call calls”.
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
 Swap two active calls Currently In Progress
Key Pad Number Entry When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
1. Press the Phone button. the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the audio system. Push the Phone button on the
touchscreen. steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call. 1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
MULTIMEDIA 249
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Automatic reply messages can be: your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
Currently In Progress  “I am driving right now, I will get back to you from the phonebooks.
If a call is currently in progress and you have shortly”. Toggling Between Calls
another incoming call, you will hear the same  Create a custom auto reply message up to
network tones for call waiting that you normally 160 characters.
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the NOTE:
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold touchscreen while typing a custom message.
and answer the incoming call. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
NOTE: without being interrupted by incoming calls.
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect 5
system in the market today do not support NOTE:
rejecting an incoming call when another call is Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
 Reply with text message is not compatible
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer with iPhones®.
an incoming call or ignore it.  Auto reply with text message is only available
Do Not Disturb on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts, Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
hands on the wheel. For your convenience, Hold button on the Phone main screen.
there is a counter display to keep track of your
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Progress
Disturb is active. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
text message, a call, or both when declining an
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
250 MULTIMEDIA
If two calls are in progress (one active and one Call Continuation  Ensure that no one other than you is
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the Call continuation is the progression of a phone speaking during a voice command period
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
on hold at a time. ignition has been switched to OFF.  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
You can also push the Phone button to toggle NOTE:  Low Road Noise
between the active and held phone call. The call will remain within the vehicle audio  Smooth Road Surface
Join Calls system until the phone becomes out of range  Fully Closed Windows
When two calls are in progress (one active and for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
 Dry Weather Conditions
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button mended to press the Transfer button on the
on the Phone main screen to combine all calls touchscreen when leaving the vehicle. WARNING!
into a conference call. Advanced Phone Connectivity ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
Call Termination Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone wheel. You have full responsibility and
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be assume all risks related to the use of the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the transferred from your mobile phone without Uconnect features and applications in this
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there from your connected mobile phone to the do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
is a call on hold, it will become the new active Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the dent involving serious injury or death.
call. Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Even though the system is designed for many
Redial Things You Should Know About Uconnect languages and accents, the system may not
Push the VR button and after the “Listening” Phone always work for some.
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.” Voice Command NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number For the best performance: It is recommended that you do not store names
that was dialed from your mobile phone.  Always wait for the beep before speaking in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
 Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
in motion.
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
MULTIMEDIA 251
Number and name recognition rate is optimized mobile phone compatibility and pairing Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
when the entries are not similar. You can say instructions. beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). Push the Phone button and wait for the beep es and follow the system prompts.
Even though international dialing for most to say a command. See some examples below:
number combinations is supported, some  “Call John Smith” PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
shortcut dialing number combinations may not RESPONSES
 “Dial 123 456 7890”
be supported.
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone Stuck in traf-
Audio Performance Yes. See you later.
number) fic.
Audio quality is maximized under: Start without
 “Call back” (call previously answered
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting No. I’ll be late.
incoming phone number) me.
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Did You Know: When providing a Voice Where are I will be 5 <or
 Low Road Noise
Okay. 5
Command, push the Phone button and say you? 10, 15, 20,
 Smooth Road Surface “Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it 25, 30, 45,
Are you there 60> minutes
 Fully Closed Windows appears in your phonebook. When a contact Call me.
yet? late.
 Dry Weather Conditions has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
 Operation From The Driver's Seat
John Smith work”. I’ll call you I need direc- See you in 5
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped later. tions. <or 10, 15,
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
Uconnect can announce incoming text 20, 25, 30,
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone I’m on my
messages. Push the VR button or Phone Can’t talk 45, 60> min-
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. way.
right now. utes.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced button and say:
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. I’m lost. Thanks.
1. “Listen” to have the system read an
Phone Voice Commands incoming text message. (Must have NOTE:
Making and answering hands-free phone calls compatible mobile phone paired to Only use the numbering listed in the provided
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook Uconnect system.) table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has the message.
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for been read.
252 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
the full implementation of the Message Access you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get information, and organizes it into simple cards
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. directions, read text messages, and many other that appear just when they are needed. Android
For details about MAP, visit useful requests. Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class
UconnectPhone.com. Bluetooth® Communication Link speech technology, the steering wheel controls,
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
incoming text messages only. For further and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
information on how to enable this feature on many of your apps. To use Android Auto™,
connection can generally be re-established by
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® perform the following procedure:
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
“User Manual”. is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON NOTE:
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not mode. Feature availability depends on your carrier and
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Power-Up
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your Auto™ features may or may not be available in
voice to send a text message. After switching the ignition key from OFF to
every region and/or language.
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped 1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
language change, you must wait at least
When used with your Apple® iPhone® 15 seconds prior to using the system Google Play store on your
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri Ú page 446. Android™-powered smartphone.
lets you use your voice to send text messages, 2. Connect your Android™-powered
select media, place phone calls and much ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF smartphone to one of the media USB ports
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back EQUIPPED in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
to confirm your requests. The system is ANDROID AUTO™ your device in the app begins to download.
designed to keep your eyes on the road and Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher you use the app.
perform useful tasks.
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
allows you to project your smartphone and a
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
MULTIMEDIA 253
NOTE: NOTE:  Navigation

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately  Live traffic information
that came with your phone, as aftermarket once a compatible device is connected. You can  Lane guidance
cables may not work. also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™
For further information, refer to
icon on the touchscreen.
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
Uconnect system, the following features can be
For further information on the navigation
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
function, please refer to https://
 Google Maps™ for navigation support.google.com/android or https://
 Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. support.google.com/androidauto/.
for music
 Hands-free calling and texting for communi-
Music 5
cation Android Auto™ allows you to access,
 Various compatible apps stream, and play your favorite music
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
with apps like Google Play Music,
NOTE: Maps iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an Push and hold the Voice Recognition playable application. Using your smartphone’s
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may (VR) button on the steering wheel data plan, you can stream endless music on the
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is until the beep or tap the Microphone road.
shown in the upper right corner of the radio icon to ask Google to take you to a
NOTE:
screen. Data plan rates apply. desired destination by voice. You can also touch
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
3. Once the device is connected and the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & other navigation apps.
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
drop menu bar changes to the Android While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
Auto™ icon. provides voice-guided:
254 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Android Auto™ Voice Command  Text Messages

To see the track details for the music playing  Additional Apps
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect NOTE:
system’s media screen. Feature availability depends on your carrier and NOTE:
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Requires compatible smartphone running
For further information, refer to https://
Auto™ features may or may not be available in Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
support.google.com/androidauto.
every region and/or language. Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Communication Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
With Android Auto™ connected, push interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech APPLE CARPLAY®
and hold the VR button on the technology through your vehicle’s voice
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
steering wheel to activate voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
recognition specific to Android Auto™. data plan to project your Android™-powered
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
This allows you to send and reply to text smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
messages, have incoming text messages read Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
out loud, and place and receive hands-free 5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
calls. using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
Apps “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin NOTE:
The Android Auto™ App displays all the Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on Feature availability depends on your carrier and
compatible apps that are available to use with the steering wheel, or press and hold the mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to CarPlay® features may or may not be available
must have the compatible app downloaded, activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes in every region and/or language.
and you must be signed in to the app through natural voice commands, to use a list of your
your mobile device for it to work with Android smartphone’s features:
Auto™.  Maps
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/  Music
to see the latest list of available apps for  Phone
Android Auto™.
MULTIMEDIA 255
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are  Messages

using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in  Maps
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the Phone
following procedure: With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media the VR button on the steering wheel to
USB ports in your vehicle. activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold
NOTE: the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
cable that came with your phone, as after- listen to voicemail as you normally would using
market cables may not work. Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage Siri on your iPhone®.
2. Once the device is connected and 5
1 — LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag & 2 — Apple CarPlay® Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
CarPlay® Icon. NOTE:
session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
NOTE: tion with Apple CarPlay®.
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
You can also launch it by pressing the Apple
Music
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen. Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
screen. Data plan rates apply.
all your artists, playlists, and music
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your from iTunes® or any third party
Uconnect system, the following features can be application installed on your device.
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan: Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
 Phone use select third party audio apps including
 Music music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
256 MULTIMEDIA
Messages Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/  Phone

Push and hold the VR button on the (US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/  Music
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of  Messages
recognition session. Apple CarPlay® available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
 Maps — If Equipped
allows you to use Siri to send or reply Apple CarPlay® Voice Command  Additional Apps — If Equipped
to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but drivers will not be able to NOTE: NOTE:
read messages, as everything is done via voice. Feature availability depends on your carrier and Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
Maps features may not be available in every region tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
Push and hold the VR button on the and/or language. terms of use and privacy statements apply.
steering wheel until the beep or tap Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
the Microphone icon to ask Apple®
ANDROID AUTO™ AND A PPLE
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
Siri to take you to a desired C ARPLAY® TIPS A ND T RICKS
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
destination by voice. You can also touch the data plan to project your iPhone® and a Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access number of its apps onto your Uconnect Bluetooth® Pairing
Apple® Maps. touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
to one of the media USB ports, using the CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
Apps
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
apps that are available to use, every time it is setup required every time it is within range, if
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
launched. You must have the compatible app Bluetooth® is turned on.
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
app through your mobile device for it to work NOTE:
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
with Apple CarPlay®. Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
MULTIMEDIA 257
connections to function. The connected device these buttons are present in your vehicle, you NOTE:
is unavailable to other devices when connected have a connected radio and can take SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®. advantage of the many connected vehicle transmission and use of data from your vehicle
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect features. Ú page 280.
System — If Equipped For further information about the ASSIST and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
It is possible to have multiple devices SOS buttons Ú page 344.
And Business Hours
connected to the Uconnect system. For I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
SERVICES  US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
place hands-free phone calls or send One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
hands-free text messages. However, another Uconnect system is that you can now take 1-844-796-4827
device can also be paired to the Uconnect advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected  Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
5
system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ or call
the passenger can stream music. SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first 1-877-324-9091
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services. Uconnect Phone Customer Support
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be WARNING! UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
launched from the front and center console 1-877-855-8400.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
USB ports only. Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
(English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use Business Hours
EQUIPPED of the features and applications in this vehi- Central Time
cle. Only use the features and applications  Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED? when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may  Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are result in an accident involving serious injury
connected vehicles. These buttons will be or death.
located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
258 MULTIMEDIA
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?  Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, delivery are hills, structures, buildings, The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
which receives GPS signals and communicates tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care system or other important parts of your Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
center via wireless and landline vehicle, network congestion, civil distur- The SOS Call button connects you directly to
bances, actions of third parties or the govern- SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
communications networks. Depending on the
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical assistance in an emergency.
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
location of your vehicle, such as in an under-
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
ground parking structure or under a bridge. Activation
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
compatible with your device. SiriusXM Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped available for all models. Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
vehicles purchased within the continental SiriusXM Guardian™ provides: your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and  The ability to remotely lock/unlock and 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
Canada. remote start your vehicle from virtually in-vehicle touchscreen.
anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
NOTE:
computer. list of apps.
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
 Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
dependent upon an operative telematics 3. For customers in the United States, select
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
device, a cellular connection, navigation map and send your locations directly to your
data, and GPS satellite signal reception, Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
Uconnect Navigation.
which can limit the ability to reach the activate services in your vehicle, or select
 The ability to locate your vehicle, when you “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
response center or reach emergency
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
support. For customers in Canada, enter your email
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
 Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are address to activate services in your vehicle.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas. easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
MULTIMEDIA 259
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles  Download the Uconnect app to your mobile
Your new vehicle may come with an included device.
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™  Use your Owner Account login and password
services starting on the date of vehicle to open the app and then set up a PIN.
purchase. To get started with your trial,
enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of
SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages

5
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.  For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED Register button in the upper right-hand
V EHICLE SERVICES corner to register your account online.
Download The Uconnect App a. Click the Register button

Once you have activated your services, you’re b. Select the correct country and email
only a few steps away from using connected address then click “Register”.
services.
Uconnect Mobile App c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
1 — Settings
account.
2 — Vehicle Info
3 — Location And Send & Go
4 — Remote Commands
260 MULTIMEDIA
d. After clicking the email link, it will take Start, and activate your horn and lights For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
you to a website and prompt you to remotely, if equipped. button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
assign your account with a password.  Press the Location button on the bottom Health Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to then prompt you to log in using your email
e. Once you have added a password, the
locate your vehicle or send a location to your address and password.
website will direct you to your homepage
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.  Edit/Edit Profile:
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
 Press the Settings side menu in the upper left To manage the details of your SiriusXM
 For customers in Canada, register your corner of the app to bring up app settings and Guardian™ account, such as your contact
account via your vehicle. access the Assist Call Centers. information, password and SiriusXM
Using Your Owner’s Site Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom
button to access the details of your account.
menu bar. Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or  Connected Services Status:
b. Press the Activate Services button from
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
the apps list.
you with all the information you need, all in one Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir- place. You can track your service history, find  Remote Commands:
mation email will be sent to the provided recommended accessories for your vehicle,
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
email address. watch videos about your vehicle's features, and
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
easily access your manuals. It is also where you
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account.
confirmation email. It may take a short Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
This section will familiarize you with the key
time before remote services will be avail- equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
elements of the website that will help you get
able, but you will be able to log into the horn and flash the lights.
the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Uconnect App and the owner’s site. Editing Your Notifications
For customers in the United States, press the
 Once on the Remote screen and you have set Sign In/Register button and enter your email Notifications are an important element of your
up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using address and password. SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
MULTIMEDIA 261
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A NOTE:
to notify you of the event. To set up the Button Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
notifications, please follow these instructions. dependent on an operational Uconnect system,
Center Light Status Description cellular network availability that is compatible
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) Off No call activated with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca Green Active call in progress network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle” Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
Red System error
and then “Dashboard”. times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button. SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance How It Works
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” Features 1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
where can edit Notification Preferences. With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has light will turn green indicating a call has
onboard assistance features located on the been placed. 5
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
rearview mirror or overhead console designed NOTE:
address to notify you, and you can
to enhance your driving experience if you should
customize the types of messages.  In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
ever need assistance or support.
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ Description the SOS call is placed. The system will
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in verbally alert you that a call is about to be
SOS Call contact with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
Care agent in the event of an emergency. When push the SOS Call button on the rearview
WARNING!
the connection between the vehicle and the live mirror or press the Cancel button on the
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, includ- agent is made, your vehicle will automatically touchscreen within 10 seconds.
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call transmit location information. In the event of a  During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
will NOT work without a network connection minor collision, medical or any other phone is disconnected so incoming or
compatible with your device. emergency, press the SOS button to be outgoing calls will go through your mobile
connected to a call center agent who can send device versus the hands-free system which is
emergency assistance to your vehicle’s not available due to the SOS Call.
location.
262 MULTIMEDIA
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and  An in-vehicle audio message will state Requirements
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent “Vehicle phone requires service. Please  This feature is available only on vehicles sold
is made, the agent will stay on the line with contact your dealer.” in the US or Canada.
you. Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be
NOTE:
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation. registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
These include, but are not limited to, the have an active subscription that includes the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
following factors: applicable feature.
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use  The ignition key is in OFF position.  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
consent to being recorded. intact. compatible with your device.
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
SOS Call System Limitations
disconnected during a vehicle crash. ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US tioning electrical system.
 The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
have limited services. In particular, responses WARNING!
to SOS calls or other emergency services may  LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or  Never place anything on or near the
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
obstructed. vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
purchased outside the United States and
(data) and GPS antennas. You could
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM  Network congestion.
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
Guardian™ services.  Weather conditions.
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or your vehicle from placing an emergency
any of the following may occur at the time the tunnels. call.
malfunction is detected: If your vehicle loses battery power for any (Continued)
 The light will continuously be illuminated red. reason (including during or after an accident)
 The screen will display the following message the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please systems, will not operate.
contact your dealer.”
MULTIMEDIA 263
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

 Do not add any aftermarket electrical  The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
system. This may prevent your vehicle from instrument panel if a malfunction in any road conditions or location), do not wait for
sending a signal to initiate an emergency part of the air bag system is detected. If the voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
call. To avoid interference that can cause Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air Customer Care agent. All occupants should
the SOS Call system to fail, never add after- bag system may not be working properly exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile and the SOS Call system may not be able to safe location.
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™  Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the Customer Care center. If the Air Bag and regular inspection of your vehicle may
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE Warning Light is illuminated, have an result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON authorized dealer service your vehicle 5
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- immediately. Remote Commands
DENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
 On the Remote Commands screen, you have
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ SERVICES mean you will not have SOS Call services if access to several vehicle features that can be
WILL OPERATE. needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu- controlled remotely from your mobile device.
(Continued) minated, have an authorized dealer service These features include locking/unlocking,
the SOS Call system immediately. remote starting, and activating the horn and
(Continued) lights of the vehicle.
264 MULTIMEDIA
3 — Horn & Lights: Press this button to sound the 4. A message will let you know if the command
horn and activate your lights. was received by your vehicle.
4 — Unlock: Press this button to unlock your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
5 — Cancel Vehicle Start: Press this button to
cancel remote start.
Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
Remote Commands lets you send a request to username and password you used when
your vehicle in one of three ways: activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
 Anywhere using your mobile device and services in your vehicle.
Uconnect App
NOTE:
 From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
If you forgot your username or password, links
available on all functions)
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
 Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer them.
Care (not available on all functions)
2. If you have more than one vehicle
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
Device And The Uconnect App
vehicle you want to send the command to by
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon clicking on its image along the top.
on your mobile device.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your commands. Press the desired icon to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the activate that feature.
same four-digit code established when you
4. You will then be asked to enter your
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
Remote Commands system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
same four-digit code established when you
1 — Lock: Press this button to lock your vehicle. Security PIN on the keypad.
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
2 — Vehicle Start: Press this button to start your 3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the system). Please enter your SiriusXM
vehicle. command to go through to your vehicle. Guardian™ Security PIN.
MULTIMEDIA 265
5. A message will appear on the screen to let Working Vehicle Conditions NOTE:
you know if the command was received by  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. All other remote services should be performed
your vehicle.  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
tower reception. App on your compatible device.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):  Your mobile device must have a cellular or Remote Vehicle Start
Wi-Fi connection. Description
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle Requirements
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
through the Uconnect App or your key fob.  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the with the ability to start the engine on your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ distance. Once started, the preset climate
your identity by asking for your four-digit data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
If using the Uconnect App to command your down the interior. 5
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
vehicle, your device must be compatible and You can also send a command to turn off an
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a engine that has been started using Remote
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not
remote command.
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
NOTE: Guardian™ and have an active subscription will shut off automatically.
Anyone with access to your PIN may request that includes the applicable feature.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-  An ignition cycle is required for some remote equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
bility to protect your PIN appropriately. commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start system.
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a
Remote Door Lock/Unlock You can set up push notifications every time a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Description  Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
Start.
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your the ignition key is on or during an emergency
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any call.
distance.
266 MULTIMEDIA
Working Vehicle Conditions NOTE: rules and ordinances in the location of your
 The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode. The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
 The vehicle has been started with the key fob
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for Roadside Assistance Call
within the last 14 days.
assistance. Description
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
 The vehicle’s security system has been Remote Horn & Lights system feature will contain an ASSIST button in
armed and not triggered since the last Description the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
vehicle start.
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded services have been activated, the ASSIST
 The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are or noisy parking area by activating the horn and button can connect you directly to customer
closed. lights. It may also help if you need to draw care call centers. You will be directed to one of
 The vehicle’s check engine light must be off. attention to your vehicle for any reason. the four services below.
 The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank If you want, you can set up push notifications  Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need
of fuel, along with oil and battery power. every time a command is sent to turn on the a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who
 The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off. horn and lights. can help anytime.
 If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto- Working Vehicle Conditions  Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
matic transmission.  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell vate your services, renew after your trial has
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception. expired, and for in-vehicle support for your
tower reception.
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or  Your mobile device must have a cellular or answering any general questions
Wi-Fi connection. Wi-Fi connection. surrounding your connected services.
 If the Panic button has been pressed, the
NOTE:  Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
vehicle must be started at least once after
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed non-connected Uconnect system features,
alarming the system.
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
the surroundings when using this feature. You  Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
MULTIMEDIA 267
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Disclaimers

Features If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
onboard assistance features located on the additional roadside assistance service costs
rearview mirror or overhead console designed that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
to enhance your driving experience if you should Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
ever need assistance or support. monitor your conversations with Roadside
How It Works Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
and you will be presented with your ASSIST such conversations are initiated through the
options on the touchscreen. Make your SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
selection by pressing the touchscreen. 5
information obtained through such recording
Requirements
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
in the US and Canada. consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the of information obtained through any such call
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. recordings.
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. Send & Go
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Description
Guardian™ and have an active subscription The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
that includes the applicable feature. allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your Send & Go
 Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func- vehicle’s navigation system.
tioning electrical system.
268 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works 4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle

1. Use the Uconnect App to find the by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on
destination. the pop-up that appears on the radio
There are multiple ways to find a destina- touchscreen.
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at Requirements
the bottom of the App, press the search box
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
to browse through one of the categories pro-
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
Uconnect 4C NAV unit.
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
 View the location on a map.
 See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
 Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
Send & Go Input 3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
the destination by pressing the Call button. 1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 — Navigation Button
MULTIMEDIA 269
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ Vehicle Finder

data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection Description
compatible with your device.
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
to make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
5
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the
LTE Network Connection information by pressing the layers button.
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
These options will appear:
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder Layers

1 — Map View
2 — Satellite View
3 — Hybrid View
4 — Show Traffic
5 — View Boundaries
270 MULTIMEDIA
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
your location. Guardian™ and have an active subscription WARNING!
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can that includes the applicable feature. The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
map a route to your vehicle.  Vehicle ignition must have been turned on Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
within 14 days. may result in an accident involving serious
NOTE: injury or death.
 You are responsible for using remote
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
services that sound horn and flash lights in Description Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi- 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that Vehicle
nances in effect at the location of your connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or How It Works
vehicle. 4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are you are. After you've made your purchase, turn the vehicle passengers with an
dependent on a properly installed and opera- on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices. internet access hotspot in the vehicle,
tional Uconnect system, cellular network  Enables all your passengers to be simultane- using the radio as an access point.
availability that is compatible with the device ously connected to the web. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. devices (such as a laptop or any other
 Connect several devices at one time.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
 Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
available everywhere at all times, particularly connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
in remote or enclosed areas. or any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network. complimentary 3-month trial period that
Requirements includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be
 A high-speed, secured connection lets
 Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in activated any time within the first year of new
anyone on your private network access the
motion. vehicle ownership.
Web — great for working and relaxing.
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
MULTIMEDIA 271
Use one of these three ways to purchase a The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
WARNING! Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select Always drive safely with your hands on the number (as issued by your local law enforce-
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. ment). If you have downloaded the
How To Purchase button and follow the You have full responsibility and assume all Uconnect App, you can push the “Settings”
instructions. risks related to the use of the features and menu button on your device, select “Help”,
applications in this vehicle. Only use the fea- and then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
tures and applications in this vehicle when it tomer Care” to make the call.
to the AT&T portal to get set up.
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
3. For existing Connected Car customers: 3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
in an accident involving in serious injury or
Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an authenticate that you are the owner of the
death.
AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist vehicle and contact the law enforcement
you. Stolen Vehicle Assistance with whom you filed the stolen vehicle 5
report.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you Description
can change its name and the password by 4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing work with your local law enforcement to
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
view the connected devices from the app law enforcement if your vehicle is
help recover it.
screen by pressing the View Connected Devices recovered. While the investigation is
How It Works ongoing, you should also contact your
button.
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law insurance company to inform it of the
NOTE: enforcement as soon as possible. They will situation.
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
required in order to purchase and use the 4G 2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Wi-Fi Hotspot. Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
272 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your NOTE:

 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the vehicle’s health and performance, your Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
Uconnect system. vehicle’s location, your utilization of the register and activate services. During this
features in your vehicle, and other data. process you will be asked to provide an email
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection This data collection and transmission begins address to which the reports will be sent.
compatible with your device. when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless you call Description
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell Your vehicle will send you notifications to
them to deactivate your Uconnect Services. remind you when services are needed, or to
NOTE: alert you of other important information, such
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are as recall notices. When you receive a
information, located at
available everywhere at all times, particularly in notification through your touchscreen, press OK
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
remote or enclosed areas. to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Care agent.
Description For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/ NOTE:
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
privacy-policy. Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
Vehicle Health Alert In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
Description Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
provided as a convenience to you and does not Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it messages.
substitute for regular maintenance to your senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key
vehicle. systems. For further information, go to your
Owner’s website.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
MULTIMEDIA 273
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is Google Assistant — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®! for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 258. keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle across your devices, including Android™
vehicle and remotely access key services and to Amazon Alexa®: phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated
features. 1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your speakers, like Google Home. If you need
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect mobile device (Apple® or Android™). assistance, ask Google for help, or for a
Navigation, you can send a destination directly 2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to complete list of commands by saying: “Hey
to your vehicle using Alexa®. SKILLS. Google, ask <brand name> for help with my
car.”
If you need assistance, you can always ask 3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands Here are a few examples of commands:
Enable.
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my 5
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
with my car.” <vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
Here are a few of the many questions you can
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT. <vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
ask Alexa®:
6. Log in using your Owner Account  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
credentials. This will be the same user 1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
name and password you used when to my <vehicle name>.”
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
Connected Services. fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send
7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.” brand> Skill.
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel You can now begin using the <vehicle brand>
level of my <vehicle name>.” Skill on Alexa®!
274 MULTIMEDIA
To link your Uconnect account with Google  Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Assistant, follow these steps: level and oil life Description
1. Download and install the Google Assistant  And more!
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app
app on your smart phone from the App right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
Store® or Google Play.
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
To get started, follow these steps:
Description
2. After installation, log in to the Google 1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving
Store® or Google Play.
account by pressing the icon in the upper and give you peace of mind when your loved
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary 2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
right hand corner.
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your using the username and password you
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left created when you first set up your account.
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
Uconnect app to set alerts: 3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
brand name.
 Boundary Alert connected through Bluetooth®.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
Receive a notification the moment your 4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
vehicle is driven either out of or into a SmartWatch.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address geographic boundary that you set.
and password you created when you Once the app is downloaded on your
 Curfew Alert SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
activated Uconnect services.
Receive a notification when your car is being  Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
driven outside of the curfew time. remote lock button in the app and entering
linking process.
 Speed Alert your security PIN.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you: Receive a notification whenever your car  Remote start or stop your vehicle.
 Remotely start the engine, or cancel a exceeds a speed limit you set.  View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
remote start level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
 Valet Alert
 Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in and more.
Receive a notification if and when your
Uconnect Navigation system For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone. channel for SmartWatch Integration.
MULTIMEDIA 275
Uconnect Market 6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless Service. Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
and secure transactions from the comfort of 7. Enter your credit card information, and to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations, press “Next”.
in a queue until an agent is available. If you do
place food orders, or pay for other goods and 8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”. not have an active subscription, push the
services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen.
9. The system will verify the phone number. ASSIST button and click the Activate button on
To get started with Uconnect Market on the Once verified, Uconnect Market will be the touchscreen to activate services.
touchscreen: available to use. Press the OK button. CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect
From the online portal, https:// 1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
App drawer.
market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty Call button on the mirror? You have 10
2. Press “Get Started”. accounts and start receiving benefits from them seconds after pushing the SOS Call button
5
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your while still using Uconnect Market and view your to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either
phone number to receive a text message purchase history. push the SOS Call button again, or press
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™ touchscreen.
Market.
ACCOUNT 2. What type of information is sent when I use
NOTE: To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
If the text message does not come through, press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call Certain vehicle information, such as make
press the Resend Text button. It might take a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. and model, is transmitted along with the
minute to receive the text message. last known GPS location.
NOTE:
4. Once you receive the text message, press It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or 3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
the link provided. You will be directed to a turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM can use the SOS Call button to make a call
sign-in screen. Enter your email and Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data. if you or someone else needs emergency
password. You will then be able to use assistance.
Uconnect Market. CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
5. If you do not have an account, press For additional information about SiriusXM
“Register Now” to create one. Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
276 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR remotely command your vehicle. Other CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & G O
LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S operating systems may be supported in the FAQ S
future.
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the 1. How long does it take to send the route and
door? Depending on various conditions, it 5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The destination to my vehicle? Depending on
can take up to three minutes or more for Uconnect App relies on a mobile network various conditions, it can take up to three
the request to get to your vehicle. connection from your device to send minutes for the request to get through to
commands to your vehicle which must have your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If 2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
more quickly, however its range is limited either your device or your vehicle is in an Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for area with below average coverage, it may the engine, the pop-up message stating that
these and other situations. take longer to log in and send commands. you have a new route will appear. There is
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
People sometimes lose their mobile CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE the route if selected.
devices, which is why security measures ASSISTANCE FAQ S 3. Can I select a different route than the most
have been engineered into the Uconnect recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
1. What is the phone number for roadside
App. Asking for your username, password you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
assistance call? The phone number is:
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are the pop-up message offers a “Locations”
required for the activation of Remote  US: 1-800-521-2779 option. Once “Locations” is selected, you
services through your mobile device. It is  Canada: 1-800-363-4869 can choose from a list of recently sent
your responsibility to protect your destinations.
passwords and PINs. 2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is however your new vehicle may include
FAQ S
compatible with most devices with the Roadside Assistance Call services. 1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your
Apple® and Android™ operating systems. vehicle may be located by anyone who has
The capabilities of these devices allow us to your PIN and access to your account. It is
MULTIMEDIA 277
your responsibility to guard your PIN do so. We will also provide the service for CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE V EHICLE
accordingly. See the Uconnect and FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you S TART FAQ S
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for have purchased through them.
more information. 1. How long does it take to remotely start my
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? vehicle? Depending on various conditions,
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ it can take three minutes or more for the
flash the lights? Depending on various Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle request to get through to your vehicle.
conditions, it can take three minutes or report, the agent will work together with law
more for the request to get through to your enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
vehicle. your vehicle is recovered, you will be App? Your key fob will remote start your
contacted by law enforcement. vehicle more quickly. However its range is
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I limited. For example, when you are leaving
turn them on? If you are close enough to the 3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my the stadium after the game, you can use the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off insurance rates? Some insurance providers Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle 5
the horn and lights by pressing the red offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with and have the inside of your vehicle
Panic button. systems that can deter auto theft. When comfortable by the time you get to it.
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN VEHICLE the insurance provider of your SiriusXM 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
ASSISTANCE FAQ S Guardian™ services subscription to find out
wireless devices, which is why security
if the insurance provider can offer you a
1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To measures have been engineered into the
lower rate.
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle NOTE: password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
police report is required for you to activate Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
this service. You must involve local law companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an your vehicle if they happen to find your
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ insurance product. You are responsible for device.
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle 4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
vehicle for other law enforcement or and yourself. using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
government agencies, subject to a valid
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The
court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
278 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Start feature simply starts the 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect  Push the Assist button. A call will be
engine to warm up or cool down the interior App? Your key fob will sound the horn and placed to an agent who can assist in
before you arrive. flash the lights quicker; however its range is registering your new account.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with limited.
 Press the Activate Services icon in the
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I Apps menu. Select the button to speak
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel turn them on? If you are close enough to the with an agent, who can assist in regis-
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off tering your new account.
the vehicle. the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn &  Press the Activate Services icon in the
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Apps menu. Enter your email on the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been Lights will continue for a maximum of three
minutes. touchscreen and then follow the prompts
designed to work on most devices with the from the provided email. You will receive
Apple® and Android™ operating systems. 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the an email with an activation link that will
The capabilities of these devices allow us to Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
remotely command your vehicle. Other designed to work on most devices with the activation link, you will be prompted to fill
operating systems may be supported in the Apple® and Android™ operating systems. out your information and accept Terms
future. The capabilities of these devices allow us to and Conditions. Then, you will be directed
remotely command your vehicle. Other to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN operating systems may be supported in the complete your profile and demo the
& L IGHTS FAQ S future. remote services.
1. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQ S 2. Why do I need an email address? Without
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM an email address, customers cannot
conditions, it can take three minutes or
Guardian™ account? There are three ways register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
more for the request to get through to your
that you can register your SiriusXM need to register so they can subscribe to
vehicle.
Guardian™ Account: receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
MULTIMEDIA 279
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated in advance of your expiration date to remind
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your you that your subscription is ending soon.
Guardian™ Security PIN during the Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
registration process. The SiriusXM your personal information. Make your edits notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to and click Save. Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
authenticate you when accessing your 7. Can I try features or packages before I buy Owner’s Site and then update your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or them? Your new vehicle purchase may have preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
performing any remote services, such as come with an included trial period for customer web portal.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & certain Apps and services. 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
8. Can I access every App and service while SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ driving? No, some applications and services pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
security PIN? If you’ve already activated are not available while driving. For your own mirror. 5
services and forgot your SiriusXM safety, it is not possible to use some of the 12. How do I update my credit card
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s motion (e.g. key pad). and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Site.
9. What happens when my subscription Guardian™ Payment Account.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ comes up for renewal? If you have added a 13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
payment account address? Your SiriusXM credit card to your account information, my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can your subscription will be automatically Guardian™ Customer Care.
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM renewed for a term length in accordance
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
with the service plan that you have selected
your vehicle. To update online: login to your choose a subscription to view its expiration
at the then current subscription rate and on
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile > date. When your subscription is about to ex-
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account. pire, you will receive an email or letter of no-
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
tification.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
profile? Your name, home address, phone credit card to your account, SiriusXM 14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
number, email address and SiriusXM Guardian™ will send you an email or letter subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
280 MULTIMEDIA
from the date of cancellation for annual 18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/ Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared
plans or longer. Please see the Uconnect and data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for connection compatible with my device is Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
refunds related to billing plans of other temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and diagnostic information including location data
lengths and other circumstances. ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it not connected to an operable LTE (voice/ Health Report to you.
expires? Yes. If you have an annual data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, your subscription will be Services that required your smartphone subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call information, including location data, may still be
monthly subscription, your subscription will may be functioning if you have an operable transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
be canceled on the last day of the month in network. have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
which you choose to cancel. Use of any of the Uconnect Services including
DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, The Uconnect system collects and transmits consent to the collection, use and disclosure of
you’ll want to remove your account data which may include information about your this information in accordance with the
information. This process removes all vehicle, your vehicle’s health and performance, Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
personal information, returns the Uconnect your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the information to be collected, used, or shared,
system to its original factory settings, features in your vehicle, and other data. The you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services collection, use and sharing of this information is entirety by contacting us as referenced in the
and account information. To remove your required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Uconnect Privacy Policy.
account information from the Uconnect services and is further described by the
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at
Customer Care. www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
17. What if I forgot to remove my account www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
information before I returned my lease This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
MULTIMEDIA 281
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone level of energy emitted is far less than the
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
noisy performance from your radio. This devices such as mobile phones. However, the
condition may be lessened or eliminated by use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This situations or environments, such as aboard
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
radio performance does not satisfactorily are encouraged to ask for authorization before
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is turning on the wireless radio Ú page 446.
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
when not using Uconnect (if equipped). 5
if your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages,
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION it will provide you vehicle status while operating
USA/CANADA on off-road conditions. It supplies information Main Menu
relating to the status of the drivetrain, transfer 1 — Uconnect Apps Button
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
case, coolant/oil gauges, pitch and roll of the 2 — Off-Road Pages App
The radiated output power of the internal vehicle and access to the trailcam system.
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
button on the touchscreen, and then select
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
“Off-Road Pages”.
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
282 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR DRIVETRAIN

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along The Drivetrain page displays information
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
each of the three selectable page options. It The following information is displayed:
provides continually updating information for  Steering angle in degrees
the following items:
 Status of Transfer Case
 Current Transfer Case Status
 Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
 Current Latitude/Longitude
 Current Altitude of the vehicle
 Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control
and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
 Status of Off-Road+ Mode
Status Bar 2WD/4WD

1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
MULTIMEDIA 283
ACCESSORY G AUGE PITCH & ROLL TRAILCAM — I F EQUIPPED

The Accessory Gauge page displays the current The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil current pitch (angle up and down) and roll that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), (angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll front view of your vehicle. The image will be
Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage. gauges provide a visualization of the current displayed on the touchscreen along with a
vehicle angle. caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam button on the
touchscreen.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Coolant Temperature Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
2 — Oil Temperature 1 — Current Pitch TrailCam Activation
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only) 2 — Current Roll
4 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
5 — Battery Voltage
284
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES  Brake pedal pulsations
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS) the stop  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability ABS is designed to function with the Original physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
and brake performance under most braking Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. it increase braking or steering efficiency
conditions. The system automatically prevents Modification may result in degraded ABS beyond that afforded by the condition of the
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during performance. vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
braking. afforded.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure WARNING!  The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
that the ABS is working properly each time the  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic including those resulting from excessive
vehicle is started and driven. During this equipment that may be susceptible to inter- speed in turns, following another vehicle
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound ference caused by improperly installed or too closely, or hydroplaning.
as well as some related motor noises. high output radio transmitting equipment.  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
The ABS is activated during braking when the This interference can cause possible loss of must never be exploited in a reckless or
system detects one or more wheels are anti-lock braking capability. Installation of dangerous manner that could jeopardize
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice, such equipment should be performed by the user’s safety or the safety of others.
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose qualified professionals.
debris, or panic stops may increase the  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
likelihood of ABS activation(s). diminish their effectiveness and may lead Light
You also may experience the following normal to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
characteristics when ABS activates: distance longer. Just press firmly on your the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
brake pedal when you need to slow down or may stay on for as long as four seconds.
continue to hear for a short time after the stop. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
stop) (Continued) on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
SAFETY 285
and that service is required. However, the Brake System Warning Light braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
conventional brake system will continue to The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on. when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
WARNING!
mode and may stay on for as long as four
should be serviced as soon as possible to seconds. The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or vent the natural laws of physics from acting
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the comes on while driving, it indicates that the on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have brake system is not functioning properly and afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
the light repaired as soon as possible. that immediate service is required. If the Brake cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
SYSTEM The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
for additional information. Brake Assist System (BAS) gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s user's safety or the safety of others. 6
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This braking capability during emergency braking
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), maneuvers. The system detects an emergency Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake braking situation by sensing the rate and EBD manages the distribution of the braking
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll amount of brake application and then applies torque between the front and rear axles by
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction reduce braking distances. The BAS done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
Control System (TCS). These systems work complements the Anti-Lock Brake System avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
together to enhance both vehicle stability and (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
control in various driving conditions. in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill
Descent Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support continuous braking pressure during the ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
(RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
Sway Control (TSC). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
286 SAFETY
that the rate of change of the steering wheel Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light begins to flash during
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to ESC enhances directional control and stability acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the of the vehicle under various driving conditions. apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will of the vehicle by applying the brake of the road conditions.
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive WARNING!
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
due to other factors, such as road conditions, prevent the natural laws of physics from
 Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
vehicles. the traction afforded by prevailing road
tion.
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
NOTE:  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
including those resulting from excessive
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
mode (if equipped) Ú page 286. tion.
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine prevent accidents resulting from loss of
WARNING! the vehicle path intended by the driver and vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
conditions and driving conditions, influence When the actual path does not match the tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may intended path, ESC applies the brake of the dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
overs, especially those that involve leaving oversteer or understeer condition. less or dangerous manner which could
the roadway or striking objects or other vehi- The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped located in the instrument cluster will start to others.
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless flash as soon as the ESC system becomes (Continued)
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
the user's safety or the safety of others. Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
SAFETY 287
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC  Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
maintain your vehicle, may change the thresholds for activation, which allows for more the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and wheel spin than normally allowed.
may negatively affect the performance of the Full Off — If Equipped
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
ESC system. Changes to the steering The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway
push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF
system, suspension, braking system, tire or off-road use only and should not be used on
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
type and size or wheel size may adversely any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
and unevenly worn tires may also degrade mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification NOTE: seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
the effectiveness of the ESC system can the push and release of the button will toggle sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be illuminate, and the “ESC Off” message will 6
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. required to return to “ESC On”. display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
ESC Operating Modes WARNING!
Depending upon model and mode of operation, NOTE:
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func- System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
the ESC system may have multiple operating tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
modes. “Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
feature described in the TCS section), has predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
ESC On been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
slows below the predetermined speed the
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is
system will be in this mode. This mode should
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the active when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the
be used for most driving conditions. Alternate
ESC system is reduced. driver, ESC will not switch to "Partial Off" mode
ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. (Continued)
288 SAFETY
at any speed and will remain in "Full Off" mode ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
until Off Road+ is exited or ESC is re-enabled by And ESC OFF Indicator Light the customer has elected to have the
the driver. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
Indicator Light in the instrument reduced mode.
WARNING!
cluster will come on when the ignition NOTE:
 In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine is turned to the “ESC On” mode. It  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
torque reduction and stability features are should go out with the engine running. If the Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light on momentarily each time the ignition is
stability offered by the ESC system is comes on continuously with the engine running, placed in the ON position.
unavailable. In an emergency evasive a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage  Each time the ignition is place in the ON posi-
system. If this light remains on after several
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or turned off previously.
several miles (km) at speeds greater than
off-road use only.  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
 The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) soon as possible to have the problem
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics diagnosed and corrected.
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light activation.
increase the traction afforded by prevailing starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
accidents, including those resulting from Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
excessive speed in turns, driving on very flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to while descending hills during various driving
cannot prevent collisions. flash during acceleration, ease up on the situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
accelerator and apply as little throttle as actively controlling the brakes.
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
SAFETY 289
HDC has three states: using the gear shift +/-. The following Driver Override
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not summarizes the HDC set speeds: The driver may override HDC activation with
activate). HDC Target Set Speeds throttle or brake application at any time.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but  P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but Deactivating HDC
activation conditions are not met, or driver will not activate HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
is actively overriding with brake or throttle  R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) any of the following conditions occur:
application).  N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)  Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively  D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) or brake application.
controlling vehicle speed).  1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Enabling HDC
 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)  Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
the following conditions must also be met to  4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
uphill grade.
enable HDC:  5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) 6
 Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
 Driveline is in 4WD Low.  6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
Disabling HDC
 Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).  7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
 The parking brake is released.  8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h) the following conditions occur:
 The driver door is closed. (If doors are  9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
 The driver pushes the HDC switch.
attached, then door must be closed. If doors
NOTE:  The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
are detached, then driver seat belt must be
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC  The parking brake is applied.
buckled.)
target speed selection, but will not affect the  The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if
Activating HDC gear chosen by the transmission. When actively doors are attached or driver seat belt is
Once HDC is enabled it will activate controlling HDC the transmission will shift unbuckled if doors are detached.)
automatically if driven down a grade of appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is and corresponding driving conditions.
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
290 SAFETY
 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph  The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. WARNING!
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
 The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph HDC is only intended to assist the driver in direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). controlling vehicle speed when descending forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
 HDC detects excessive brake temperature. hills. The driver must remain attentive to the REVERSE gear).
driving conditions and is responsible for  HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
Feedback To The Driver
maintaining a safe vehicle speed. gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
HDC switch has an indicator light, which offers Hill Start Assist (HSA) equipped with a manual transmission, if the
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
 The cluster icon and switch indicator light will back from a complete stop while on an incline.
illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is If the driver releases the brake while stopped on WARNING!
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper- an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake There may be situations where the Hill Start
ating condition for HDC. pressure for a short period. If the driver does Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
 The cluster icon and switch indicator light will not apply the throttle before this time expires, may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
flash for several seconds then extinguish the system will release brake pressure and the loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
when the driver pushes the HDC switch but vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. is not a substitute for active driving involve-
enable conditions are not met.
The following conditions must be met in order ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
 The cluster icon and switch indicator light will for HSA to activate: be attentive to distance to other vehicles,
flash for several seconds then extinguish people, and objects, and most importantly
 The feature must be enabled.
when HDC disables due to excess speed. brake operation to ensure safe operation of
 The vehicle must be stopped.
 The cluster icon and switch indicator light will the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
flash when HDC deactivates due to over-  The parking brake must be off.
complete attention is always required while
heated brakes. The flashing will stop and  The driver door must be closed. (If the doors
driving to maintain safe control of your vehi-
HDC will activate again once the brakes have are attached, then the door must be closed. cle. Failure to follow these warnings can
cooled sufficiently. If the doors are detached then the driver's result in a collision or serious personal injury.
seat belt must be buckled.)
SAFETY 291
Disabling And Enabling HSA Rain Brake Support (RBS) 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To RBS may improve braking performance in wet activation conditions are not met, or driver
change the current setting, refer to Ú page 111 conditions. It will periodically apply a small is actively overriding with brake or throttle
for further information. amount of brake pressure to remove any water application)
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
Towing With HSA when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI controlling vehicle speed)
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll speed. When RBS is active, there is no Enabling SSC
back while towing a trailer. notification to the driver and no driver
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but
interaction is required.
WARNING! the following conditions must also be met to
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) enable SSC:
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated RAB may reduce the time required to reach full  The driveline is in 4WD Low.
and deactivated with the brake switch. If braking during emergency braking situations. It  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
so, there may not be enough brake pres- anticipates when an emergency braking  The parking brake is released.
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer situation may occur by monitoring how fast the 6
 The driver door is closed.
on a hill when the brake pedal is released. throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
 The driver is not applying throttle.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
while resuming acceleration, manually acti- system for a panic stop. Activating SSC
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle Once SSC is enabled it will activate
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped automatically once the following conditions are
pedal. SSC is intended for off-road driving in met:
4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle  The driver releases the throttle.
 HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
speed by actively controlling engine
the parking brake fully when exiting your  The driver releases the brake.
torque and brakes.
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-  The transmission is in any selection other
mission in PARK (P). SSC has three states: than PARK.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not  Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
 Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury. activate)
292 SAFETY
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the mission will shift appropriately for the  The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear driver-selected set speed and corresponding (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be driving conditions.  The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
reduced when climbing a grade and the level of  SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ (64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
set speed reduction depends on the magnitude drive mode if active. The differences may be Feedback To The Driver
of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set notable to the driver as a varying level of
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
speeds: aggressiveness.
SSC switch has a lamp that offers feedback to
SSC Target Set Speeds Driver Override the driver about the state SSC is in.
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) The driver may override SSC activation with 
 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) throttle or brake application at any time.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) Deactivating SSC nate and remain on solid when SSC is
 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) SSC will be deactivated but remain available if enabled or activated. These are the normal
 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) any of the following conditions occur: operating conditions for SSC.
 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)  The driver overrides SSC set speed with  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
throttle or brake application. several seconds then extinguish when the
 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
 The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) driver pushes the SSC switch but enabled
 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). conditions are not met.
 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
 The vehicle is shifted into PARK.  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
 REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Disabling SSC several seconds then extinguish when SSC
 NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) disables due to excess speed.
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
 PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
following conditions occur:
NOTE:  The driver pushes the SSC switch.
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
overheated brakes.
 During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is  The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
used for SSC target speed selection but will  The parking brake is applied.
not affect the gear chosen by the transmis-  The driver door opens.
sion. While actively controlling SSC, the trans-
SAFETY 293
WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in excessively swaying trailer and will take the BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
controlling vehicle speed when driving in appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. EQUIPPED
off-road conditions. The driver must remain
NOTE: The BSM system uses two radar sensors,
attentive to the driving conditions and is
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. located inside the taillights, to detect highway
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
Always use caution when towing a trailer and licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
speed.
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda- motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
Traction Control System (TCS) tions Ú page 193. zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
the TCS may apply brake pressure to the power may be reduced and you may feel the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power brakes being applied to individual wheels to
to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is 6
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip Off” or “Full Off” modes.
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is WARNING!
spinning faster than the other, the system will If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle Rear Detection Zones
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
allow more engine torque to be applied to the adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain sway.
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
294 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately when a motorcycle or any small object The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft remains at the side of the vehicle for the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside extended periods of time (more than a couple warning light located in the outside mirrors in
rearview mirror and extends approximately of seconds). addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of The area on taillights, where the radar sensors and reducing the radio volume Ú page 297.
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle dirt/road contamination so that the BSM
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately system can function properly. Do not block the
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the taillights where the radar sensors are located
driver of vehicles in these areas. with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
NOTE:
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
 The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT Warning Light Location
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. The BSM system monitors the detection zone
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is from three different entry points (side, rear,
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before front) while driving to see if an alert is
making a lane change. If the trailer or other necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
during these types of zone entries.
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear Ú page 211.
 The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
SAFETY 295
Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
Side Monitoring
vehicle remains in the blind spot for 6
Entering From The Rear approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
on either side and enter the rear detection zone between the two vehicles is greater than
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
(48 km/h). illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
296 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that Rear Cross Path (RCP) When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
are traveling in the opposite direction of the RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing the driver is alerted using both the visual and
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 446. out of parking spaces where their vision of audible alarms, including reducing the radio
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed volume.
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space NOTE:
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
RCP system will then have a clear view of the be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is the sensors are blocked by other structures or
detected, alert the driver. vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
Opposing Traffic Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
WARNING! to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be care-
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
ful when backing up, even when using RCP.
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
look behind you, and be sure to check for
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. RCP Detection Zones
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving ure to do so can result in serious injury or
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum death.
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
can result in serious injury or death. objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
SAFETY 297
Blind Spot Modes NOTE: jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of Whenever an audible alert is requested by the potential frontal collision. The warnings are
operation that are available in the Uconnect BSM system, the radio is also muted. intended to provide the driver with enough time
system. When the system is in RCP, the system shall to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only respond with both visual and audible alerts NOTE:
when a detected object is present. Whenever FCW monitors the information from the forward
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also looking sensors as well as Electronic Brake
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
appropriate side view mirror based on a
the RCP state always requests the chime. forward collision. When the system determines
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the Blind Spot Alert Off that a forward collision is probable, the driver
system will respond with both visual and When the BSM system is turned off there will be will be provided with audible and visual warn-
audible alerts when a detected object is no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM ings as well as a possible haptic warning in the
present. Whenever an audible alert is or RCP systems. form of a brake jerk.
requested, the radio is muted. 6
NOTE: If the driver does not take action based upon
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime The BSM system will store the current operating these progressive warnings, then the system
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/ mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time will provide a limited level of active braking to
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a the vehicle is started the previously stored help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror mode will be recalled and used. forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is ings by braking and the system determines that
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW)
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED braking but has not applied sufficient brake
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn The FCW with Mitigation system provides the force, the system will compensate and provide
signal and detected object are present on the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings additional brake force as required.
same side at the same time, both the visual and (within the instrument cluster display), and may
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the apply a haptic warning in the form of a brake
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
298 SAFETY
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed NOTE:

below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may
WARNING!
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is
provide the maximum braking possible to miti- 3 mph (5 km/h). Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
gate the potential forward collision. If the  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event other than vehicles such as guard rails or can FCW detect every type of potential colli-
stops the vehicle completely, the system will sign posts based on the course prediction. sion. In rare situations, the system may react
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds This is expected and is a part of normal FCW to surrounding objects such as tunnels,
and then release the brakes. activation and functionality. bridges, guard rails etc. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by con-
 It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four trolling the vehicle via braking, steering, and
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the acceleration. Unintended braking reactions
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti- can always be overridden by pressing down
vated until the next key cycle. hard on the accelerator. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
Turning FCW On or Off
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings Ú page 211.
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
FCW Message  To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
When the system determines a collision with objects not in the path of the vehicle, collision button once.
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, stationary objects that are far away,  To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
the warning message will be deactivated oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the collision button once.
Ú page 446. same or higher rate of speed.
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
SAFETY 299
NOTE:  Far  More dynamic or aggressive drivers that

 When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
 want to avoid frequent warnings may
to warn the driver of a possible collision with “Far” setting and the system status is prefer this setting.
the vehicle in front. “Only Warning”, this allows the system to
FCW Limited Warning
 When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the warn the driver of a possible more distant
collision with the vehicle in front using If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
system from warning the driver of a possible
audible/visual warnings. Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
 More cautious drivers that do not mind
the instrument cluster display. momentarily, there may be a condition that
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
 When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,  Medium still drivable under normal conditions, the active
this prevents the system from providing  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the braking may not be fully available. Once the
limited active braking, or additional brake “Medium” setting and the system status condition that limited the system performance
support if the driver is not braking adequately is “Only Warning”, this allows the system is no longer present, the system will return to its
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
to warn the driver of a possible collision full performance state. If the problem persists, 6
 When FCW status is set to “Warning and with the vehicle in front using audible/ see an authorized dealer.
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the visual warnings.
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
 Near
Service FCW Warning
in front using audible/visual warnings and it If the system turns off, and the instrument
applies autonomous braking.  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is cluster displays:
 The system will retain the last setting
"Only Warning”, this allows the system to  ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
selected by the driver after ignition shut-
warn the driver of a possible closer colli-  Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
down.
sion with the vehicle in front using This indicates there is an internal system fault.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity audible/visual warnings. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status  This setting provides less reaction time normal conditions, have the system checked by
are programmable through the Uconnect than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, an authorized dealer.
system Ú page 211. which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
300 SAFETY
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire For example, your vehicle may have a
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the recommended cold (parked for more than three
(TPMS)
low-pressure warning limit for any reason, hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) including low temperature effects and natural the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based pressure loss through the tire. the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
on the vehicle recommended cold placard a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
pressure. decrease the tire pressure to approximately
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
NOTE: and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until or above the recommended cold placard enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
the tire is inflated to the placard pressure. pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
pressure to the recommended cold placard situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
turn off. recommended cold placard pressure value
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
Ú page 446.
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is NOTE:
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may NOTE:
has not been driven for at least three hours, or need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
must not exceed the maximum inflation Light off. pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
driven. This is normal and there should be no
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
adjustment for this increased pressure.
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
See Ú page 404 on how to properly inflate the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
vehicle’s tires. for the TPMS to receive this information.
SAFETY 301
NOTE: pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

CAUTION! wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
 The TPMS has been optimized for the orig- tire care and maintenance, or to provide pressure readings to the receiver module.
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS warning of a tire failure or condition.
pressures and warning have been estab-  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
lished for the tire size equipped on your sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure,
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or unless your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill
sensor damage may result when using Alert or Selectable Tire Fill Alert feature.
replacement equipment that is not of the
 Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
sensor is not designed for use on after-
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
market wheels, and may contribute to a
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
poor overall system performance.
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Customers are encouraged to use Original Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
6
ensure TPMS feature operation. NOTE:
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using It is particularly important for you to check the
 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System underinflation has not reached the level to monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is The TPMS consists of the following
Light.
recommended that you take your vehicle to components:
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect
an authorized dealer to have your sensor  Receiver module
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
function checked.  Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
actual tire pressure in the tire.
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- sensors
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap. System Operation  Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
This will prevent moisture and dirt from The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) messages, which display in the instrument
entering the valve stem, which could uses wireless technology with wheel rim cluster
damage the TPMS sensor. mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire  Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light
302 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn- "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
ings receives the updated tire pressures, the system Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
The TPMS Warning Light will will automatically update, the pressure values “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
illuminate in the instrument cluster in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will no longer display, and a pressure value will
and a chime will sound when tire will return to their original color, and the TPMS display in place of the dashes. A system fault
pressure is low in one or more of the Warning Light will turn off. can occur due to any of the following:
four active road tires. In addition, the NOTE:  Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may next to facilities emitting the same radio
message for a minimum of five seconds, an frequencies as the TPMS sensors
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard  Installing some form of aftermarket window
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning tinting that affects radio wave signals
pressure values in a different color. Light off.  Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to wheel housings
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order  Using tire chains on the vehicle
for the TPMS to receive this information.  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
Service TPMS Warning sensors

Vehicles With a Full-Size Matching Spare
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching
seconds and then remain on solid. The system full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as five seconds and then display dashes (--) in swapped with a low pressure road tire.
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure place of the pressure value to indicate which 2. In the event that the matching full-size
(those in a different color in the instrument sensor is not being received. spare tire is swapped with a low pressure
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
cold placard pressure value as shown in the repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If still show the TPMS Warning Light to be on,
SAFETY 303
a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX message Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS NOTE:
to appear in the instrument cluster, and the will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE  Only one tire can be filled at a time when
graphic display will still show the low tire TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message in the using the Tire Fill Alert system.
pressure value in a different color. instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in  The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes place of the pressure values. an existing TPMS system fault is set to
above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel “active” or if the system is in deactivation
TPMS Warning Light as long as none of road and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires mode (if equipped).
tires are below the low pressure warning equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the The system will be activated when the system
threshold. vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph detects an increase in tire pressure while filling
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS the tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 mode with the transmission in PARK for
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all seconds and then turn off. The instrument vehicles equipped with an automatic
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE transmission. For vehicles equipped with a
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display manual transmission, the park brake must be
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter pressure values in place of the dashes. On the applied.
6
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no longer be NOTE:
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
displayed as long as no system fault exists. It is not required to have the engine running to
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring Tire Fill Alert
System sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
This feature notifies the user when the placard
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will lamps do not come on while inflating the tire,
deflating the tire.
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor
The customer may choose to disable or enable may be in an inoperative position, preventing
on. The instrument cluster will display the
the Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the the TPM sensor signal from being received. In
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
Uconnect system. this case, the vehicle may need to be moved
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. slightly forward or backward.
304 SAFETY
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire Uconnect system, you will be able to select a hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
pressure display screen will be displayed in the pressure setting for both the front and rear axle vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
instrument cluster. tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire
Operation: range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for pressure screen will be displayed in the
 The horn will chirp once to let the user know
each axle setting. instrument cluster. If the hazard lamps do not
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values come on while inflating or deflating the tire, the
recommended pressure. for the front and rear axles as shown on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is vehicle placard pressure label. in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS
overfilled and will continue to chirp every five You may also store pressure values chosen for sensor signal from being received. In this case,
seconds if the user continues to inflate the each axle in the Uconnect system application as the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
tire. preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset forward or backward.
 The horn will chirp once again when enough pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
air is let out to reach proper inflation level. system for the front and rear axle. Once you inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
 The horn will also chirp three times if the tire
select the tire pressures for the front and rear following STFA states:
is then underinflated and will continue to axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you 1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
chirp every five seconds if the user continues can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a pressure is reached to let you know when
to deflate the tire. time. to stop inflating or deflating the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA)— If Equipped NOTE: 2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
The STFA system is an optional feature that is The STFA system will only support inflating or over-inflated or over-deflated.
included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert deflating one tire at a time. 3. The horn will chirp once again when enough
system. The system is designed to allow you to The system will be activated when the TPMS air is added or removed to reach proper
select a pressure to inflate or deflate the receiver module detects a change in tire selected pressure level.
vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and to pressure. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
provide feedback while inflating or deflating the mode, with the transmission in PARK in vehicles
vehicle's tires. with an automatic transmission, and in
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in
which is located in the apps menu of the vehicles with a manual transmission. The
SAFETY 305
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
Some of the most important safety features in in the appropriate child restraint or person, see Ú page 443 for customer
your vehicle are the restraint systems: belt-positioning booster seat in a rear service contact information.
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT SYSTEMS seating position Ú page 326.
FEATURES 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a WARNING!
Seat Belt Systems rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
back as possible and use the proper child
Bags front air bag can cause death or serious
restraint Ú page 326.
 Child Restraints injury to a child 12 years or younger,
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder including a child in a rear-facing child
Some of the safety features described in this
belt behind them or under their arm. restraint.
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on 5. You should read the instructions provided  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized with your child restraint to make sure that the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a 6
dealer. you are using it properly. rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
6. All occupants should always wear their lap the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
and shoulder belts properly.
Please pay close attention to the information in that vehicle.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
be moved back as far as practical to allow
system properly, to keep you and your SEAT BELT S YSTEMS
the front air bags room to inflate.
passengers as safe as possible. Buckle up even though you are an excellent
Here are some simple steps you can take to 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air your vehicle has side air bags, and
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
bag: deployment occurs, the side air bags will
that includes you. This can happen far away
inflate forcefully into the space between
1. Children 12 years old and under should from home or on your own street.
occupants and the door and occupants
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
could be injured.
vehicle with a rear seat. and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
306 SAFETY
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front sequence will begin until the seat belts are
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat passenger seat is unoccupied. buckled again.
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated not active when the outboard front passenger
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be when the vehicle is moving above a specified seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
belted at all times. vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard when an animal or other items are placed on
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped the outboard front passenger seat or when the
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
(BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is recommended that pets be restrained in the
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
not active when the outboard front passenger
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt cargo is properly stowed.
equipped with outboard front passenger seat Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
NOTE:
Initial Indication The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition based on vehicle speed until the driver and
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if occupants to buckle their seat belts.
turn on and remain on until the driver and
equipped with outboard front passenger seat Change of Status outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if buckled.
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the equipped with outboard front passenger seat
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
remain on until both outboard front seat belts vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
SAFETY 307
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  Two people should never be belted into a
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, single seat belt. People belted together can
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
people riding in these areas are more likely crash into one another in a collision, hurting
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
to be seriously injured or killed. one another badly. Never use a lap/
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
Do not allow people to ride in any area of shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
to move freely with you under normal 
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats person, no matter what their size.
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the and seat belts.
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the WARNING!
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
vehicle. and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,  A lap belt worn too high can increase the
including the driver, should always wear risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
WARNING! their seat belts whether or not an air bag is forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to also provided at their seating position to bones, but across your abdomen. Always
 6
more severe injuries in a collision. The air minimize the risk of severe injury or death wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you in the event of a crash. possible and keep it snug.
properly. In some collisions, the air bags  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could  A twisted seat belt may not protect you
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat make your injuries in a collision much properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
belt even though you have air bags. worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
 In a collision, you and your passengers can you could even slide out of the seat belt. your body, without twists. If you can’t
suffer much greater injuries if you are not Follow these instructions to wear your seat straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- belt safely and to keep your passengers to an authorized dealer immediately and
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or safe, too. have it fixed.
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always (Continued) (Continued)
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
(Continued)
308 SAFETY

 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap protect you from injury during a collision.
portion could ride too high on your body, You are more likely to hit your head in a
possibly causing internal injuries. Always collision if you do not wear your shoulder
buckle your seat belt into the buckle belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
nearest you. be used together.
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could a collision and leave you with no protection. Pulling Out The Latch Plate
move too far forward, increasing the possi- Inspect the seat belt system periodically, 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. insert the latch plate into the buckle until
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- you hear a “click.”
dangerous. Your body could strike the ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt must be replaced after a collision.
worn under the arm can cause internal inju- Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
shoulder so that your strongest bones will back and adjust the seat.
take the force in a collision. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
(Continued) of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
SAFETY 309
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and necessary, slide the latch plate down the and move it up or down to the position that
lies low across your hips, below your webbing to allow the seat belt to retract serves you best.
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt fully.
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under lap/shoulder belt.
the seat belt in a collision. 1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
begins immediately above the latch plate.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a 6
webbing. The folded webbing must enter lower position, and if you are taller than
the slot at the top of the latch plate. average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it anchorage in a higher position. After you
Positioning The Lap Belt clears the folded webbing and the seat belt release the anchorage button, try to move it up
5. Position the shoulder belt across the is no longer twisted. or down to make sure that it is locked in
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any position.
slack so that it is comfortable and not Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger NOTE:
resting on your neck. The retractor will
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
adjusted upward or downward to position the is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat- be adjusted in the upward position without
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
ically retract to its stowed position. If pushing or squeezing the release button. To
310 SAFETY
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
until it is locked into position. Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
WARNING! enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could required for a different occupant, it must be
make your injuries in a collision much removed.
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt. WARNING!
Follow these instructions to wear your seat  ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
belt safely and to keep your passengers cally required in order to properly fit the
safe, too. original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
 Position the shoulder belt across the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any distance between the front edge of the including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
slack so that it is comfortable and not Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the event of an accident is reduced for the
resting on your neck. The retractor will with- the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.  Using a Seat Belt Extender when not a seat belt.
 Misadjustment of the seat belt could needed can increase the risk of serious Position the lap belt snug and low below the
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt injury or death in a collision. Only use the abdomen and across the strong bones of the
in a crash. Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
long enough and only use in the recom- and away from the neck. Never place the
 Always make all seat belt height adjust- mended seating positions. Remove and shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
ments when the vehicle is stationary. store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed. Seat Belt Pretensioner
Seat Belt Extender The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, with pretensioning devices that are designed to
even when the webbing is fully extended and remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage a collision. These devices may improve the
SAFETY 311
performance of the seat belt by removing slack used to secure a child restraint system. The If the passenger seating position is equipped
from the seat belt early in a collision. figure below illustrates the locking feature for with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
Pretensioners work for all size occupants, each seating position Ú page 336. only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
including those in child restraints. comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
NOTE:
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
These devices are not a substitute for proper
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
retract completely in this case and then
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
properly.
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
The pretensioners are triggered by the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the into the buckle until you hear a "click."
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
must be replaced immediately. Locations (Two-Door Models) retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. 6
Energy Management Feature Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
with an Energy Management feature that may
12 years old and under should always be
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
with a rear seat.
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
The seat belts in the passenger seating
Locations (Four-Door Models)
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
312 SAFETY
WARNING!
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S YSTEMS
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt (SRS)
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in and allow it to retract completely to disengage
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Some of the safety features described in this
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
front air bag can cause death or serious section may be standard equipment on some
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
injury to a child 12 years or younger, models, or may be optional equipment on
including a child in a rear-facing child WARNING! others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
restraint. dealer.
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
is not working properly when checked
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do interconnecting wiring associated with the
according to the procedures in the Service
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
Manual.
that vehicle. vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly Bag System Components:
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions. Air Bag System Components
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
belt. 
restrain occupants who are wearing the  Air Bag Warning Light
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
seat belt or children who are using booster  Steering Wheel and Column
downward until the entire seat belt is
seats. The locked mode is only used to  Instrument Panel
extracted.
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat  Knee Impact Bolsters
restraints that have a harness for
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. restraining the child.  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
This indicates the seat belt is now in the  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Automatic Locking Mode.  Supplemental Side Air Bags
SAFETY 313
 Front and Side Impact Sensors single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
 Seat Track Position Sensors The ORC also includes diagnostics that will Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning instrument panel could mean you won’t have
 Occupant Classification System
Light if a malfunction is detected that could the air bag system to protect you in a colli-
Air Bag Warning Light affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
The Occupant Restraint Controller record the nature of the malfunction. While the check when the ignition is first turned on,
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the air bag system is designed to be maintenance stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
electronic parts of the air bag system free, if any of the following occurs, have an comes on as you drive, have an authorized
whenever the ignition switch is in the authorized dealer service the air bag system dealer service the air bag system immedi-
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch immediately. ately.
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not during the four to eight seconds when the
inflate. ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect 6
The ORC contains a backup power supply  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval. the Supplemental Restraint System
system that may deploy the air bag system even
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
if the battery loses power or it becomes  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
disconnected prior to deployment. tently or remains on while driving.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
NOTE:
the instrument panel for approximately four to chime will sound to alert you that the
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part remains on while driving have an authorized
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning dealer service the vehicle immediately
authorized dealer service the air bag system
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A Ú page 122.
immediately.
314 SAFETY
Front Air Bags the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which

WARNING! may receive information from the front impact
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.  Being too close to the steering wheel or sensors (if equipped) or other system
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat instrument panel during front air bag components.
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is deployment could cause serious injury, The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. including death. Air bags need room to during an impact that requires air bag
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending deployment. A low energy output is used in less
instrument panel, above the glove your arms to reach the steering wheel or severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
instrument panel. for more severe collisions.
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
front air bag can cause death or serious detects whether the driver or front passenger
injury to a child 12 years or younger, seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
including a child in a rear-facing child may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
restraint. Front Air Bags.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a front passenger seat track position sensors that
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in This vehicle has an Occupant Classification
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations that vehicle. System (OCS) in the front passenger seat. The
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending
Features on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
multistage driver and front passenger air bags. Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
This system provides output appropriate to the whose seated weight classifies them in a
severity and type of collision as determined by
SAFETY 315
category other than a properly seated adult. On the other hand, depending on the type and
This could be a child, teenager, or even an WARNING! (Continued) location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
adult.  Do not put anything on or around the air crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator bag covers or attempt to open them manu- that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Light (an amber light located on the overhead ally. You may damage the air bags and you Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger could be injured because the air bags may deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is no longer be functional. The protective damage by themselves are not good indicators
deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates covers for the air bag cushions are of whether or not an air bag should have
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show designed to open only when the air bags deployed.
that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will are inflating.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
not deploy during a collision.  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
more severe injuries in a collision. The air you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
NOTE:
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
When the front passenger seat is empty or
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
when very light objects are placed on the seat,
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts 6
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
even though you have air bags.
deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illu- Front Air Bag Operation bags.
minated. Front Air Bags are designed to provide The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
additional protection by supplementing the seat upper passenger side of the instrument panel
WARNING! separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
 No objects should be placed over or near the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
the air bag on the instrument panel or collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
steering wheel because any such objects frontal collisions, including some that may eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli- produce substantial vehicle damage — for while helping to restrain the driver and front
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to example, some pole collisions, truck passenger.
inflate. underrides, and angle offset collisions.
(Continued)
316 SAFETY
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And

Front Passenger Seat Sensor
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for located underneath the front passenger seat.
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
weight. It is designed to deactivate the from the Sensor to determine the front
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an passenger’s most probable classification. The
unoccupied seat and for occupants whose OCM communicates this information to the Seated Properly
seated weight classifies them in a category ORC. The ORC uses the classification to The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
other than a properly seated adult. This could determine whether it should activate or Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
be a child, teenager, or even an adult. deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air estimates that:
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as
 The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
Consists Of The Following: designed, it is important for the front passenger
has very light objects in it.
to be seated properly and properly wearing the
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
 Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and rear-facing child restraint.
 Sitting upright
Sensor located in the front passenger seat  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
 Facing forward
 Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator child, including a child seated in a
 Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet forward-facing child restraint or booster seat.
Light – an amber light located on the over-
comfortably on or near the floor  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
head sports bar
 Sitting with their back against the seat back small passenger, including a child or small
 Air Bag Warning Light and the seat back in an upright position adult.
 Passenger Seat Belt
 The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
SAFETY 317
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System

Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Disabled Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat*Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other rela-
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
tively light objects
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
restraint or booster seat**
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED 6
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) (PAD) Indicator Light
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a (PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on
front air bag can cause death or serious rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and
injury to a child 12 years or younger, the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
including a child in a rear-facing child not transport a rear-facing child restraint in Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator
restraint. that vehicle. light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR
(Continued) BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
318 SAFETY
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision. Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger comfortably on or near the floor, and with
When the front passenger seat is empty or Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless their back against the seatback.
when very light objects are placed on the seat the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the 5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger
and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.” remain in this seated position for two to
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even three minutes after restarting the vehicle.
NOTE:
though the PAD indicator light is NOT
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the
illuminated.
PAD Indicator Light will illuminate. WARNING!
The PAD indicator light should not be
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An If the PAD Indicator Light remains illumi-
illuminated when an adult passenger is properly 
Adult Passenger: nated for an adult passenger, have an
seated in the front passenger seat. The driver
and adult passenger should verify that the PAD If an adult passenger is seated in the front authorized dealer service the air bag
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is system immediately. Failure to do so may
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult illuminated, the passenger may be sitting cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger
Indicator Light will be illuminated. weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in
Front Air Bag: the event of a collision.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated
and the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
should be deactivated for most properly seated passenger step out of the vehicle. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
and restrained children in the passenger seat 2. Remove any extra materials from the front air bag can cause death or serious
and for most properly installed child restraint passenger seat, such as cushions, pads, injury to a child 12 years or younger,
systems. However, under certain conditions, seat covers, seat massagers, blankets, including a child in a rear-facing child
even with a properly installed child restraint extra clothing, etc. restraint.
system, the PAD Indicator Light may not be (Continued)
3. Place the seatback in the full upright
illuminated, even though the Passenger position.
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can
occur if the child restraint is lighter than the 4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of
lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD the seat, with the passenger’s feet
SAFETY 319
AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
WARNING! (Continued) passenger seat, have the passenger reposition Bag. Examples of improper front passenger
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in his or her body in the seat until the PAD seating include:
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Indicator Light goes out.  The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the rest or instrument panel).
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not  The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
that vehicle. inflate in the event of a collision. or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
 Children 12 years or younger should always Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front  The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle Passenger’s Seated Weight On The Front full upright position.
with a rear seat. Passenger Seat  The front passenger carries or holds an
The front passenger’s seated weight must be object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
properly positioned on the front passenger seat. etc.).
Adults)
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or  Objects are lodged under the front passenger
When a lighter weight passenger, including a 6
death. The OCS determines the most probable seat.
small adult, occupies the passenger seat, the classification of the occupant that it detects.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be  Objects are lodged between the front
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s passenger seat and center console.
deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger decreased or increased seated weight, which
Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be  Accessories that may change the seated
may result in deactivation or activation of the
activated for a lighter weight passenger, weight on the front passenger seat are
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. attached to the front passenger seat.
including a small adult (depending on size) who This does not mean that the OCS is working
is seated in the passenger seat. This does not  Anything that may decrease or increase the
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
mean that the OCS is working improperly. front passenger’s seated weight.
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
The driver and passenger must always use the result in deactivation of the Passenger
PAD Indicator Light as a determination of Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
is activated or deactivated. If the PAD Indicator weight on the front passenger seat may result in
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
320 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most

probable classification. If an occupant in the
WARNING!
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the  If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
occupant may provide an output signal to the ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
OCS that is different from the occupant’s seated improperly, the occupant may
properly seated weight input, for example: provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Not Seated Properly  Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
Not Seated Properly
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
Not Seated Properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Not Seated Properly

SAFETY 321
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate The following requirements must be strictly
WARNING! (Continued) followed:
whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status.  If there is a fault present in the OCS, both  Do not modify the front passenger seat
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the the PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag assembly or components in any way.
operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that  Do not use prior or future model year seat
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
Warning Light does not come on, or stays on deactivated. Should this occur, the
after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will Always use the correct seat cover and
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer remain deactivated until the fault is
for service immediately. cushion specified for the vehicle.
cleared. This indicates that you should take
 Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
WARNING! an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
service immediately.
 Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your  Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
instrument panel could mean you won’t The passenger seat assembly contains critical  At no time should any Supplemental
have the air bags to protect you in a colli- OCS components that may affect Passenger Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS 6
sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the related component or fastener be modified
check when the ignition is first turned on, OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a or replaced with any part except those which
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it front seat passenger, the OCS components are approved by FCA US LLC.
comes on as you drive, have an authorized must function as designed. Do not make any
dealer service the air bag system immedi- modifications to the front passenger seat
ately. components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
 Placing an object on the floor under the the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
from working properly, which may result in dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not accessories may be used.
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
322 SAFETY
WARNING! WARNING!
 Unapproved modifications or service proce-  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its impact bolsters in any way.
related components, seat cover, or cushion  Do not mount any accessories to the knee
may inadvertently change the air bag impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
deployment in case of a frontal collision. stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is Supplemental Side Air Bags
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) (SABs) When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
Standards (CMVSS). Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags seam into the space between the occupant and
 If it is necessary to modify the air bag the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
system for persons with disabilities, (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS and with such a high force that it could injure
contact an authorized dealer. occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats. items are positioned in the area where the SAB
Knee Impact Bolsters
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
knees of the driver and front passenger, and occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
position the front occupants for improved addition to the injury reduction potential WARNING!
interaction with the front air bags. provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
SAFETY 323
Side Impacts Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
WARNING!
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint time than it takes to blink your eyes.  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
Controller (ORC) determines whether the lean against the door or window. Sit upright
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
WARNING! in the center of the seat.
impact event is appropriate, based on the  Occupants, including children, who are up  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
severity and type of collision. The side impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be deployment could cause you to be severely
sensors aid the ORC in determining the seriously injured or killed. Occupants, injured or killed.
appropriate response to impact events. The including children, should never lean on or
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags sleep against the door, side windows, or
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts area where the side air bags inflate, even if
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In they are in an infant or child restraint.
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy  Seat belts (and child restraints where Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
independently; a left side impact deploys the appropriate) are necessary for your protec- wear your seat belt even though you have
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact tion in all collisions. They also help keep 6
Side Air Bags.
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle you in position, away from an inflating Side
damage by itself is not a good indicator of Air Bag. To get the best protection from the NOTE:
whether or not Side Air Bags should have Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
deployed. seat belts properly and sit upright with their trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side backs against the seats. Children must be ment.
collisions, including some collisions at certain properly restrained in a child restraint or
angles, or some side collisions that do not booster seat that is appropriate for the size
impact the area of the passenger compartment. of the child.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
324 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components NOTE: the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all cleaning.
NOTE: collisions. This does not mean something is Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- wrong with the air bag system. deployed. If you are involved in another
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
If you do have a collision which deploys the air collision, the air bags will not be in place to
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
bags, any or all of the following may occur: protect you.
Components listed below:
 The air bag material may sometimes cause
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
WARNING!
 Air Bag Warning Light pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
 Steering Wheel and Column abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or ers cannot protect you in another collision.
 Instrument Panel those you might get sliding along a carpet or Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
 Knee Impact Bolsters gymnasium floor. They are not caused by and the seat belt retractor assemblies
contact with chemicals. They are not perma- replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch
you haven’t healed significantly within a few troller System serviced as well.
 Supplemental Side Air Bags days, or if you have any blistering, see your
 Front and Side Impact Sensors doctor immediately. NOTE:
 Seat Belt Pretensioners  As the air bags deflate, you may see some  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
 Seat Track Position Sensors smoke-like particles. The particles are a rior trim, but they will open during air bag
normal by-product of the process that gener- deployment.
 Occupant Classification System
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-  After any collision, the vehicle should be
If A Deployment Occurs tion. These airborne particles may irritate the taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
The front air bags are designed to deflate skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. Enhanced Accident Response System
immediately after deployment.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. In the event of an impact, if the communication
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If network remains intact, and the power remains
these particles settle on your clothing, follow intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
SAFETY 325
determine whether to have the Enhanced  Automatic transmission gear selector START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
Accident Response System perform the check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
 Horn
following functions: compartment and on the ground near the
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).  Front wiper engine compartment and fuel tank before
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
resetting the system and starting the engine.
 Headlamp washer pump
equipped). After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
NOTE: after performing the reset procedure, the
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni- vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
power.
tion to the START or ON/OFF position and to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid Accident Response System reset.
as long as the battery has power or for draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
15 minutes from the intervention of the for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Enhanced Accident Response System.
the ground near the engine compartment and
 Unlock the power door locks. WARNING!
fuel tank before resetting the system and
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or  Modifications to any part of the air bag 6
any of these other functions in response to the damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. system could cause it to fail when you need
Enhanced Accident Response System: headlights) after an accident, reset the system it. You could be injured if the air bag system
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the by following the procedure described below. If is not there to protect you. Do not modify
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula- you have any doubt, contact an authorized the components or wiring, including adding
tion Door dealer. any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
 Cut off battery power to the:
Enhanced Accident Response System passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
 Engine
Reset Procedure not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
 Electric Motor (if equipped) If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid body structure, or add aftermarket side
Supplement”for additional information. steps or running boards.
 Electric power steering
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident (Continued)
 Brake booster Response System functions after an event, the
 Electric park brake ignition switch must be changed from ignition
326 SAFETY
understanding how a vehicle’s systems To read data recorded by an EDR, special

WARNING! (Continued) performed. The EDR is designed to record data equipment is required, and access to the
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
anyone who works on your vehicle that it or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to law enforcement, that have the special
has an air bag system. record such data as: equipment, can read the information if they
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your  How various systems in your vehicle were have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci- operating; CHILD R ESTRAINTS
dentally or may not function properly if  Whether or not the driver and passenger
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
modifications are made. Take your vehicle safety belts were buckled/fastened; at all times, including babies and children. Every
to an authorized dealer for any air bag  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing state in the United States, and every Canadian
system service. If your seat, including your the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, province, requires that small children ride in
trim cover and cushion, needs to be  How fast the vehicle was traveling. proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
serviced in any way (including removal or
These data can help provide a better you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized understanding of the circumstances in which Children 12 years or younger should ride
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat crashes and injuries occur. properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
accessories may be used. If it is necessary According to crash statistics, children are safer
NOTE:
to modify the air bag system for persons when properly restrained in the rear seats
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
with disabilities, contact an authorized rather than in the front.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
dealer. recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data However, other parties, such as law enforce-
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like of personally identifying data routinely acquired
situations, such as an air bag deployment or during a crash investigation.
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
SAFETY 327
There are different sizes and types of restraints applicable Safety Standards. You should also
WARNING! for children from newborn size to the child make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
In a collision, an unrestrained child can almost large enough for an adult safety belt. where you will use it.
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
NOTE:
force required to hold even an infant on your make sure you have the correct seat for your
lap could become so great that you could not child. Carefully read and follow all the  For additional information, refer to http://
hold the child, no matter how strong you are. instructions and warnings in the child restraint www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
The child and others could be badly injured or Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached call: 1–888–327–4236
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should to the child restraint.  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Before buying any restraint system, make sure Canada’s website for additional information:
that it has a label certifying that it meets all https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint 6
Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight limits Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
of their child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints grown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat
328 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints Children should remain in a forward-facing child

WARNING! seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in to the highest weight or height allowed by the
old or until they reach either the height or front of an air bag. A deploying passenger child seat.
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. front air bag can cause death or serious All children whose weight or height is above the
Two types of child restraints can be used injury to a child 12 years or younger, forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child including a child in a rear-facing child a belt-positioning booster seat until the
seats. restraint. vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
vehicle. It is recommended for children from the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a seat cushion while the child’s back is against
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the not transport a rear-facing child restraint in booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a that vehicle. belt.
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING!
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their Children who are two years old or who have  Improper installation can lead to failure of
infant carrier but are still less than at least two outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat an infant or child restraint. It could come
years old. Children should remain rear-facing can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. loose in a collision. The child could be badly
until they reach the highest weight or height Forward-facing child seats and convertible child injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
allowed by their convertible child seat. seats used in the forward-facing direction are manufacturer’s directions exactly when
for children who are over two years old or who installing an infant or child restraint.
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height (Continued)
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
SAFETY 329
Children Too Large For Booster Seats If the answer to any of these questions was
WARNING! (Continued) “no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
Children who are large enough to wear the
 After a child restraint is installed in the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat long enough to bend over the front of the seat shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
forward or rearward because it can loosen when their back is against the seatback, should and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
the child restraint attachments. Remove use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
the child restraint before adjusting the 5-step test to decide whether the child can use belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat the vehicle’s seat belt alone: the face or neck, move the child closer to the
has been adjusted, reinstall the child center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
restraint. position the seat belt on the child correctly.
the back of the vehicle seat?
 When your child restraint is not in use,
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over WARNING!
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
is still sitting all the way back?
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s the shoulder belt will not protect a child prop- 6
the occupants or seatbacks and cause shoulder between the neck and arm? erly, which may result in serious injury or
serious personal injury. 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, death. A child must always wear both the lap
touching the child’s thighs and not the and shoulder portions of the seat belt cor-
stomach? rectly.
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
330 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Combined Weight of
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower
LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top
Restraint Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Tether
Anchors Only Tether Anchor
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands seating positions may have a top tether
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points seating positions, the seat belt must be used
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There with the top tether anchorage to install the child
are two lower anchorages located at the back of restraint. Please see the following table for
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback more information.
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
LATCH Label
SAFETY 331
LATCH Positions For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position) 6
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
332 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight bined weight of the child and the child restraint
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchorage system to attach the child restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be or forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or for- No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
ward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat man-
ufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s man-
ual for more information.
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints
Can a child seat be installed in the center posi- Two Door Models – N/A with flexible lower anchors in the center posi-
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages tion. The inner anchorages are 18.5 inches
Four Door Models – Yes
from the outboard seating positions? (484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
Can two child restraints be attached using a not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
No
common lower LATCH anchorage? use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
SAFETY 333
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
Yes
back of the front passenger seat? turer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Two Door Models — None
Two Door Models – No Four Door — The center head restraint can be
Can the rear head restraints be removed? removed if it interferes with the installation of
Four Door Models – Yes the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 40.
NOTE: Locating The LATCH Anchorages

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint The lower anchorages are round bars
interferes with the installation of the child 6
that are found at the rear of the seat
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and cushion where it meets the seatback.
the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door They are just visible when you lean
Models). into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
WARNING!
along the gap between the seatback and seat
Always make sure the head restraint is in its cushion. If your vehicle is equipped with
upright position when the seat is to be used Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded anchorage symbols on the seatback, they will
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. 1 — Folded Headrest be located just above the lower anchorages.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its 2 — Child Restraint
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
334 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat, near
the floor.
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models) Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models) some rear-facing child restraints will also be
Four-Door Models: equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
There are tether strap anchorages behind each will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
rear seating position located on the back of the tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models) after it is attached to the anchorage.
seat.
SAFETY 335
Center Seat LATCH move it to its rear-most position to make

WARNING! (Continued) room for the child seat. You may also move
Two-Door Models:
Please see Ú page 335 for typical installa- the front seat forward to allow more room
WARNING! tion instructions. for the child seat.
This vehicle does not have a center seating 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
Always follow the directions of the child
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH child restraint to the lower anchorages in
restraint manufacturer when installing your
anchorages to install a child seat in the cen- the selected seating position.
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
ter of the back seat. will be installed as described here. 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Four-Door Models: To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Ú page 339 for directions to attach a tether
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower Restraint anchor.
attachments in the center seating position. Only If the selected seating position has a 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
install this type of child restraint in the outboard Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) child restraint rearward and downward into
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the the seat. Remove slack in the straps 6
webbing mounted lower attachments can be instructions below. See Ú page 336 to check according to the child restraint
installed in any rear seating position. what type of seat belt each seating position has. manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING! 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps 6. Test that the child restraint is installed
and on the tether strap of the child seat so tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
Never use the same lower anchorage to that you can more easily attach the hooks seat at the belt path. It should not move
attach more than one child restraint. If you or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
are installing LATCH-compatible child
2. Place the child seat between the lower direction.
restraints next to each other, you must use
anchorages for that seating position. If the
the seat belt for the center position. You can How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
second row seat can be reclined, you may
then use either the LATCH anchors or the (ALR) Seat Belt:
recline the seat and/or raise the head
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If When using the LATCH attaching system to
the outboard positions.
the rear seat can be moved forward and install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
(Continued) rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to that are not being used by other occupants or
336 SAFETY
being used to secure child restraints. An unused Installing Child Restraints Using The Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
belt could injure a child if they play with it and Vehicle Seat Belt description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before Child restraint systems are designed to be Retractors (ALR)” Ú page 311 for additional
installing a child restraint using the LATCH secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap information on ALR.
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. Please see the table below and the following
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the sections for more information.
buckled seat belt interferes with the child WARNING!
restraint installation, instead of buckling it Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
 Improper installation or failure to properly Child Restraints In This Vehicle
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
through the child restraint belt path and then
of the restraint. The child could be badly
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
injured or killed.
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
WARNING! or child restraint.
 Improper installation of a child restraint to
The seat belts in the passenger seating
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
positions are equipped with a Switchable
the restraint. The child could be badly
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Two-Door
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
tight around the child restraint so that it is not Models)
installing an infant or child restraint.
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
withstand only those loads imposed by Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no and then letting the webbing retract back into
circumstances are they to be used for adult the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
items or equipment to the vehicle. into the retractor.
SAFETY 337
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Four-Door

Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight Always use the tether anchor when using the
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor seat belt to install a forward facing child
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
child restraint? the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child
back of the front passenger seat?
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
338 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Two Door — None
Two Door Models – No Four Door — The center head restraint can be
Can the rear head restraints be removed? removed if it interferes with the installation of
Four Door Models – Yes the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 40.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-
seat belt against the belt path of the child No
tion with an ALR retractor.
restraint?
NOTE: Installing A Child Restraint With A

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
interferes with the installation of the child (ALR):
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
Child restraint systems are designed to be
the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
Models).
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
 Improper installation or failure to properly
upright position when the seat is to be used Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded secure a child restraint can lead to failure
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. 1 — Folded Headrest of the restraint. The child could be badly
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its 2 — Child Restraint injured or killed.
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
SAFETY 339
1. Place the child seat in the center of the 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
seating position. If the second row seat can If it is locked, you should not be able to pull Tether Anchorage
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/ out any webbing. If the retractor is not
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to locked, repeat step 5. WARNING!
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
moved forward and rearward in the tighten the lap portion around the child car seat to any location in front of the car
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its restraint while you push the child restraint seat, including the seat frame or a tether
rear-most position to make room for the rearward and downward into the vehicle anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
child seat. You may also move the front seat. rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
seat forward to allow more room for the that is approved for that seating position,
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
child seat. located behind the top of the vehicle seat. For
and the seating position has a top tether
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from anchorage, connect the tether strap to the the location of approved tether anchorages in
the retractor to pass it through the belt path anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See your vehicle, see Ú page 330.
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt Ú page 339 for directions to attach a tether
webbing in the belt path. 6
anchor.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you 9. Test that the child restraint is installed
hear a “click.” tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion seat at the belt path. It should not move
tight against the child seat. more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the direction.
shoulder part of the belt until you have
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract 1. Look behind the seating position where
necessary.
back into the retractor. As the webbing you plan to install the child restraint to find
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This the tether anchorage. You may need to
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic move the seat forward to provide better
Locking mode. access to the tether anchorage. If there is
340 SAFETY
no top tether anchorage for that seating

position, move the child restraint to WARNING! (Continued)
another position in the vehicle if one is  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
available. seat, make sure the tether strap does not
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most slip into the opening between the seat-
direct path for the strap between the anchor backs as you remove slack in the strap.
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
Without Center Armrest
where possible, route the tether strap under Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models With Center 1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
the head restraint and between the two Armrest) head restraint to the full down position.
posts. If not possible, lower the head 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback
restraint and pass the tether strap around restraint to the top tether anchorage as and head restraint.
the outboard side of the head restraint. shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models Without
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models) seat to secure a child restraint top tether Center Armrest)
strap.
(Continued)
SAFETY 341
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child TRANSPORTING P ETS position. If the light is either not on during
restraint to the center tether anchorage starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
located on the back of the seat. the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a
about and possibly injured, or injure a
to the child restraint manufacturer’s single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
instructions. Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
SAFETY TIPS are secured by seat belts.
intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE immediately. See Ú page 305 for further
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE I NSIDE THE VEHICLE information.
CARGO AREA. Defroster
Seat Belts
WARNING! Inspect the seat belt system periodically, Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. and place the blower control on high speed. You 6
 Do not leave children or animals inside should be able to feel the air directed against
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
death. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must Floor Mat Safety Information
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a be replaced after a collision if they have been Always use floor mats designed to fit your
collision, people riding in these areas are damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
more likely to be seriously injured or killed. etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt interfere with the operation of the pedal
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Air Bag Warning Light attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
and seat belts. cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat to eight seconds as a bulb check when the your vehicle in other ways.
and using a seat belt properly. ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
342 SAFETY
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fas- driver’s side floor area. To check for inter- re-installed, always properly attach carpet
teners may cause your floor mat to interfere ference, with the vehicle properly parked to the floor and check the floor mat
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals with the engine off, fully depress the accel- fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
and cause a loss of vehicle control. To pre- erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
vent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: present) to check for interference. If your ference with the accelerator, brake, or
floor mat interferes with the operation of clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, It is recommended to only use mild soap
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT 
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and and water to clean your floor mats. After
install your floor mat upside down or turn
place the floor mat in your trunk. cleaning, always check your floor mat has
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on been properly installed and is secured to
fasteners on a regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or by lightly pulling mat.
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR 
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE
existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
Tires
control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that  NEVER place any objects under the floor uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
cannot be properly attached and secured to mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be could change the position of the floor mat
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor and may cause interference with the accel-
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
mat for the specific make, model, and year erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
of your vehicle. (Continued) Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
(Continued) inflation pressure.
SAFETY 343
Lights the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil

WARNING! (Continued) change. Replace as required.
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the  If you are required to drive with the trunk/ CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
controls. Check turn signal and high beam liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
indicator lights on the instrument panel. windows are closed and the climate control WARNING!
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
Door Latches Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
NOT use the recirculation mode.
deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.  If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle vent carbon monoxide poisoning:
with the engine running, adjust your
Fluid Leaks  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
heating or cooling controls to force outside
Check area under vehicle after overnight air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. speed. gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or a closed area, such as a garage, and never
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause The best protection against carbon monoxide sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
should be located and corrected immediately. entry into the vehicle body is a properly running for an extended period. If the 6
maintained engine exhaust system. vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
EXHAUST GAS engine running for more than a short
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
WARNING! period, adjust the ventilation system to
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,  Guard against carbon monoxide with
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for system inspected every time the vehicle is
scious and can eventually poison you. To
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or raised. Have any abnormal conditions
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or connections could permit exhaust fumes to all side windows fully open.
in confined areas any longer than needed seep into the passenger compartment. In
to move your vehicle in or out of the area. addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
(Continued)
344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and an SOS button.
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
on the instrument panel below the climate
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
WARNING!
controls.
continue to operate even though the ignition is ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
placed in the OFF position. the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
NOTE:
bility and assume all risks related to the use
With extended use the Hazard Warning
of the features and applications in this vehi-
Flashers may wear down your battery.
cle. Only use the features and applications
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning authorized by the subscriber Ú page 446.
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
 The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only func-
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard comes as a built-in function. Other Uconnect
Warning Flashers. services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
This is an emergency warning system and it Assist And SOS Buttons
Guardian™ service is active and you are
should not be used when the vehicle is in 1 — Assist Button connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
2 — SOS Button 4G (data) network.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
ASSIST Call SOS call button on the overhead console or

press the cancellation button on the Device
WARNING!
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
centers: the green LED light on the overhead console. the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or 2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and SOS buttons on the overhead console will bility and assume all risks related to the use
you’ll be connected to someone who can turn green once a connection to an SOS of the features and applications in this vehi-
help. Roadside Assistance will know what operator has been made. cle. Only use the features and applications
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi- when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
tional fees may apply for roadside assis- result in an accident involving serious injury
an SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
tance. or death.
system may transmit the following
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – important vehicle information to an SOS NOTE:
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™. operator:
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all Indication that the occupant placed an
 authorized by the subscriber.
other vehicle issues. SOS Call  Once a connection is made between the
 Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.  The vehicle brand vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper- 7
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
SOS Call  The last known GPS coordinates of the voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead vehicle mine if additional help is needed. Once the
console. 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS SOS operator opens a voice connection with
operator through the vehicle audio system the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
NOTE: should be able to speak with you or other
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, to determine if additional help is needed.
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator. will attempt to remain connected with the
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact SOS Call System Limitations
appropriate emergency responders and WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
provide them with important vehicle  The SOS Call system is embedded into the system capabilities.
information and GPS coordinates. vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add SOS or other emergency line operators in
aftermarket electrical equipment to the Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
WARNING! vehicle’s electrical system. This may system calls.
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter- If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous ference that can cause the SOS Call system any of the following may occur at the time the
road conditions or location), do not wait for to fail, never add aftermarket equipment malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
voice contact from an Emergency Services (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data each ignition cycle:
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical  The light located within the ASSIST and SOS
immediately and move to a safe location. system or modify the antennas on your buttons will continuously illuminate red.
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY  The Device Screen will display the following
vehicle’s operable network and GPS POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING message “Vehicle device requires service.
antennas. You could prevent operable DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE Please contact an authorized dealer.”
network and GPS signal reception, which UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
can prevent your vehicle from placing an SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT “Vehicle device requires service. Please
emergency call. An operable network and OPERATE. contact an authorized dealer.”
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
Call system to function properly. system could cause the air bag system to WARNING!
(Continued) fail when you need it. You could be injured  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
if the air bag system is not there to help mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
protect you. the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
(Continued)
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network NOTE:

WARNING! (Continued) congestion  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
 The Occupant Restraint Control module  Weather authorized by the subscriber.
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
instrument panel if a malfunction in any tunnels LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
Warning Light is illuminated, have an WARNING! data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
authorized dealer service the Occupant which can prevent your vehicle from placing
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
Restraint Control system immediately. an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi- data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
bility and assume all risks related to the use GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
of the features and applications in this vehi- system to function properly.
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the cle. Only use the features and applications NOTE:
following factors: when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may Changes or modifications not expressly
 The ignition is in the OFF position
result in an accident involving serious injury approved by the party responsible for compli-
or death. ance could void the user's authority to operate
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
the equipment. 7
 The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash CAUTION! Automatic SOS — If Equipped
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes To avoid damage to the mirror during clean- Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
disconnected during a vehicle crash ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly that can immediately connect you with help in
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Global Positioning Satellite signals are clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Please refer to your provided radio supplement
unavailable or obstructed for complete information.
 Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
 Operator error by the SOS operator
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING!

NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side enough off the road to avoid being hit when
J ACK L OCATION
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull operating the jack or changing the wheel. The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear
far enough off the road to avoid the danger cargo area. To remove jack and tools proceed
of being hit when operating the jack or 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. as follows:
changing the wheel.
3. Apply the parking brake. 1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is 4. Shift the automatic transmission into
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the PARK (P), or a manual transmission into
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. REVERSE (R).
Never put any part of your body under a
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
center where it can be raised on a lift. diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
 Never start or run the engine while the changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
vehicle is on a jack.
 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
Load Floor
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. NOTE:
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level The load floor can be removed for easier access
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. by pulling the load floor directly rearward.
PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING

1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Wheel Blocked
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by SPARE T IRE R EMOVAL

pinching the latch on the left side and
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier,
pulling upward.
remove the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning
the lock bolt counterclockwise with the
#T40 torx head driver and ratchet from the
supplied tool kit.
Removing The Spare Tire
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Hardware Storage Cover Latch WARNING!
3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to loosen the jack from the storage bin. to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle: 7
Unlock Rear Camera Cover  Always park on a firm, level surface as far
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench from the edge of the roadway as possible
turning them counterclockwise. If equipped, before raising the vehicle.
remove the locking lug nut with the lock key  Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
(located in the glove box) turning it counter-  Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
clockwise. automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission to REVERSE.
(Continued)
Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
 Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a Jack Warning Label Assembled Jack And Tools
jack. If you need to get under a raised
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of
vehicle, take it to a service center where it CAUTION!
the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle
can be raised on a lift.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking tube, as shown. Do not raise the vehicle
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated on locations other than those indicated. until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change. 1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
the stored location.
 If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
while the wheel is still on the ground.
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the 3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
ground. Connect the jack handle driver to the
extension, then to the lug wrench.
Front Lifting Point

8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped

end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the counterclockwise, and remove the
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the
jack.
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare 10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum down on the wrench while at the end of the
stability. handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each 7
WARNING! wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 431. If in doubt about the correct
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
tightness, have them checked with a torque
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
Rear Lifting Point wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
service station.
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle. all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel

blocks.
WARNING! CAUTION!
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli- Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
locations. sion or hard stop, could endanger the occu- any other booster source with a system volt-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the
parts and the spare tire in the places pro- battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
spare tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts and
vided. system may occur.
locking lug nut.
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on JUMP STARTING NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
the camera cover by turning the lock
clockwise using the provided #40 torx head If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
driver and ratchet. Then, reinstall the be jump started using a set of jumper cables tions and precautions.
camera cover by slipping it over the and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START
camera/tire carrier until it snaps into place.
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
Supplemental Battery — If Equipped

Lock Bolt Location
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start

WARNING! system, it will be equipped with two batteries
 Only use the positive battery post on the Ú page 163.
main battery to jump start your vehicle. See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
Serious injury or death could result if you
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
attempt to jump start using the supple-
automatic transmission into PARK (P)
mental battery.
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. turn the ignition OFF.
Keep flame or sparks away from the 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any Positive (+) Battery Post Location accessories.
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to NOTE: 3. Pull upward and remove the protective
touch each other. The positive (+) battery post is covered with a cover over the remote positive (+) battery
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access post.
 Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- to the post.
sories contain lead and lead compounds. 4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
Wash hands after handling.
rear of the engine compartment. cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and 7
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery make sure the ignition is OFF.
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast WARNING!
charger” to provide starting.  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
rear of the engine compartment. be injured by moving fan blades.
(Continued)
Positive (+) Battery Post

an accessory bracket or large bolt. The

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! ground must be away from the battery and
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, Failure to follow these procedures could the fuel injection system.
watch bands and bracelets that could result in damage to the charging system of
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. WARNING!
could be seriously injured. Do not connect the jumper cable to the nega-
NOTE:
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can tive (-) post of the discharged battery. The
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
burn your skin or eyes and generate resulting electrical spark could cause the bat-
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
hydrogen gas which is flammable and tery to explode and could result in personal
either vehicle while making connections.
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks injury.
away from the battery. Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the booster battery, let the engine idle a few
WARNING!
discharged vehicle. minutes, and then start the engine in the
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
this could establish a ground connection and
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
personal injury could result. CAUTION!
booster battery.
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging ben-
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
WARNING! battery. efit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
could result in personal injury or property jumper cable to a good engine ground. A 6. Once the engine is started, remove the
damage due to battery explosion. “ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

CAUTION! CAUTION!
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of Accessories plugged into the vehicle power Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
the vehicle with the discharged battery. outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
negative (-) jumper cable from the
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat- off until the pointer drops back into the nor-
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat- mal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the tery life and/or prevent the engine from and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of starting. engine off immediately and call for service.
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
positive (+) jumper cable from the remote
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be an impending overheat condition:
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
serviced by an authorized dealer.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
In any of the following situations, you can The A/C system adds heat to the engine
remote positive (+) post of the discharged reduce the potential for overheating by taking
vehicle. cooling system and turning the A/C off can 7
the appropriate action. help remove this heat.
NOTE:  On the highways — slow down.  You can also turn the temperature control to
If frequent jump starting is required to start your  In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmis- maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
vehicle you should have the battery and sion into NEUTRAL, but do not increase the blower control to high. This allows the
charging system tested at an authorized dealer. engine idle speed. heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases

WARNING! where the transmission will not shift out of
You or others can be badly burned by hot PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from Park Release is available.
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
from under the hood, do not open the hood Release:
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. 2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the manual park release cover,
located above the gear selector, to access Tether Strap
MANUAL PARK RELEASE the release tether strap. 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
WARNING! brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the release lever locks into place in the
the parking brake before activating the Man-
vertical position. The vehicle is now out of
ual Park Release. In addition, you should be
PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the
seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
parking brake only when the vehicle is
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll To Reset The Manual Park Release:
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Acti- Manual Park Release Cover from the “locked” position.
vating the Manual Park Release on an unse-
cured vehicle could lead to serious injury or 3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening 2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever
death for those in or around the vehicle. in the console base. downward and to the right, into its original
position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console, and reinstall the cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE vehicle Ú page 286. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the ESC OFF switch again to CAUTION! (Continued)
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or restore “ESC On” mode.  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to WARNING! REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
clear the area around the front wheels. For than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and damage may result.
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then,
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
and tires. A tire could explode and injure too fast may lead to transmission over-
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels heating and failure. It can also damage the
SECOND gear (2) and REVERSE (R) (with
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
manual transmission), while gently pressing the
than 30 seconds continuously without stop- (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
accelerator. Use the least amount of
ping when you are stuck and do not let any- shifting occurring).
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
one near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
the speed. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
NOTE: CAUTION! disabled vehicle using a commercial towing 7
 For vehicles with automatic transmission: service.
 Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
may lead to transmission overheating and
can only be achieved at wheel speeds of disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans-
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one described Ú page 199.
mission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
minute after every five rocking-motion
than two seconds, you must press the brake
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
 Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Elec- failure during prolonged efforts to free a
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in stuck vehicle.
“Partial OFF” mode, before rocking the
(Continued)
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS

 Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
 Manual Transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
Flat Tow NONE
 Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move If flatbed equipment is not available and the
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow the vehicle Ú page 356. transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
bars and other equipment designed for this towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s CAUTION! on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.  Do not use sling type equipment when NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main towing. Vehicle damage may occur. PARK (P) (for automatic transmissions) or in
structural members of the vehicle, not to gear NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual
 When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State transmissions) Ú page 199.
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
sion components. Damage to your vehicle CAUTION!
must be observed.
may result from improper towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition FOUR W HEEL DRIVE M ODELS the remaining wheels are on the ground).
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC Internal damage to the transmission or
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
position. transfer case will occur if a front or rear
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow wheel lift is used when towing.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
instructions on shifting the automatic (Continued)
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above  Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck (EARS)
requirements can cause severe transmis- vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
sion and/or transfer case damage. injury or death. Accident Response System.
Damage from improper towing is not Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
 This feature is a communication network that
covered under the New Vehicle Limited tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen- takes effect in the event of an impact
Warranty. gaged, causing serious injury. Ú page 324.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is CAUTION!
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
towed with the ignition in the OFF mode. The Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to res-
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
only approved method of towing without the key cue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
to record data that will assist in understanding
fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to towing. You could damage your vehicle. Tow
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
the vehicle. straps are recommended when towing the
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — I F vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.
obstacle Ú page 326. 7
E QUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they
are mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle. Always use an appro-
priately rated tow strap.
360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE On non-instrument cluster display equipped
vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check the engine oil level.
ENGINE instrument cluster odometer and a single chime  Check the windshield washer fluid level.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil will sound, indicating that an oil change is
 Check the tire inflation pressures and look
change indicator system. The oil change necessary.
for unusual wear or damage, rotate at the
indicator system will remind you that it is time to An authorized dealer will reset the oil change first sign of irregular wear.
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. indicator message after completing the
 Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
brake master cylinder, and power steering,
change indicator message will illuminate. This is performed by someone other than an
and fill as needed.
means that service is required for your vehicle. authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
 Check the function of all interior and exterior
Operating conditions such as frequent referring to the steps described under
lights.
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold Instrument Cluster Display for further
ambient temperatures will influence when the information Ú page 111.
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message NOTE:
is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon Under no circumstances should oil change
as possible, within the next 500 miles intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
(805 km). 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed run or idle time is generally only a concern for
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an fleet customers.
oil change is necessary.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter
 Rotate the tires
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
 Inspect exhaust system
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary
 Inspect all door latches for presence of grease; reapply if necessary
NOTE: 8
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first):
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, rear suspension, and replace
X X X X X X X
if necessary
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
X X X X X X X
brakes
Inspect transfer case fluid X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine1 X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine1 X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first):
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler (if equipped) coolant at

X X
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or X X X X X
more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C)
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the follow-
X X
ing: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X 8
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
X X X
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
ambient temperatures will influence when the remove the filter and use a suction gun to
WARNING! “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. remove any residual oil left in the housing or
 You can be badly injured working on or Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, wait about 30 minutes for the oil to drain back
around a motor vehicle. Do only service within the next 500 miles (805 km). into the engine.
work for which you have the knowledge and An authorized dealer will reset the oil change Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
the right equipment. If you have any doubt indicator message after completing the  Check engine oil level
about your ability to perform a service job, scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change  Check windshield washer fluid level
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. is performed by someone other than an
 Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain authorized dealer, to reset the message
wear or damage
your vehicle could result in a component Ú page 111.
 Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
malfunction and affect vehicle handling
NOTE: brake master cylinder, and fill as needed
and performance. This could cause an acci-
Under no circumstances should oil change  Check function of all interior and exterior
dent.
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or lights
12 months, whichever comes first.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the
change indicator system. The oil change
housing when the new filter is installed if the
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
residual oil is not either removed from the
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
housing or enough time has not elapsed to
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil allow the oil to drain back into the engine. When
change indicator message will illuminate. This servicing the oil filter on this engine, carefully
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL

Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
 Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: 8
 Change fuel filter.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if neces-
X X X X X X X
sary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer tow- X X X X X X X
ing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not
assembly. exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,

X X
000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Change transfer case fluid. X
WARNING! ADDITIONAL M AINTENANCE — B6 TO indicator system does not reflect the use of
biofuels.
B20 B IODIESEL
 You can be badly injured working on or  Fuel filter change interval is maintained at
around a motor vehicle. Do only service NOTE: every second oil change. This is especially
work for which you have the knowledge and  Under no circumstances should oil change important with biodiesel usage. 8
the right equipment. If you have any doubt intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or For more information on using biodiesel
about your ability to perform a service job, six months, whichever comes first when Ú page 435.
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. using biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain  The owner is required to monitor mileage for
your vehicle could result in a component B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change
malfunction and affect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3.6L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap— If Equipped
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 11 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
3.0L DIESEL E NGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
CHECKING OIL L EVEL CAUTION! MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine Your vehicle is equipped with a
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
oil must be maintained at the correct level. maintenance-free battery. You will never have
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
could damage your engine.
every fuel stop. The best time to check the required.
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
ADDING W ASHER FLUID WARNING!
warmed up engine is shut off.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
and the rear window washer (if equipped) is
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the
readings. battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
There are four possible dipstick types: clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
 Crosshatched zone. windshield washer solvent only (not radiator or on skin, flush the area immediately with
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid large amounts of water Ú page 352.
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to
a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper  Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
blades; this will help blade performance. Keep flame or sparks away from the
of the range.
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
other booster source with an output greater
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range. system in cold weather, select a solution or 8
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
NOTE: touch each other.
range of your climate. This rating information
Always maintain the oil level within the cross- can be found on most washer fluid containers.  Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
hatch markings on the dipstick. sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is WARNING! Wash hands after handling.
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the Commercial windshield washer solvents are (Continued)
oil level to the high end of the range marking. flammable. They could ignite and burn you.
Care must be exercised when filling or work-
ing around the washer solution.
perform all service operations in an expert

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) manner. Service Manuals are available which
 Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be  Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be include detailed service information for your
equipped with two batteries. Both the main equipped with two batteries. Both the main vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
and the supplemental batteries must be and the supplemental batteries must be attempting any procedure yourself.
disconnected to completely de-energize the disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system. 12 Volt electrical system. NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
 Serious injury or death could result if you do  If the negative battery cables are not systems may void your warranty and could
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how isolated properly it can cause a potential result in civil penalties being assessed against
to properly disconnect, see an authorized power spike or surge in the system, you.
dealer. resulting in damage to essential electrical
components. WARNING!
CAUTION! You can be badly injured working on or
PRESSURE WASHING
 It is essential when replacing the cables on around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high for which you have the knowledge and the
the battery that the positive cable is
pressure washer is not recommended. proper equipment. If you have any doubt
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post. CAUTION! about your ability to perform a service job,
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
negative (-) and are identified on the battery Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the parts and connections however, the pres- ENGINE OIL
terminal posts and free of corrosion. sures generated by these machines is such
that complete protection against water Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine (If
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery ingress cannot be guaranteed. Equipped)
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the For best performance and maximum protection
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast VEHICLE MAINTENANCE under all types of operating conditions, the
charger” to provide starting voltage. An authorized dealer has the qualified service manufacturer only recommend engine oils that
personnel, special tools, and equipment to are API SP/GF-6 certified and meet the
(Continued)
requirements of FCA Material Standard American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Materials Added To Engine Oil
MS-13340. An equivalent full synthetic engine Oil Identification Symbol FCA strongly recommends against the addition
oil can be used if it meets API SP/GF-6 This symbol means that the oil has of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
Certification. If API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil is been certified by the American to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
unavailable then please contact your local Petroleum Institute (API). FCA only product and its performance may be impaired
dealership for recommendation. recommends API Certified engine oils. by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L Engine (If This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Equipped) 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Filters
For best performance and maximum protection CAUTION! Care should be taken in disposing of used
under all types of operating conditions, the engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
manufacturer only recommends engine oils Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
that are API Certified and meet the as the chemicals can damage your engine.
present a problem to the environment. Contact
requirements of FCA Material Standard Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
an authorized dealer, service station or
MS-6395. cle Limited Warranty.
governmental agency for advice on how and
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine Synthetic Engine Oils where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
For best performance and maximum protection You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
under all types of operating conditions, FCA recommended oil quality requirements are met, ENGINE OIL FILTER
recommends engine oils that meet the and the recommended maintenance intervals The engine oil filter should be replaced with a 8
requirements of FCA Material Standard for oil and filter changes are followed. new filter at every engine oil change.
MS-12991, and that are API SN certified and Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the Engine Oil Filter Selection
meet the requirements of FCA LLC. engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
viscosity grade number should not be used. used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality mopar filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
For the proper maintenance intervals Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Ú page 361 for gasoline engines or Follow the recommended maintenance
Ú page 365 for diesel engines. intervals as shown in the Maintenance
Schedule in this section.
NOTE:
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable. 1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.
WARNING!
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
NOTE:
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
filter.
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction sys- 1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
tem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure housing assembly with the engine air
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover cleaner filter inspection surface facing
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
1 — Fasteners downward.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection 2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner fasteners using a suitable tool.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
access the engine air cleaner filter.
mopar filters should be used.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR

Replacement — Diesel Engine FILTER — D IESEL ENGINE
Follow the recommended maintenance The fuel/water separator housing is located
intervals as shown in the Maintenance inside the left frame rail in front of the fuel tank.
Schedule in this section. The best access to this water drain valve is from
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal under the vehicle.
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool. CAUTION!
 Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
when the engine is running.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation priate container.
NOTE: If necessary remove the fuel filter protective

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is cover to access the water drain valve.
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
8
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover housing assembly with the engine air
2 — Fasteners cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover
access the engine air cleaner filter.
fasteners using a suitable tool.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on
recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your
area.
1 — Retainers 1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve If more than two ounces or 60 ml of fuel have
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover been drained, follow the directions for Priming If
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel Ú page 378.
If water is detected in the water separator while filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the
the engine is running, or while the ignition filter housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/ FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT — D IESEL
switch is in the ON position, the “Water In Fuel water; allow the accumulated water to drain. E NGINE
Indicator Light” will illuminate and an audible Leave the drain valve open until all water and
chime will be heard. At this point you should contaminants have been removed. When clear NOTE:
stop the engine and drain the water from the fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu-
filter housing. clockwise. facturer’s filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel
life and reliability. We recommend you use
filter assembly, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
Light” will remain illuminated for approximately
10 seconds. If the water was drained while the CAUTION!
engine was running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
Light” may remain on for approximately three  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
minutes. surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
(Continued)
3. Place drain pan under the fuel filter

CAUTION! (Continued) assembly.
 Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a 4. Open the water drain valve, and let any
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris accumulated water and fuel drain.
could be introduced into the fuel filter
5. Close the water drain valve.
during this action. It is best to install the
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
1. Ensure engine is turned off.

1 — Fuel Filter Cap
2. Remove the fuel filter protective cover to 2 — Socket Adapter
access the fuel filter assembly.
8. Remove the used fuel filter cartridge from
the cap and dispose of according to your
local regulations.
Fuel Filter Assembly 9. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the cap
and housing.
1 — Water Drain Valve
CAUTION!
6. Wipe clean the underside of the filter 8
housing to prevent contamination from Take care when handling the new fuel filter to
entering fuel system during service. prevent contamination from entering the fuel
7. Remove the fuel filter cap and filter from the system.
1 — Retainers housing using a socket. Rotate counter-
10. Lubricate o-ring on the cap with clean
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover clockwise for removal.
engine oil.
11. Install the new fuel filter cartridge onto the  In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
cap.
CAUTION! tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
12. Insert the cap and filter into the housing The starter motor will engage for approxi- tion of your diesel engine.
with clockwise rotation, use a socket to mately 30 seconds at a time. Allow two min-  For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar
tighten. utes between cranking intervals. Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recom-
mended to assist with cold starting.
13. After engine start, verify the fuel filter cap NOTE:
does not leak. The engine may run rough until the air is forced I NTERVENTION REGENERATION
from all the fuel lines. STRATEGY — M ESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT This engine meets all required diesel engine
OF FUEL — DIESEL E NGINE WARNING! emissions standards. To achieve these
WARNING! Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
blending agent. They can be unstable under with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
Do not open the high pressure fuel system certain conditions and be hazardous or explo- system. These systems are seamlessly
with the engine running. Engine operation sive when mixed with diesel fuel. integrated into your vehicle and managed by
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
spray can cause serious injury or death. manages engine combustion to allow the
CAUTION!
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gaso- Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L). line, the use of these fuels can cause dam- or interaction on your part.
2. Push ignition switch twice without your foot age to the fuel system. Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert
on brake to put vehicle in RUN position. This you to additional maintenance required on your
will activate the in tank fuel pump for NOTE:
vehicle or engine.
approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this  Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
Refer to Instrument Cluster Display for further
process twice. negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to
separate water from the fuel, resulting in information Ú page 111.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting
high pressure fuel system corrosion or
procedure Ú page 138.
damage.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
park over materials that can burn. Such mate- disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
rials might be grass or leaves coming into temperature controlled and can start at any
contact with your exhaust system. Do not time regardless of ignition mode. You could
park or operate your vehicle in areas where be injured by the moving fan blades.
your exhaust system can contact anything  You can be badly injured working on or
that can burn. around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID the proper equipment. If you have any Conditions that would require replacement:
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known doubt about your ability to perform a
 Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
simply by the name of its active component, service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
rated from belt body)
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic tent mechanic.
 Rib or belt wear
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. When inspecting accessory drive belts, small  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the two ribs)
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to belt, from rib to rib, are considered normal.  Belt slips
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) These are not a reason to replace a belt.  “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) 8
into harmless nitrogen and water vapor. correct position on pulley)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
For further information Ú page 438.  Belt broken
along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
or severe glazing. rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
WARNING! operation)
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory NOTE:
drive belt with vehicle running. Identify and correct problem before new belt is
(Continued) installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty

component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!
should be carefully inspected for damage and  The air conditioning system contains refrig- Do not use chemical flushes in your air condi-
proper alignment. erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of tioning system as the chemicals can damage
Belt replacement on some models requires the personal injury or damage to the system, your air conditioning components. Such dam-
use of special tools, we recommend having your adding refrigerant or any repair requiring age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. lines to be disconnected should be done by Warranty.
an experienced technician.
AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
For best possible performance, your air WARNING! R–1234yf
conditioner should be checked and serviced by R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
season. This service should include cleaning of cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive tioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can ozone-friendly substance with a low
belt tension should also be checked at this time. global-warming potential. FCA recommends
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the that air conditioning service be performed by an
WARNING!
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Informa- equipment.
cants approved by FCA for your air condition Book for further warranty information.
tioning system. Some unapproved NOTE:
refrigerants are flammable and can  The air conditioning system contains refrig- Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of compressor oil, and refrigerants.
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the personal injury or damage to the system,
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
Refer to Warranty Information Book, lines to be disconnected should be done by
located in your owner’s information kit, for an experienced repairman.
further warranty information.
(Continued)
Cabin Air Filter 5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet
housing. Pull the filter elements out
WARNING! pinching them to the right for clearance.
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in per-
sonal injury. Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that
following procedure to replace the filter: secure the air filter access door to the HVAC Air Filter
housing.
1. Open the glove compartment and remove 6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter
all contents. position indicators pointing in the same
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel direction as removal.
stop and lower the door.
CAUTION!
8
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure

Air Filter Retaining Tabs
retaining tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back easy operation and to protect against rust and Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
into position ensuring you have properly wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
engaged the travel damper. the parts concerned should be wiped clean to out of contact with petroleum products such as
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil engine oil, gasoline, etc.
and grease should be removed. Particular
NOTE:
attention should also be given to hood latching
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
components to ensure proper function. When
depending on geographical area and frequency
performing other underhood services, the hood
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
should be cleaned and lubricated.
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. necessary.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
Travel Dampener The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
1 — Travel Dampener Housing into the lock cylinder.
performance problems are experienced. This
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES inspection should include the following points:
For the proper maintenance intervals, see Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and  Wear or uneven edges
Ú page 361 for gasoline engines or the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft  Foreign material
Ú page 365 for diesel engines. cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will  Hardening or cracking
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
BODY L UBRICATION  Deformation or fatigue
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
Locks and all body pivot points, including such If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated or blade that is damaged.
windshield.
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper Installing The Front Wipers
arm, push the release tab on the wiper 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
CAUTION! blade and while holding the wiper arm with wiper arm is in the full up position.
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back one hand, slide the wiper blade down
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
against the glass without the wiper blade in towards the base of the wiper arm.
the tip of the wiper arm.
place or the glass may be damaged.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the accompanied by an audible click.
full up position. 4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer 8
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
1 — Wiper Blade the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
2 — Wiper Arm 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
3 — Release Tab Rear Wiper Assembly
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate detected inside the vehicle; or when the
wiper blade outward to disengage the wiper underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
blade from the wiper arm. have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle WARNING!
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm Installing The Rear Wiper  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
1 — Wiper Arm 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass. contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
2 — Wiper Blade colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the make you unconscious and can eventually
3. Gently set the arm on the glass. opening on the end of the wiper arm and poison you Ú page 341.
rotate the wiper in to place.
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the
park over materials that can burn. Such
tail gate. materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
EXHAUST SYSTEM not park or operate your vehicle in areas
The best protection against carbon monoxide where your exhaust system can contact
entry into the vehicle body is a properly anything that can burn.
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
CAUTION!
NOTE: COOLING SYSTEM
Intentional tampering with emissions control
 The catalytic converter requires the use of systems can result in civil penalties being WARNING!
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will assessed against you.  You or others can be badly burned by hot
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as In unusual situations involving grossly engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
an emissions control device and may seri- malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching your radiator. If you see or hear steam
ously reduce engine performance and odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst coming from under the hood, do not open
cause serious damage to the engine. overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn the hood until the radiator has had time to
 Damage to the catalytic converter can off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper including a tune-up to manufacturer's cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
operating condition. In the event of engine specifications, should be obtained immediately. hot.
malfunction, particularly involving engine To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- damage: away from the radiator cooling fan when
mance, have your vehicle serviced the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
promptly. Continued operation of your cally and may start at any time, whether the
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
vehicle with a severe malfunction could engine is running or not.
motion.
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle. towing the vehicle. disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is 8
Under normal operating conditions, the components disconnected or removed, such temperature controlled and can start at any
catalytic converter will not require as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged time the ignition is in the ON mode.
maintenance. However, it is important to keep periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper tioning operating conditions. Coolant Checks
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst Check the engine, battery (if equipped),
damage. intercooler (if equipped), and Motor Generator
Unit (MGU) (if equipped) coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or products, as they may not be compatible with
engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if contains visible sediment, have an authorized the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
equipped), and MGU (if equipped) coolant is dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant radiator.
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should (conforming to MS.90032).  This vehicle has not been designed for use
be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh OAT For the proper maintenance intervals, see with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an Ú page 361 for gasoline engines or Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C Ú page 365 for diesel engines. is not recommended.
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any  Some vehicles require special tools to add
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean Selection Of Coolant coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
by gently spraying water from a garden hose For further information Ú page 438. properly could lead to severe internal engine
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
equipped) or the back of the radiator core. NOTE:
to the system please contact an authorized
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other dealer.
Check the engine, battery (if equipped),
intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if equipped) than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine Adding Coolant
cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
damage and may decrease corrosion protec- Your vehicle has been built with an improved
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill cooling system in an emergency, the cooling reducing this extended maintenance period, it
system will need to be drained, flushed, and is important that you use the same engine
NOTE: refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
Some vehicles require special tools to add MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon throughout the life of your vehicle.
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems as possible.
properly could lead to severe internal engine  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
the system please contact an authorized dealer. use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust
Please review these recommendations for according to the temperatures occurring in

using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine the area where the vehicle is operated. WARNING!
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA  Some vehicles require special tools to add  Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
engine coolant (antifreeze): properly could lead to severe internal engine the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
 We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/ damage. If any coolant is needed to be added remove the cap to cool an overheated
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) to the system, please contact an authorized engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) dealer. the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
that meets the requirements of FCA Material  Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- injury, do not remove the pressure cap
Standard MS.90032. mended and can result in cooling system while the system is hot or under pressure.
 Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed  Do not use a pressure cap other than the
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA in an emergency, have an authorized dealer one specified for your vehicle. Personal
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant injury or engine damage may result.
water. Use higher concentrations (not to (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F possible. Disposal Of Used Coolant
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
Cooling System Pressure Cap
authorized dealer for assistance. OAT or HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss proper disposal. Check with your local
deionized water when mixing the water/ of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure authorities to determine the disposal rules for
that engine coolant will return to the radiator 8
engine coolant solution. The use of lower your community. To prevent ingestion by
quality water will reduce the amount of corro- from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery animals or children, do not store ethylene
sion protection in the engine cooling system. tank if so equipped. glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if it to remain in puddles on the ground, clean up
NOTE: there is any accumulation of foreign material on any ground spills immediately. If ingested, seek
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the the sealing surfaces. emergency assistance immediately.
proper level of protection against freezing
Coolant Level Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L The radiator normally remains completely full,
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual so there is no need to remove the radiator/
method for determining that the coolant level is
WARNING! coolant pressure cap unless checking for
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the  Do not open hot engine cooling system. engine coolant freeze point or replacing
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
bottle should be between the ranges indicated the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or As long as the engine operating temperature is
on the bottle. remove the cap to cool an overheated satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in checked once a month.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/ the cooling system. To prevent scalding or When additional engine coolant is needed to
coolant pressure cap unless checking for injury, do not remove the pressure cap maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
engine coolant freeze point or replacing while the system is hot or under pressure. meets the requirements of FCA Material
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.  Do not use a pressure cap other than the Standard MS.90032 should be added to the
As long as the engine operating temperature is one specified for your vehicle. Personal coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be injury or engine damage may result. Cooling System Notes
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the NOTE:
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that engine coolant should be within the OK range When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
meets the requirements of FCA Material between the ADD and FULL range on the kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
Standard MS.90032 should be added to the dipstick. coming from the front of the engine compart-
coolant bottle. Do not overfill. 1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
the engine coolant bottle. rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick. the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant freeze) to enter the radiator.
bottle without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
coolant level on the dipstick.
If an examination of your engine compartment factory engine cooling performance, poor gas wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, mileage, and increased emissions. pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will BRAKE SYSTEM abnormally low, check the system for leaks
soon dissipate. Ú page 442.
In order to ensure brake system performance,
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
all brake system components should be WARNING!
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator inspected periodically. For the proper
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine  Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
maintenance intervals Ú page 361.
coolant needs to be added, the contents of Ú page 442. Using the wrong type of brake
the coolant expansion bottle must also be WARNING! fluid can severely damage your brake
protected against freezing. system and/or impair its performance. The
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
 If frequent engine coolant additions are
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot also identified on the original factory
required, the cooling system should be pres-
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
sure tested for leaks.
in abnormally high brake temperatures, voir.
 Maintain engine coolant concentration at a excessive lining wear, and possible brake
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to  To avoid contamination from foreign matter
damage. You would not have your full braking
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
capacity in an emergency.
corrosion protection of your engine which fluid that has been in a tightly closed
contains aluminum components. Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
 Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in 8
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be a open container absorbs moisture from
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
 Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your immediately if the brake system warning light is may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
keep the front of the condenser clean. the designated marks on the side of the sudden brake failure. This could result in a
 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure collision.
Winter operation. If replacement is ever to clean the top of the master cylinder area (Continued)
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther- before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis- level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
Adding Fluid Drain And Refill

Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the For the proper maintenance intervals
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can level specified above. Ú page 361.
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Selection Of Lubricant Selection Of Lubricant
Brake fluid can also damage painted and Use only FCA recommended fluid Ú page 442. Use only FCA recommended fluid Ú page 442.
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces. TRANSFER C ASE MANUAL T RANSMISSION — IF E QUIPPED
 Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to Fluid Level Check Fluid Level Check
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
components could be damaged, causing the fill hole when the vehicle is in a level The fluid level should be between the bottom of
partial or complete brake failure. This could position. the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 of
result in a collision. an inch (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the
hole.
FRONT/REAR A XLE F LUID
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks level.
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the Frequency Of Fluid Change
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid
Fluid Level Check
becomes contaminated with water, it should be
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch Transfer Case changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
(3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole. fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan.
1 — Fill hole
NOTE: 2 — Drain hole Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
Make sure that the vehicle is level and maintenance intervals Ú page 361.
supported by the axles.
Selection Of Lubricant dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your Selection Of Lubricant
Use only FCA recommended manual transmission fluid level using special service It is important to use the proper transmission
transmission fluid Ú page 442. tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer performance and life. Use only FCA specified
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — I F immediately to have the transmission fluid level transmission fluid Ú page 442. It is important
EQUIPPED checked. Operating the vehicle with an to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct
improper fluid level can cause severe level using the recommended fluid.
Special Additives transmission damage.
FCA strongly recommends against using any NOTE:
special additives in the transmission. Automatic CAUTION! No chemical flushes should be used in any
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an transmission; only the approved lubricant
product and its performance may be impaired authorized dealer immediately. Severe trans- should be used.
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not mission damage may occur. An authorized
add any fluid additives to the transmission. CAUTION!
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may level accurately. Using a transmission fluid other than FCA rec-
adversely affect seals. ommended fluid may cause deterioration in
Fluid And Filter Changes transmission shift quality and/or torque con-
CAUTION! verter shudder Ú page 442.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis- installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
sion as the chemicals can damage your trans-
8
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
mission components. Such damage is not Routine fluid and filter changes are not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
Fluid Level Check
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does any reason.
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
FUSES The fuses protect electrical systems against Power Distribution Center (PDC)
excessive current. The Power Distribution Center is located in the
General Information When a device does not work, you must check engine compartment near the battery. This center
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays.
WARNING!
break/melt. The PDC top cover is labeled with each
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use Also, please be aware that when using power serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size.
an appropriate replacement fuse with the outlets for extended period of time with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never engine off, may result in vehicle battery
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher discharge.
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged. Power Distribution Center Location
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
Blade Fuses
 If a general protection fuse for safety
1 — Fuse Element
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
gearbox system) or steering system blows, element
contact an authorized dealer. 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
Power Distribution Center

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Radiator Cooling Pump (LTR) — If Equipped
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RF HUB)/
F10 – 15 Amp Blue
Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare 8
F14 – – Spare
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Electrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare

F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module
F22 – 10 Amp Red (PCM)/Motor Generator Unit (MGU) WAKE UP/Power Pack
Unit (PPU) WAKE UP
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module
F23 – 10 Amp Red
(ECM)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL
MOD)/Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classifica-
F32 – 10 Amp Red
tion Module (OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module
(DPDM)
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module
F33 – 10 Amp Red
(IRCM)/Airbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power
F34 – 10 Amp Red Steering (EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE
UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP — If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW MOD — If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W — If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MGU Coolant Pump (3.6) — If Equipped
DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC)
F40 – 15 Amp Blue
FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)/
F42 – 10 Amp Red
Spare (Belt Starter Generator) -- If Equipped
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS 8
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller ORC
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC — If Equipped

Digital TV (DSRC)/USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Compass Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Driver Heated Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Pass Heated Seat
F59 – – Spare
Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR
F60 – 15 Amp Blue
WHEEL)
Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor
F61 – 10 Amp Red
(RBSS)
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR Front
F67 – – Spare
F68 – – Spare

Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG) —
F69 – 5 Amp Tan
If Equipped
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG — If Equipped
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module & Auxiliary
F75 – 10 Amp Red Power Module (PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt Starter Generator
(BSG) — If Equipped
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red HEATED MIRRORS
F78 – 10 Amp Red COMP/INTRUSION/SIREN/INTRUSION SENSORS
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 8
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR — If Equipped
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG — If Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT — If Equipped
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR — If Equipped
F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP 2 — If Equipped

F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP — If Equipped
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2 — IF Equipped
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/ Cruise Control
F89 – 10 Amp Red
(CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV)
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP — If Equipped
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 — If Equipped
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 — If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system (CORAX)
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 — If Equipped
F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP — If Equipped
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Condi-
F105 – 10 Amp Red
tioning (HVAC)

F106 50 Amp Red – Cruise Control -PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT — If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 — If Equipped
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT — If Equipped
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP — If Equipped
Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
CAUTION!
 When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
 When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
8
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/
**
Wipe)
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7444NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NALL/WY21WLL
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443LL
Exterior Bulbs
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
License Lamp LED – (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer
or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement Halogen Headlamps 4. Remove the three screws holding the 8
See below steps to replace: headlamp to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 1. Open hood and support using prop rod. 5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as 2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers 6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
atmospheric conditions change to allow the along the top a quarter turn counter- 7. Grab the bulb and rotate a quarter turn
condensation to change back into a vapor. clockwise and remove. counterclockwise.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the 3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at 8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
clearing process. one side and working toward the other.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock Halogen Front Fog Lamp
position. See below steps to replace:
10. Remove connector from bulb. 1. Reach under the vehicle to access the
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and back of the front fog lamp.
push the connector locking tab to the lock 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector
position. from the front fog lamp connector
receptacle.
CAUTION!
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. features and squeeze them together to
Wheel Liner
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb unlock the bulb from the back of the front
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily 2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn fog lamp housing.
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. counterclockwise and remove from
housing. Pull the bulb straight from the 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
socket to replace. opening in the housing and then connect
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a
the replacement bulb.
quarter turn clockwise.
LED Front Side Marker
Front Park/Turn Signal See below steps to replace: CAUTION!
See below steps to replace: 1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access side maker screw and electrical Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
access bulb sockets. connector. life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
front side maker assembly and disconnect
electrical connector. LED Front Fog Lamp
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps
light assembly. they are replaced as an a ssembly.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp 4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter
See below steps to replace: turn counterclockwise, then remove it from
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access the housing.
single retaining screw for tail lamp 5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
assembly. replace.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that
extends upward from the swing gate behind the
Retaining Screw spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the LED
3. Remove the three screws from assembly Assembly from an authorized dealer.
bracket to access bulb sockets. See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier
cover.
Trim Cap
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect
and disconnect electrical connector.
electrical connector, then remove tail lamp
assembly from the vehicle. 8
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab
located inboard behind the lamp housing. Assembly Bracket
License Plate Lamps Tire Markings  European — Metric tire sizing is based on
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps. European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
NOTE: into the sidewall beginning with the section
To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
above. When installing the new bulb, care size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
should be taken to not allow bare skin to come  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
in contact with the bulb. on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
TIRES tires except for the letters “LT” that are
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION molded into the sidewall preceding the size
Tire Markings designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
 Temporary spare tires are designed for
following information: Tire Markings, Tire 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and temporary emergency use only. Temporary
2 — Size Designation high pressure compact spare tires have the
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
3 — Service Description letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
4 — Maximum Load preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
5 — Maximum Pressure
 High flotation tire sizing is based on US
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- design standards and it begins with the tire
ture Grades diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
NOTE:
 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
8
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
EXAMPLE:
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a mini-
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
mum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
8
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
NOTE: 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed rear, and spare tires.
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
Loading
the driver's side door.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
monthly and inflate to the recommended
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
Tire And Loading Information Placard pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 192.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 192.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
Tire And Loading Information Placard combined weight of occupants and cargo
This placard tells you important information should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
about the: Tire and Loading Information placard. The
1. Number of people that can be carried in combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
the vehicle. and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight of NOTE:
Limit— luggage and cargo being loaded on the  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
(1) Locate the statement “The combined vehicle. That weight may not safely from your trailer will be transferred to your
exceed the available cargo and luggage vehicle. The following table shows examples
weight of occupants and cargo should on how to calculate total load, cargo/
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your load capacity calculated in Step 4. luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle's placard. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, vehicle with varying seating configurations
(2) Determine the combined weight of load from your trailer will be transferred and number and size of occupants. This table
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to is for illustration purposes only and may not
the driver and passengers that will be
be accurate for the seating and load carry
riding in your vehicle. determine how this reduces the
capacity of your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the available cargo and luggage load
 For the following example, the combined
driver and passengers from XXX kg or capacity of your vehicle. weight of occupants and cargo should never
XXX lbs. Metric Example For Load Limit exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
(4) The resulting figure equals the
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
available amount of cargo and luggage vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
8
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
WARNING! TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over- Tire Pressure  Safety
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Fuel Economy
handling, and increase your stopping dis- safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
 Tread Wear
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload  Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
them.
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the Tire Inflation Pressures
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
WARNING! of sluggish response or over responsiveness in on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and the steering. driver's side door.
can cause collisions. NOTE: At least once a month:
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
can result in overheating and tire failure. cause erratic and unpredictable steering quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to response. make a visual judgement when determining
cushion shock. Objects on the road and  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may proper inflation. Tires may look properly
chuckholes can cause damage that result cause the vehicle to drift left or right. inflated even when they are under-inflated.
in tire failure. Fuel Economy  Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
affect vehicle handling and can fail resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. CAUTION!
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle Tread Wear
control. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
problems. You could lose control of your resulting in the need for earlier tire valve stem, which could damage the valve
vehicle. replacement. stem. 8
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
to drift to the right or left. comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
jarring and uncomfortable ride. inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The inflation pressure is very important. Increased Tire Repair
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
maximum inflation pressure molded into the be required for high-speed vehicle operation. repaired if it meets the following criteria:
tire sidewall. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
 The damage is only on the tread section of
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
pressures vary with temperature changes. inflation pressures.
 The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi WARNING! inch (6 mm).
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
High speed driving with your vehicle under Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
maximum load is dangerous. The added and additional information.
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter. strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
You could have a serious collision. Do not have experienced a loss of pressure should be
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac- replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph of identical size and service description (Load
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
(120 km/h). Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
Radial Ply Tires be reused.
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi WARNING! Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
this normal pressure build up or your tire 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
pressure will be too low. rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
four. Never combine them with other types of A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
FCA advocates driving at safe speeds and pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits tires.
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be limited driving capabilities and needs to be
driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not These indicators are molded into the bottom of
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
WARNING! the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
driving with underinflated tire condition, please Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to generated by excessive wheel speeds may inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
be reused when driven under run flat mode cause tire damage or failure. A tire could tread wear indicators, the tire should be
14 psi (96 kPa) condition. explode and injure someone. Do not spin your replaced.
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) For further information Ú page 414.
NOTE:
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the Life Of Tire
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. The service life of a tire is dependent upon
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded varying factors including, but not limited to:
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in Tread Wear Indicators  Driving style.
the run flat mode. Tread wear indicators are in the original  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
See the tire pressure monitoring section for equipment tires to help you in determining pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
more information. when your tires should be replaced. to develop across the tire tread. These
Tire Spinning abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
ment.
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than  Distance driven. 8
30 seconds continuously without stopping.  Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
For further information Ú page 357. V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this

WARNING! section. Refer to the Tire and Loading
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced Information placard or the Vehicle Certification  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
after six years, regardless of the remaining Label for the size designation of your tire. The speed rating other than that specified for
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control be found on the original equipment tire proved tires and wheels may change
and have a collision resulting in serious injury sidewall. suspension dimensions and performance
or death. For more information relating to the Load Index characteristics, resulting in changes to
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 405. steering, handling, and braking of your
NOTE: vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well handling and stress to steering and
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
when installing new tires due to wear and tear suspension components. You could lose
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If control and have a collision resulting in
in existing tires.
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with wheel’s specifications match those of the
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
original wheels. your vehicle.
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
Replacement Tires tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
capacity, other than what was originally
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance questions you may have on tire specifications or
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
of many characteristics. They should be capability. Failure to use equivalent
a smaller load index could result in tire
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold replacement tires may adversely affect the
overloading and failure. You could lose
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. control and have a collision.
recommends that you use tires equivalent to
 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
the originals in size, quality and performance
having adequate speed capability can
when replacement is needed. Refer to the
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
For more information, contact an authorized Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
CAUTION! dealer. than what was originally equipped with your
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ- Summer tires do not contain the all season vehicle and should not be operated at
ent size may result in false speedometer and designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
odometer readings. the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
TIRE TYPES safety and handling of your vehicle. for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
All Season Tires — If Equipped WARNING! While studded tires improve performance on
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction surfaces may be poorer than that of
tions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting
levels may vary between different all season non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
tires. All season tires can be identified by the studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
conditions also creates the possibility of loss
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire checked before using these tire types.
of vehicle control.
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED
Snow Tires
and handling of your vehicle. NOTE:
Some areas of the country require the use of
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
Equipped identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire 8
on the tire sidewall. Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
If you need snow tires, select tires further information.
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equivalent in size and type to the
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these original equipment tires. Use snow
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving tires only in sets of four; failure to do
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle so may adversely affect the safety and handling
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F of your vehicle.
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of Full Size Spare — If Equipped
CAUTION! the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin The full size spare is for temporary emergency
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size use only. This tire may look like the originally
not take your vehicle through an automatic designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
car wash with a compact or limited use tem- T, S = Temporary Spare Tire vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle Since this tire has limited tread life, the original limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
may result. equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
opportunity. not the same as your original equipment tire,
designated for temporary emergency use
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
Ú page 197.
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire since the wheel is designed specifically for the opportunity.
And Wheel — If Equipped compact spare tire. Do not install more than Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire one compact spare tire and wheel on the
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the vehicle at any given time.
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
original equipment tire and wheel found on the label located on the limited use spare wheel.
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
WARNING!
This label contains the driving limitations for
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. Compact and collapsible spares are for tem- this spare. This tire may look like the original
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an porary emergency use only. With these equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire spares, do not drive more than 50 mph vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
rotation pattern. (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the is not the same as your original equipment tire,
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped tread wear indicators, the temporary use replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
The compact spare is for temporary emergency spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is follow the warnings, which apply to your opportunity.
equipped with a compact spare by looking at spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
the spare tire description on the Tire and tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Loading Information Placard located on the
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is

WARNING! caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium recommended or select a non-abrasive,
Limited use spares are for emergency use chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on wheels.
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
drive more than the speed listed on the lim- soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh CAUTION!
ited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
and Loading Information Placard located on from corroding and tarnishing. products may damage the wheel's protective
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of finish. Such damage is not covered by the
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the CAUTION! New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
original equipment tire at the first opportunity Avoid products or automatic car washes that soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi- recommended.
so could result in loss of vehicle control. tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes NOTE:
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE may damage the wheel's protective finish. If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi- an extended period after cleaning the wheels
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned cle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom- the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove 8
to maintain their luster and to prevent mended.
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
solution recommended for the body of the When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including vehicle vibration when braking.
vehicle and remember to always wash when the excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
surfaces are not hot to the touch. selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or SNOW TRACTION D EVICES  No other tire sizes are recommended for use
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels with the snow traction device.
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,  Please follow the table below for the recom-
CAUTION! mended tire size, axle and snow traction
the following snow traction devices are
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe- recommended. Follow these recommendations device:
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, to guard against damage.
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
 Snow traction device must be of proper size
permanently damage this finish and such
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle traction device manufacturer.
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Snow Traction Device

Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size (maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Sport Rear 245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
Willy’s Rear LT255/75R17C Autosock
Sahara Rear 255/70R18 Autosock
Rubicon Rear LT285/70R17C Autosock
High Altitude Rear 275/55R20 Autosock
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a

WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) smooth, quiet ride.
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,  Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and For the proper maintenance intervals
Snow) between front and rear axles can large bumps, especially with a loaded Ú page 361. The reasons for any rapid or
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose vehicle. unusual wear should be corrected prior to
control and have a collision.  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry rotation being performed.
pavement. The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
CAUTION!  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s cross” shown in the following diagram.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, instructions on the method of installation,
observe the following precautions: operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
 Because of restricted traction device clear-
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
ance between tires and other suspension
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.  Do not use traction devices on a compact
Broken devices can cause serious damage. spare tire.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Remove the damaged parts of the device The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
before further use. 8
operate at different loads and perform different
 Install device as tightly as possible and steering, handling, and braking functions. For CAUTION!
then retighten after driving about ½ mile these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not These effects can be reduced by timely rotation depends on tires of equal size, type, and cir-
require retightening. of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially cumference on each wheel. Any difference in
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such tire size can cause damage to the transfer
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will case. Tire rotation schedule should be fol-
(Continued)
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, lowed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION significantly from the norm due to its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
variations in driving habits, service under controlled conditions on a
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES practices, and differences in road specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
The following tire grading categories characteristics and climate. Sustained high temperature can cause
were established by the National the material of the tire to degenerate
TRACTION G RADES
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. and reduce tire life, and excessive
The specific grade rating assigned by the The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades temperature can lead to sudden tire
tire's manufacturer in each category is failure. The grade C corresponds to a
shown on the sidewall of the tires on represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under level of performance, which all
your vehicle. passenger vehicle tires must meet
controlled conditions on specified
All passenger vehicle tires must conform under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
government test surfaces of asphalt and
to Federal safety requirements in Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
addition to these grades. represent higher levels of performance
traction performance.
TREADWEAR on the laboratory test wheel, than the
WARNING! minimum required by law.
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire The traction grade assigned to this tire is
WARNING!
when tested under controlled conditions based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
on a specified government test course. lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
For example, a tire graded 150 would teristics. not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
wear one and one-half times as well on tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
the government course as a tire graded TEMPERATURE G RADES in combination, can cause heat buildup and
100. The relative performance of tires possible tire failure.
The Temperature grades are A (the
depends upon the actual conditions of highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
their use, however, and may depart resistance to the generation of heat and
STORING THE VEHICLE CAUTION!

WARNING! If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
or surge in the system, resulting in damage to
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
essential electrical components.
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades. If you are storing your vehicle for more than
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, 3 weeks, we recommend that you take the
watch bands and bracelets that could following steps to minimize the drain on your
Battery Cable Disconnect
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You vehicle's battery:
could be seriously injured. 1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
 Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
 Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be  If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start
3 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
equipped with two batteries. Both the main system then disconnect both the main and
4 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
and the supplemental batteries must be supplemental negative battery cables.
disconnected to completely de-energize the  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out NOTE:
12 Volt electrical system. of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or  You must isolate the supplemental battery
 Serious injury or death could result if you do more, run the air conditioning system at idle connection point, as well as the main battery
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how terminal from the post, as shown in the 8
to properly disconnect, see an authorized high blower setting. This will ensure image, to fully de-energize both batteries for
dealer. adequate system lubrication to minimize the storage. If assistance is needed to discon-
possibility of compressor damage when the nect the battery system, see an authorized
system is started again. dealer.
 If assistance is needed to disconnect the  Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery
battery system, see an authorized dealer. Sensor (IBS), or your Stop/Start system may
not function for up to 24 hours, due to the IBS
being set into learn mode.
BODYWORK  Insects, tree sap and tar  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
AGENTS  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals Cleaning Headlights stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
that make roads passable in snow and ice and Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
those that are sprayed on trees and road  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
and fog lights that are lighter and less
surfaces during other seasons are highly buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside out the paint finish.
headlights.
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and CAUTION!
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
must be followed.
and other extreme conditions will have an materials such as steel wool or scouring
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and To minimize the possibility of scratching the powder that will scratch metal and painted
underbody protection. lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping surfaces.
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
The following maintenance recommendations  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, removal of paint and decals.
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
What Causes Corrosion? material to clean the lenses. Special Care
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
removal of paint and protective coatings from drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
your vehicle. Washing riage at least once a month.
The most common causes are:  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash  It is important that the drain holes in the
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the trunk be kept clear and open.
 Stone and gravel impact
panels completely with water.
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in  Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
the paint, touch them up immediately. The the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may CAUTION!
cost of such repairs is considered the respon- damage interior trim. Failure to follow these cautions may cause
sibility of the owner.  Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching interior water damage, stains, or mildew of
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision agents on top material, as damage may the top material:
or similar cause that destroys the paint and result.  Do not run a fabric top through an auto-
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired  Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down matic car wash. Window scratches and wax
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs and dry on the paint, leaving a streak. build-up may result.
is considered the responsibility of the owner.  After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top,  It is recommended that the top be free of
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, always make sure it is completely dry before water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such lowering. opening a door or lowering a window while
materials are well packaged and sealed.  Be especially careful when washing the the top is wet may allow water to drip into
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, windows by following the directions for “Care the vehicle’s interior.
consider mud or stone shields behind each of Fabric Top Windows.”
wheel.  Use care when washing the vehicle, water
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent, pressure directed at the weather strip seals
 Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, interior.
touch up paint to match the color of your use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
vehicle. equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the  Careless handling and storage of the 8
entire top, but support the top from underneath. removable roof panels may damage the
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models seals, causing water to leak into the
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of
vehicle’s interior.
interior trim and top, follow these precautions: cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean
water. Remember to allow the top to dry before  The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
 Do not run a fabric top through an automatic erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
lowering it.
car wash. Window scratches and wax can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
build-up may result. interior.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows  Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
CAUTION! off-road driving will have an impact on plastic
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic
 Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes windows which can be scratched unless special retainer operation. Even normal on-road
in washing stations. Wash the vehicle only care is taken by following these directions: driving and vehicle washing will eventually
by hand using neutral pH detergents; dry it impact window plastic retainer operation. To
 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust.
with a wet chamois leather. Abrasive prod- maintain ease of use of the window plastic
Instead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton
ucts and/or polishes should not be used for retainers, each window plastic retainer
cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean
cleaning the car. Bird droppings must be should be cleaned and lubricated regularly.
water, and wipe across the window, not up
washed off immediately and thoroughly as Clean them with a mild soap solution and a
and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window
the acid they contain is particularly aggres- small brush. Cleaning products are available
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
sive. through an authorized dealer.
plastic windows without scratching. It
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle  Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
 removes fine scratches to improve visibility
under trees; remove vegetable resins and provides UV protection to help prevent tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
immediately as, when dried, it may only be yellowing. remove and may damage the windows.
possible to remove them with abrasive
products and/or polishes, which is highly
 When washing, never use hot water or INTERIORS
anything stronger than a mild soap. Never
inadvisable as they could alter the typical use solvents such as alcohol or harsh CARPET S AFETY I NFORMATION
opaqueness of the paint. cleaning agents. Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
 Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for  Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then Only use carpet that does not interfere with the
cleaning the front windshield and rear wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean operation of the pedal assemblies. Only operate
window; dilute it min. 50% with water. Only cloth. the vehicle when the carpet is securely
use pure windshield washer fluid when  When removing frost, snow or ice, never use attached by the grommets so it cannot slip out
strictly necessary due to outside tempera- a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm of position and interfere with the pedal
ture conditions. water only if you must clean the window assemblies or impair safe operation of your
quickly. vehicle in other ways.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

CARPET R EMOVAL
Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
 If operating the vehicle without carpet in  ONLY install carpet designed to fit your
place the floor may become hot, and there vehicle. NEVER install carpet that cannot 1. Remove the front grommets.
is a risk of burns. be properly attached and secured to your
 An improperly attached, damaged, folded, vehicle. If the carpet needs to be replaced,
or damaged grommets may cause your only use a FCA approved carpet for the
carpet to interfere with the accelerator, specific make, model, and year of your
brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle.
vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach your re-installed, always properly attach carpet
carpet using the grommets. to the floor and check that the floor mat
 ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
slide into the driver’s side floor area when Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
Front Carpet
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. 1 — Grommets
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle 2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
control.
 NEVER place any objects under the carpet 8
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the carpet and
may cause interference with the acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
Front Carpet Pulled Away

3. Remove the grommets under the front seat.

First for the rear carpet and then the front
carpet.
Rear Underside Of Front Seat Front Seat And Floor

1 — Harness 1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split 2 — Carpet Split
Front And Rear Carpet Split 5. Finally open the carpet split around seat 6. When reinstalling carpet please perform
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the bracket and then remove the last two these steps in reverse order making sure
carpet split and then pull out the rear edge grommets. that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
and slide the carpet to the front (do not B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
remove the harness).
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models): 4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat carpet split around the rear seats brackets. 1. Remove the rear seats.
(one left and one right). 2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and one right). First the grommet from the side
open the carpet split around the front seats carpet and then the rear carpet.
brackets.
Under Rear Seat

1 — Carpet Split
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform

Side Carpet
these steps in reverse order making sure
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle 1 — Grommet
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
1 — Carpet Split B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat 8
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and one right).
(one left and one right). First the grommet
for the cargo carpet and then the rear
carpet.
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and 4. When reinstalling carpet please perform
open the carpet split around the front seats these steps in reverse order making sure
brackets. that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap

Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right).
Under Rear Seat 2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the
1 — Carpet Split carpet split around the seat belt attachment
2 — Rear Carpet and under the center seat bracket.
Pull Carpet To The Rear 3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and
1 — Carpet Split the side support and then pull the carpet out.
2 — Rear Carpet
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform

these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat Under Rear Seat
(one left and one right). 1 — Carpet Split
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the 2 — Grommets
carpet split around the seat belt Rear Load Floor 3 — Rear Carpet
attachment. 1 — Side Supports
2 — Load Floor
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform 3. When reinstalling carpet please perform Seat Belt Maintenance
these steps in reverse order making sure these steps in reverse order making sure Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets. B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets. weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models): Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
1. Remove the side grommet (one left and 1. Remove the side grommet and then the
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
one right). lower one (left and right).
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top 2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top soft cloth.
flange, then all around the perimeter and flange, then all around the perimeter and
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
open the carpet split around the seat belt open the carpet split around the seat belt
or if the buckles do not work properly.
attachment. attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform WARNING!
these steps in reverse order making sure A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a colli-
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect
B-pillar, console, and refasten grommets. the belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric semble or modify the system. Seat belt 8
upholstery and carpeting. assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retrac-
WARNING! tor, torn webbing, etc).
Inside Sidewall
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur-
1 — Top Flange
poses. Many are potentially flammable, and if
2 — Grommet
used in closed areas they may cause respira-
3 — Side Carpet
tory harm.
PLASTIC AND C OATED PARTS LEATHER SURFACES CAUTION!

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
for leather upholstery.
CAUTION! Ketone based cleaning products to clean
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by leather upholstery, as damage to the uphol-
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small stery may result.
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated damage the leather upholstery and should be GLASS SURFACES
surfaces of the interior may cause perma- removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
nent damage. Wipe away immediately. soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
 Damage caused by these type of products commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
may not be covered by your New Vehicle soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
Limited Warranty. cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
solvents, detergents, or ammonia- based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
Lenses NOTE: instruments that may scratch the elements.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to transfer more so than darker colors. The leather Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
avoid scratching the plastic. is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
may be used, but do not use high alcohol on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
431
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
application, greater pedal force required to slow
on the left front corner of the A-pillar, visible Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
from outside of the vehicle through the Warning Light. 130 Ft-Lbs
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
windshield. (176 N·m)
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
vehicle will be much greater than that required mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
with the power system operating. loose particles.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
59 Ft-Lbs
Vehicle Identification Number the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed M14 x 1.50 22 mm
(80 N·m)
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
NOTE: bolts should be torqued using a properly **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate. calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
9
deep wall socket.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
432 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt 2.0L E NGINE
located on the swing gate. torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
This engine is designed to meet all
properly seated against the wheel.
emission requirements, and provide
WARNING! satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-quality
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to 2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
follow this warning may result in personal “premium” gasoline will allow these engines to
injury. operate to optimal performance. This increase
in performance is most noticeable in hot
Wheel Mounting Surface
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE weather or other heavier load conditions, such
While operating on gasoline with the required as while towing.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound 3.6L E NGINE
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/ This engine is designed to meet all
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
bolt (do not insert it halfway). emissions regulations and provide
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
satisfactory fuel economy and
of gasoline with an octane number lower than
performance when using high-quality
recommended octane can cause engine failure
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such 2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you gasoline will not provide any benefit over
experience these symptoms, try another brand “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Torque Patterns
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 433
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Problems that result from using gasoline
Detergent Gasoline Retailers. containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
Many areas of the country require the use of
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning gasoline containing methanol are not the
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
agents should be avoided. Many of these responsibility of FCA and may void or not be
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
materials intended for gum and varnish covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle removal may contain active solvents or similar DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL
emissions and improve air quality. ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
VEHICLES
The use of reformulated gasoline is Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
recommended. Properly blended reformulated GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
gasoline will provide improved performance Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline (E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
and durability of engine and fuel system with oxygenates such as ethanol. content may void the New Vehicle Limited
components. Warranty.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL CAUTION!
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing metha- E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain nol, or gasoline containing more than 15% these symptoms:
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may  Operate in a lean mode
recommended. Using gasolines that have these result in starting and drivability problems,
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
additives will help improve fuel economy, damage critical fuel system components,
 Poor engine performance
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indi-  Poor cold start and cold drivability
performance.
cator Light to illuminate. Please observe  Increased risk for fuel system component 9
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
pump labels as they should clearly communi- corrosion
Gasoline contains a higher level of
cate if a fuel contains greater than 15% etha-
detergents to further aide in
nol (E-15).
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM MMT is prohibited in Federal and California

CAUTION! (Continued)
MODIFICATIONS reformulated gasoline.
FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS  The use of fuel additives, which are now
Modifications that allow the engine to run on being sold as octane enhancers, is not
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid recommended. Most of these products
CAUTION!
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the contain high concentrations of methanol.
engine, emissions, and fuel system Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehi-
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
components. Problems that result from running cle’s performance:
mance problems resulting from the use of
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
may void or not be covered under the New Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
Vehicle Limited Warranty. impair engine performance and damage under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT I N GASOLINE the emissions control system.
NOTE:
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni- Intentional tampering with the emissions
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic control system can result in civil penalties being
additive that is blended into some gasoline to converter to overheat. If you notice a assessed against you.
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
provides no performance advantage beyond your engine may be out of tune or malfunc- FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
gasoline of the same octane number without tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service Federal law requires that you must fuel this
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
spark plug life and reduces emissions system assistance.
fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
performance in some vehicles. FCA (Continued)
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
recommends that gasoline without MMT be (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of the emissions control system.
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM
(formerly known as the American Society for
Testing and Materials) specification D-975  Commercially available fuel additives are not
Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the
CAUTION! necessary for the proper operation of your
vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains diesel engine.
or -7°C), or is required to operate at on, DO NOT START engine before you drain  No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid be used where extended arctic conditions
periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or engine damage Ú page 375. (-10°F or -23°C) exist.
dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel
fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel DIESEL F UEL SPECIFICATIONS BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS
gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
This diesel engine has been developed to take
ASTM specification D975 is recommended for
advantage of the high energy content and
WARNING! use with your diesel engine. If frequent
generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
operation with Biodiesel blends that are
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) is desired, the
blending agent. They can be unstable under diesel fuels.
maintenance schedule is subject to shorter
certain conditions and hazardous or explo-
NOTE: intervals.
sive when mixed with diesel fuel.
 If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gaso- The oil and filter change along with fuel filter
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. line on your diesel vehicle, do not start the replacement is subject to shorter intervals
To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the engine. Damage to the engine and fuel when operating your engine on biodiesel
accumulated water from the fuel/water system could occur. Please call an autho- greater than 5%. Do not use biodiesel greater
separator using the fuel/water separator drain rized dealer for service. than 20%.
provided on the fuel filter housing. If you buy  A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6%
good quality fuel and follow the cold weather ASTM specification D-975 may be used with and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you 9
advice above, fuel conditioners should not be your diesel engine without any adjustments understand and comply with these
required in your vehicle. If available in your to regular service schedules. requirements Ú page 365.
area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may
offer improved cold-starting and warm-up
performance.
meet Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting

CAUTION! CAUTION! ASTM specification D-7467:
Failure to comply with Oil Change require- In the event that the vehicle is filled with bio-  Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel diesel and not used for more than a month, D-975 and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting
blends between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) will the fuel should either be used up by driving ASTM specification D-6751
result in premature engine wear. Such wear is (up to quarter tank) and filled with standard
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War- diesel blends with less than 5% that is nor- Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
ranty. mally available. This will help prevent the fuel Within Six Months Of Manufacture
filter clogging and potential damage to the Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable fuel injection system due to degraded bio- can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
resources typically derived from animal fat, diesel, which is not covered by the New Vehi- produced to approved ASTM standards, if
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) cle Limited Warranty. stored properly, provides for protection against
base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or fuel oxidation for up to six months.
SOME) base). Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which Temperatures Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Mopar
require that you understand and adhere to the Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient Approved Fuel Filter Elements
following requirements if you use blends of temperatures, which may pose problems for Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20). both storage and operation. Precautions can be water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar
There are no unique restrictions for the use of necessary at low ambient temperatures, such filtration system is designed to provide
B5. as storing the fuel in a heated building or a adequate fuel water separation capabilities.
heated storage tank, or using cold temperature
CAUTION! Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
additives.
Use of blends greater than 20% is not
Required Oil Change Interval
approved. Use of blends greater than 20% Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been
can result in engine damage. Such damage is Standards observed with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War- The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. oil must not exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is
ranty. Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the met your oil change interval must be
following specifications may be blended to maintained with in the suggested schedule. The
regular use of biodiesel between 6% and 20% biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter 16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
requires intervals shorter than the outlined replacement intervals should be every second occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure
10,000 miles (16,000 km)and must not exceed oil change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles to comply with these Oil Change and fuel filter
the suggested schedule. When routinely (25,750 km). requirements for vehicles operating on
operating on biodiesel between 6% and 20%, oil biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in prema-
NOTE:
and filter replacement intervals must not ture engine wear. Such wear is not covered by
Under no circumstances should oil change
exceed 8,000 Miles (12,875 km) or six months, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The engine
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
which ever comes first. may suffer severe damage if operated with
6 months, if regular operation occurs with 6% -
concentrations of biodiesel higher than 20%.
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals 20% biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances
The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel should fuel filter replacement intervals exceed
filter change intervals. When operating on every second oil change and must not exceed
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 17.5 Gallons 66 Liters
Four Door Models 21.5 Gallons 81 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 18.3 Gallons 69 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.1 Gallons 19.3 Liters 9
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 9 Quarts 8.5 Liters
US Metric
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine 10.3 Quarts 9.7 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler 3.2 Quarts 3.0 Liters
3.6L Engine 11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) 1.9 Quarts 1.8 Liters
3.6L Battery Coolant 2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent

We recommend you use Mopar API SP/GF-6 Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-30 engine oil can be
used if it meets API SP/GF-6 Certification. If API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine is unavailable then please contact a local dealership for recommenda-
tion.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn-
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol. 9
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other  This vehicle has not been designed for use
than specified Organic Additive Technology with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
result in engine damage and may decrease engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech- mended.
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
(Continued)

Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar that
Engine Oil — 3.0L Diesel Engine meets FCA Material Standard MS-12991 and the API SN engine oil cate-
gory is required.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Diesel Engine Using a fuel filter that does not meet the FCA filtration and water separat-
ing requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of
Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid dam-
age to the emissions control system. For most year-round service, Num-
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Diesel Engine ber 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will
provide good performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5%
biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine. 9
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no
greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided
the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has
Diesel Exhaust Fluid — 3.0L Diesel Engine been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certi-
fied to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API
Front Axle Differential
GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M200 Sales Code DRZ)
GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF) GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a
friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
443
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  Owner's name and address
 Owner's telephone number (mobile, home
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
and office)
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT be happy with our products and services.  Authorized dealer name
All work to be performed may not be covered by  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Warranty service must be done by an
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
of your vehicle's service history. This can often They know your vehicle the best, and are most
P.O. Box 21–8004
provide a clue to the current problem. concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
PREPARE A L IST Phone: (877) 426-5337
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
special tools, and the latest information to FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
the specific work you want done. If you've had
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
an accident or work done that is not on your P.O. Box 1621
timely manner.
maintenance log, let the service advisor know. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
This is why you should always talk to an
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
If you list a number of items and you must have some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to (800) 387-9983 French
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the the general manager or owner of the authorized MEXICO
situation with the service advisor and list the dealer. They want to know if you need
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
items in order of priority. At many authorized assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US Sante Fe C.P. 05109 10
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a LLC's Customer Assistance center. Mexico, D. F.
rental, it is advisable to make these Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
arrangements when you call for an appointment. center should include the following information: Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
444 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
FCA Caribbean LLC You may have purchased a service contract for
authorized dealer has also made a major
P.O. Box 191857 a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
San Juan 00919-1857 of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Phone: (877) 426-5337 the ownership experience.
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
Fax: (787) 782-3345 extended protection plans authorized, WARNING!
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED only), some of its constituents, and certain
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
(TDD/TTY) Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions vehicle components contain, or emit, chemi-
To assist customers who have hearing and an Owner Identification Card in the mail cals known to the State of California to cause
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) If you have any questions about the service tive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing contract, call the manufacturer's Service tained in vehicles and certain products of
or speech impaired customer, who has access Contract National Customer Hotline at component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call known to the State of California to cause can-
in the United States, can communicate with the (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 cer and birth defects, or other reproductive
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-2479. French). harm.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
require assistance can use the special needs contract you may have purchased from another
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY manufacturer. If you require service after the
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a expires, please refer to the contract documents,
Bell Relay Service operator. and contact the person listed in those
documents.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 445
WARRANTY INFORMATION Safety Administration (NHTSA) in immediately. Canadian customers who

addition to notifying FCA US LLC. wish to report a safety defect to the
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it Canadian government should contact
to this vehicle and market. Refer to may open an investigation, and if it finds Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
www.mopar.com/om for further information. that a safety defect exists in a group of Investigations and Recalls at
Use this QR code to access your vehicles, it may order a recall and 1-800-333-0510 or go to
digital experience. remedy campaign. However, NHTSA wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
cannot become involved in individual PCDB-BDPP.
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the either the website or the phone numbers listed
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at below.
and factory filled fluids are available from an 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: Service Manuals
authorized dealer. They are recommended for 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and www.safercar.gov; or write to: a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
maintain its original condition. Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey system, and/or components and is written in
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, straightforward language with illustrations,
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other diagrams, and charts.
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND information about motor vehicle safety Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
WASHINGTON, D.C. from http://www.safercar.gov. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
If you believe that your vehicle has a I N C ANADA
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. 10
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
defect that could cause a crash or cause If you believe that your vehicle has a problems on computer-controlled vehicle
injury or death, you should immediately safety defect, you should contact the systems and features. They show exactly how to
inform the National Highway Traffic Customer Service Department find and correct problems, using step-by-step
446 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,

proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
GENERAL INFORMATION 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
tools and equipment. The following regulatory statement applies to all
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
Owner's Manuals brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
vehicle:
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC mettre le fonctionnement.
with the assistance of service and engineering
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
Economic Development Canada license-exempt La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
LLC vehicles.
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the siguientes dos condiciones:
To access your Owner's Information online, visit following two conditions:
www.mopar.com/om 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
1. This device may not cause harmful cause interferencia perjudicial y
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s interference, and
Information, visit: 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
2. This device must accept any interference cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
 www.techauthority.com (US)
received, including interference that may pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Or cause undesired operation.
Call Tech Authority toll free at: NOTE:
 1-800-890-4038 (US)
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR Changes or modifications not expressly
d`Innovation, Science and Economic approved by the party responsible for compli-
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Development applicables aux appareils radio ance could void the user’s authority to operate
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée the equipment.
aux deux conditions suivantes:
447
INDEX
 Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal ............. 87 Maintaining Your Air Bag System.............. 325 Apple CarPlay ....................................... 252, 256
 Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Maintenance ............................................ 325 Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 290
Position ........................................................... 69 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light............. 313 Audio Settings ............................................... 236
 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Transporting Pets ..................................... 341 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 210
Phone ............................................................243 Air Bag Light................................122, 313, 341 Auto Down Power Windows ..............................68
 Raising The Soft Top ................................. 80 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................44
 Removing The Soft Top ............................. 83 Filter) ............................................................ 374 Automatic Door Locks ......................................29
 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 380 Automatic Headlights .......................................50
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ......................... 45 Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 380 Automatic High Beams.....................................50
 WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................445 Air Conditioner System ................................. 380 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............59
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................60, 381 Automatic Transmission................................ 149
A Air Conditioning System ...................................59 Adding Fluid .............................................. 391
About Your Brakes .........................................431 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................60 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 391
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Air Filter ........................................................ 374 Fluid Change............................................. 391
Control) ................................................ 168, 170 Air Pressure Fluid Level Check...................................... 391
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............386 Tires ......................................................... 411 Fluid Type ........................................ 391, 442
Adding Fuel .......................................... 187, 188 Alarm Gear Ranges ............................................. 150
Additives, Fuel ...............................................433 Arm The System ..........................................24 Special Additives ...................................... 391
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................250 Disarm The System .....................................25 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 153
Air Bag Security Alarm ....................................24, 125 AutoPark ....................................................... 135
Air Bag Operation ......................................315 Alterations/Modifications Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........64
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 313, 316 Vehicle.........................................................11 Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................64
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 324, 359 Android Auto ........................................ 252, 254 Auxiliary Switches ............................................66
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................359 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 386, 437 Axle Fluid....................................................... 442
Front Air Bag ................................... 314, 316 Disposal ................................................... 387 Axle Lock .............................................. 159, 160
If Deployment Occurs ................................324 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 284 11
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................322 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 125
448
B Caps, Filler Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 433

Battery ................................................. 123, 371 Fuel .......................................................... 187 Cleaning
Charging System Light...............................123 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 368 Wheels ...................................................... 417
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 17 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 387 Climate Control
Belts, Seat .....................................................341 Car Washes................................................... 422 Automatic ....................................................54
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................293 Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 343 Manual ........................................................57
Bluetooth Cargo Area Cover .......................................... 105 Cold Weather Operation ................................ 137
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Cargo Load Floor........................................... 105 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 416
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................245 Cargo Tie-Downs ........................................... 105 Connected Services ...................................... 257
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................382 Carpeting ...................................................... 425 Connected Services FAQ ............................... 275
B-Pillar Location.............................................408 CD ................................................................. 238 Connected Services Features ....................... 261
Brake Assist System ......................................285 Cellular Phone .............................................. 281 Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 259
Brake Control System ....................................285 Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 403 Connected Services, Introduction ................. 257
Brake Fluid .......................................... 389, 442 Certification Label......................................... 192 Connector
Brake System ...................................... 389, 431 Chains, Tire ................................................... 418 UCI ...............................................................62
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................431 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 405 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .............62
Fluid Check ...............................................389 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Console ............................................................62
Master Cylinder .........................................389 Light)............................................................. 132 Floor ............................................................62
Parking ......................................................144 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 341 Contract, Service ........................................... 444
Warning Light ............................................122 Checks, Safety .............................................. 341 Controls ........................................................ 229
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................149 Child Restraint .............................................. 326 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 387
Bulb Replacement ............................... 400, 401 Child Restraints Cooling System ............................................. 385
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 343, 400 Booster Seats ........................................... 329 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 386
Bumper End Cap Removal .............................202 Child Seat Installation .............................. 338 Coolant Level ............................................ 388
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 335 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 437
C Infant And Child Restraints....................... 328 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 387
Camera, Rear ................................................184 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 333 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 386
Capacities, Fluid ............................................437 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 330 Inspection ........................................ 385, 388
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 328 Points To Remember ................................ 388
Seating Positions ...................................... 330 Pressure Cap ............................................ 387
449
Radiator Cap .............................................387 Disposal Emergency

Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 387 In Case Of ................................................. 344
(Antifreeze) ........................ 386, 437, 438 Disturb .......................................................... 249 SOS Emergency Call ................................. 344
Corrosion Protection ......................................422 Door Ajar .............................................. 123, 124 Emergency Brake .......................................... 144
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............ 168, 170 Door Ajar Light ..................................... 123, 124 Emergency, In Case Of
Cruise Light ................................ 130, 131, 132 Door Frame ......................................................97 Jacking...................................................... 348
Customer Assistance .....................................443 Installation ..................................................97 Jump Starting ........................................... 352
Customer Programmable Features................211 Removal ......................................................97 Tow Hooks ................................................ 359
Cybersecurity .................................................210 Door Locks Emission Control System Maintenance......... 132
Automatic ....................................................29 Engine ........................................................... 368
D Doors ...............................................................25 Air Cleaner ................................................ 374
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 49 Removal ............................................... 30, 32 Block Heater .................................... 138, 143
Dealer Service ...............................................372 Removal, Front ............................................30 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 143
Defroster, Windshield ....................................341 Removal, Rear .............................................32 Checking Oil Level .................................... 371
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............................. 52 Drag & Drop .................................................. 227 Compartment .........................368, 369, 370
Deleting A Phone ...........................................245 Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter............ 375 Compartment Identification ....368, 369, 370
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................132 Driver Memory Presets ................................. 235 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 438
Diesel Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............................34, 35 Cooling...................................................... 385
Display Messages .....................................118 Driving .......................................................... 201 Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 343
Diesel Fuel .....................................................434 Fails To Start............................................. 137
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................434 E Flooded, Starting ...................................... 137
Bulk Storage Of .........................................189 Electric Brake Control System....................... 285 Fuel Requirements .......................... 432, 437
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................378 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 284 Idling ......................................................... 141
Dimmer Switch Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 285, 293 Jump Starting ........................................... 352
Headlight..................................................... 50 Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................45 Oil ...........................................372, 437, 438
Dipsticks Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........64 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 368
Oil (Engine) ................................................371 Electrical Power Outlets ...................................64 Oil Filter .................................................... 373
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................357 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 286 Oil Reset ................................................... 113 11
Disc Drive ......................................................238 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 123 Oil Selection............................372, 373, 437
Disconnecting ................................................245 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 373
450
Overheating ...............................................355 Fluid Level Materials Added ....................................... 433

Starting .....................................................134 Manual Transmission ............................... 390 Methanol .................................................. 433
Enhanced Accident Response Fluid Level Checks ........................................ 390 Octane Rating .................................. 432, 438
Feature ................................................ 324, 359 Brake ........................................................ 389 Requirements .................................. 434, 437
Ethanol ..........................................................433 Engine Oil ................................................. 371 Specifications .................................. 435, 438
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................................343 Fluid, Brake .................................................. 442 Tank Capacity ........................................... 437
Exhaust Gas Cautions....................................343 Fog Lights ..................................................... 402 Fueling ................................................. 187, 188
Exhaust System ................................... 343, 384 Fog Lights, Service ........................................ 402 Fuses ............................................................ 392
Exterior Lights .........................................49, 343 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat .............................37
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................34 G
F Folding Rear Seats...........................................36 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................45
Fabric Care ....................................................423 Folding Windshield ....................................... 100 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................... 187, 188
Fabric Top ......................................................423 Forward Collision Warning ............................ 297 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 432
Family Alerts ..................................................274 Four Wheel Drive .......................................... 154 Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 433
Filters Operation ................................................. 154 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 433
Air Cleaner.................................................374 Shifting ..................................................... 154 Gauges
Air Conditioning ..................................60, 381 System ..................................................... 154 Voltage...................................................... 139
Engine Fuel ...............................................375 Four Wheel Drive Operation .......................... 157 Gear Ranges ........................................ 146, 150
Engine Oil ........................................ 373, 438 Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 344 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 430
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................373 Freedom Panels ...............................................90 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 193
Flashers Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 357 GVWR ............................................................ 192
Hazard Warning.........................................344 Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 390
Turn Signal ................................................343 Fuel ...................................................... 432, 434 H
Turn Signals ........................... 131, 402, 403 Adding ............................................. 187, 188 Hard Top ..........................................................68
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 50 Additives ................................................... 433 Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal  ..............87
Flat Tire Changing ................................ 404, 415 Clean Air ................................................... 433 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 344
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 404, 415 Ethanol ..................................................... 433 Head Restraints ...............................................40
Flooded Engine Starting ................................137 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 187 Headlights
Fluid Capacities .............................................437 Filter ......................................................... 375 Automatic ....................................................50
Fluid Leaks ....................................................343 Gasoline ................................................... 432 Bulb Replacement .................................... 401
451
Cleaning ....................................................422 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 430 L

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 50 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ................. 392 Lane Change Assist..........................................51
Lights On Reminder..................................... 50 Interior And Instrument Lights .........................51 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 307
Passing........................................................ 50 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 424 Latches ......................................................... 343
Replacing ..................................................401 Interior Lights...................................................51 Hood ......................................................... 104
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 45 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................52 Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 343
Heated Seats ................................................... 38 Intervention Regeneration Strategy .............. 378 Life Of Tires ................................................... 413
Heated Steering Wheel .................................... 34 Inverter Light Bulbs ........................................... 343, 400
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Power ..........................................................65 Lights ............................................................ 343
Switch .............................................................. 50 Air Bag ....................................122, 313, 341
Hill Descent Control .......................................288 J Automatic Headlights ..................................50
Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................288 Jack Location ................................................ 348 Brake Assist Warning................................ 288
Hill Start Assist ..............................................290 Jack Operation .............................................. 349 Brake Warning .......................................... 122
Hitches Jacking Instructions ...................................... 349 Bulb Replacement ........................... 400, 401
Trailer Towing ............................................195 Jump Starting ............................................... 352 Center Mounted Stop ............................... 403
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 45 Cruise .....................................130, 131, 132
Hood Prop ......................................................104 K Daytime Running .........................................49
Hood Release ................................................104 Key Fob Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................50
Arm The System ..........................................24 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
I Disarm The System .....................................25 Indicator ............................................... 124
Ignition ............................................................ 19 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............18 Exterior .............................................. 49, 343
Switch ......................................................... 19 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Fog............................................................ 402
In Case Of Emergency ...................................344 Entry) ...............................................................17 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 344
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................... 44 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Headlights ................................................ 401
Instrument Cluster .........................................107 Entry) ...............................................................18 High Beam ...................................................50
Descriptions ..............................................131 Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................26 High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................50
Display ......................................................111 Passive Entry ...............................................26 Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 288
Engine Oil Reset ........................................113 Keys .................................................................16 Interior .........................................................51 11
Menu Items ...............................................113 Replacement ...............................................18 Lights On Reminder .....................................50
452
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......126 Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Modifications/Alterations
Park...........................................................130 Position  .....................................................69 Vehicle .........................................................11
Passing........................................................ 50 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 382 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 300
Rear Servicing ...........................................403 Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 431 Mopar Parts .................................................. 445
Rear Tail Lamps ........................................403 Luggage Carrier ............................................ 105
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................123 N
Security Alarm ...........................................125 M New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 143, 144
Service ............................................ 400, 401 Maintenance ....................................................94
Side Marker...............................................403 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 371 O
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...............300 Maintenance Schedule ........................ 360, 364 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 305
Traction Control .........................................288 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)............. 432, 438
Turn Signal ................................................343 Engine) ................................................ 126, 133 Off Road Pages ............................................. 281
Turn Signals ........................... 131, 402, 403 Manual Accessory Gauges..................................... 283
Warning Instrument Cluster Park Release ............................................ 356 Drivetrain .................................................. 282
Descriptions ................................ 124, 131 Service ..................................................... 445 Pitch And Roll ........................................... 283
Load Floor, Cargo ..........................................105 Manual Transmission .......................... 145, 390 Status Bar................................................. 282
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................117 Fluid Level Check ..................................... 390 Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 373
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................117 Lubricant Selection ......................... 391, 442 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 373
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............117 Shift Speeds ............................................. 146 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 124
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............117 Media Mode.................................................. 238 Oil Reset ....................................................... 113
Loading Vehicle .............................................192 Methanol ...................................................... 433 Oil, Engine ............................................ 372, 438
Tires ..........................................................408 Mirrors .............................................................44 Capacity .................................................... 437
Locking Automatic Dimming .....................................44 Checking ................................................... 371
Axle ................................................. 159, 160 Electric Powered ..........................................45 Dipstick..................................................... 371
Locks Electric Remote ...........................................45 Disposal .................................................... 373
Automatic Door ........................................... 29 Heated.........................................................45 Filter ................................................ 373, 438
Child Protection ........................................... 29 Outside ........................................................45 Filter Disposal ........................................... 373
Power Door.................................................. 26 Rearview......................................................44 Identification Logo .................................... 373
Low Tire Pressure System .............................300 Vanity ..........................................................44 Materials Added To................................... 373
Pressure Warning Light............................. 124
453
Recommendation ................... 372, 373, 437 Operation ....................................................94 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Synthetic ...................................................373 Pinch Protect ...............................................94 Neutral (N)............................................ 201
Viscosity ....................................................437 Quarter Window Removal ............................96 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 433
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................132 Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 442 Refrigerant .................................................... 380
Operating Precautions ...................................132 Power Top Quarter Windows ............................96 Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 258
Operator Manual Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 310 Release, Hood............................................... 104
Owner's Manual ........................................445 Preparation For Jacking ................................ 348 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 306
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 45 Presets ......................................................... 235 Remote Control
Overheating, Engine ......................................355 Pretensioners Starting System ...........................................20
Seat Belts ................................................. 310 Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ...265, 276
P Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 266
Paddle Shifters ..............................................153 R Remote Features, Starting ................... 265, 277
Paint Care ......................................................422 Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 412 Remote Keyless Entry
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 387 Arm The Alarm .............................................24
Phone  .....................................................243 Radio Disarm The Alarm ........................................25
Parking Brake ................................................144 Presets ..................................................... 235 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............18
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................179 Radio Controls .............................................. 229 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 228
Passive Entry ................................................... 26 Radio Mode .................................................. 229 Remote Start (Diesel) .......................................23
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................227 Radio Operation ................................... 229, 281 Remote Start (Gas) ..........................................20
Pets ...............................................................341 Radio Remote Controls ................................. 228 Remote Starting
Phone Mode ..................................................241 Raising The Soft Top  .................................80 Exit Remote Start Mode ...............................22
Placard, Tire And Loading Information...........408 Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 390 Uconnect Customer Programmable
Power Rear Camera................................................. 184 Features ..................................................22
Brakes .......................................................431 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 296 Uconnect Settings .......................................22
Door Locks .................................................. 26 Rear ParkSense System ............................... 179 Remote Starting System ...........................20, 23
Inverter........................................................ 65 Rear Swing Gate ........................................... 104 Removable Doors......................................30, 32
Mirrors......................................................... 45 Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................53 Front ............................................................30
Steering.....................................................163 Recreational Towing ..................................... 199 Rear .............................................................32 11
Windows ...................................................... 67 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 200 Removable Top ................................................94
Power Sliding Top ............................................ 94 Removing The Soft Top  .............................83
454
Replacement Bulbs .......................................400 Child Restraints ........................................ 326 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................18
Replacement Keys........................................... 18 Energy Management Feature ................... 311 Sentry Key Replacement ..................................18
Replacement Tires.........................................414 Extender ................................................... 310 Service Assistance ........................................ 443
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................445 Front Seat............................... 305, 307, 308 Service Contract ............................................ 444
Restraints, Child ............................................326 Inspection................................................. 341 Service Manuals ........................................... 445
Restraints, Head .............................................. 40 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 308 Settings, Audio .............................................. 236
Roadside Assistance ........................... 266, 276 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 309 Shifting .......................................................... 148
Roll Over Warning ............................................ 10 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 307 Automatic Transmission .................. 148, 149
Roof Type Carrier ...........................................105 Operating Instructions .............................. 308 Manual Transmission ............................... 145
Rotation, Tires ...............................................419 Pregnant Women ...................................... 310 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Pretensioners ........................................... 310 Case Neutral (N) ................................... 200
S Rear Seat ................................................. 307 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Safety ............................................................227 Reminder.................................................. 306 Case Neutral (N) ................................... 201
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................341 Seat Belt Extender.................................... 310 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 307
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................342 Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 310 Side Step Removal ........................................ 202
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................445 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 309 Signals, Turn ..................... 131, 343, 402, 403
Safety Features .............................................227 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 429 Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 231
Safety Information, Tire .................................404 Seats ...............................................................34 Favorites ................................................... 233
Safety Tips .....................................................341 Adjustment ..................................................34 Replay ....................................................... 232
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................343 Fold And Tumble Rear .................................37 SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Satellite Radio ...............................................231 Heated.........................................................38 Browse in SXM.......................................... 234
Saved Radio Stations ....................................235 Height Adjustment .......................................35 Favorites ................................................... 233
Schedule, Maintenance ....................... 360, 364 Rear Folding ................................................34 Replay ....................................................... 232
Seat Belt Reminder .......................................123 Tilting...........................................................34 Smart Watch ................................................. 274
Seat Belts ............................................ 305, 341 Security Alarm.........................................24, 125 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 418
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................309 Arm The System ..........................................24 Snow Tires .................................................... 415
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......309 Disarm The System .....................................25 Soft Top.....................................................68, 77
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Selec - Speed Control ................................... 291 Soft Top Windows ............................................77
Anchorage .............................................309 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 438 SOS Call ............................................... 261, 275
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............311 Send & Go ........................................... 267, 276 Spare Tires ..................................349, 415, 416
455
Spark Plugs ...................................................438 Storage .............................................. 62, 77, 96 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 411
Specifications Behind the Seat...........................................62 Life Of Tires .............................................. 413
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................................438 Storage, Vehicle ............................................ 421 Load Capacity ........................................... 408
Oil ..............................................................438 Store Radio Presets ...................................... 235 Pressure Monitoring System
Speed Control Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 421 (TPMS) ......................................... 127, 300
Accel/Decel ...............................................170 Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 357 Quality Grading ......................................... 420
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................174 Sun Roof ..........................................................94 Radial ....................................................... 412
Cancel .......................................................170 Sway Bar Disconnect Replacement ............................................ 414
Resume .....................................................170 Electronic ................................................. 161 Rotation .................................................... 419
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................170 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 293 Safety .............................................. 404, 410
Starting ................................................ 134, 137 Swing Gate, Rear .......................................... 104 Sizes ......................................................... 405
Automatic Transmission .................. 134, 138 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 373 Snow Tires ................................................ 415
Button ......................................................... 19 System, Remote Starting .................................20 Spare Tires .............................349, 415, 416
Cold Weather ............................................137 Spinning ................................................... 413
Engine Block Heater ........................ 138, 143 T Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 413
Engine Fails To Start .................................137 Telescoping Steering Column ..........................33 Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 431
Manual Transmission ................................134 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............59 To Open Hood ............................................... 104
Remote ....................................................... 20 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................. 105 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 196
Starting And Operating ..................................134 Tilt Steering Column ........................................33 Top
Starting Procedures ............................. 134, 137 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 408 Dual .............................................................68
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ............137 Tire Markings ................................................ 404 Hard .............................................................68
Steering ........................................................... 33 Tire Safety Information ................................. 404 Power Sliding ...............................................94
Power ........................................................163 Tires ......................... 342, 410, 415, 416, 420 Removable ..................................................68
Tilt Column .................................................. 33 Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 413 Soft ..............................................................68
Wheel, Heated............................................. 34 Air Pressure .............................................. 410 Tow Hooks
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 33 Chains ...................................................... 418 Emergency ................................................ 359
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................228 Changing .................................................. 348 Towing .........................................193, 195, 357
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......228 Compact Spare......................................... 416 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 357 11
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 271, 277 General Information ............... 410, 415, 416 Recreational ............................................. 199
Stop/Start............................................ 163, 166 High Speed ............................................... 412 Weight ...................................................... 195
456
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................199 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phonebook Download ............................... 246
Trac-Lok Phone ................................................... 250 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............... 249
Rear Axle ...................................................159 Uconnect Settings .......................................22 Power-Up .................................................. 252
Traction Control .............................................293 Uconnect App ............................................... 259 Recent Calls.............................................. 248
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................293 Uconnect Phone .................................. 243, 245 Redial ....................................................... 250
Trailer Towing ................................................193 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — To Remove A Favorite ............................... 247
Hitches ......................................................195 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 249 Toggling Between Calls ............................. 249
Minimum Requirements............................196 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 248
Trailer And Tongue Weight .............. 195, 196 No Call Currently In Progress................ 248 Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .. 250
Wiring ........................................................198 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 252 Voice Command ....................................... 250
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................195 Call Continuation ...................................... 250 Uconnect Settings
Trailer Weight ................................................195 Call Controls ............................................. 247 Customer Programmable
Transfer Case ................................................390 Call Termination ....................................... 250 Features ................................. 22, 26, 211
Fluid ..........................................................442 Cancel Command ..................................... 243 Passive Entry Programming .........................26
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ............ 154, 157 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Uconnect System .......................................... 225
Maintenance .............................................390 Or Audio Device After Pairing ............... 245 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 420
Transmission .................................................149 Help Command......................................... 243 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Automatic ........................................ 149, 391 Join Calls .................................................. 250 Connector ........................................................62
Fluid ..........................................................442 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOME-
Maintenance .............................................391 Favorite ................................................ 246 LINK®) — IF EQUIPPED  ..............................45
Manual ......................................................145 Making A Second Call While Current Call Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 309
Shifting ......................................................148 Is In Progress ....................................... 249
Transporting Pets ..........................................341 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 247 V
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................413 Natural Speech......................................... 243 Vanity Mirrors ...................................................44
Turn Signals ................................ 131, 402, 403 Operation ................................................. 242 Vehicle Finder ...................................... 269, 276
Overview ................................................... 241 Vehicle Health Alert....................................... 272
U Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Vehicle Health Report ................................... 272
UCI Connector.................................................. 62 Phone ................................................... 243 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 431
Uconnect Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Vehicle Loading .................................... 192, 408
Phone Call Features ..................................247 Device .................................................. 245 Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 372
457
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 11 Water Separator Windshield Defroster .................................... 341

Vehicle Notifications ......................................272 Diesel Fuel................................................ 375 Windshield Washers .............................. 52, 371
Vehicle Storage .............................................421 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 417 Fluid.......................................................... 371
Voice Command ............................42, 254, 256 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 417 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 382
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 42 Wi-fi............................................................... 270 Windshield Wipers ...........................................52
Wind Buffeting .................................................68 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 382
W Window Fogging ...............................................60 Wipers, Rear ....................................................53
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Window Storage ...............................................77
Descriptions) .................................................126 Windows ..........................................................67
Warnings, Roll Over ......................................... 10 Power ..........................................................67
Warranty Information .....................................445 Windshield
WARRANTY INFORMATION  ......................445 Folding...................................................... 100
Washers, Windshield .....................................371
Washing Vehicle ............................................422
11
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
used in substitution therefore. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by comply with all local laws.
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s convenient reference source for common questions.
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
use public transportation.
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING!
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
2 02 1 WRAN GL ER
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
202 1 W RA N G L E R
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
21_JL_OM_EN_USC
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
Second Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

2021 Jeep Wrangler 46

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2021 Jeep Wrangler 46

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Jeep Wrangler 46

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 02 1 WRAN GL ER

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................107 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................134 4

INTRODUCTION DOORS .................................................................. 25 MIRRORS ..............................................................44

CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 275 SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Door Open Warning Light 1

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

White Indicator Lights Blue Indicator Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

FRONT DOOR REMOVAL Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

Open Wiring Harness Door Check (Detached)

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

REAR DOOR REMOVAL (F OUR-DOOR WARNING! (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

5. Unplug the wiring connector. STEERING WHEEL

Door Check (Attached)

To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

MANUAL A DJUSTMENT FRONT S EATS WARNING!

Adjustment Bar Location

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Using The Retention Straps Removing The Rear Seat

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

For information on use with the Remote Start

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEAD R ESTRAINTS on the head restraint. The release button does

 Head restraints should never be adjusted NOTE:

Front Head Restraints Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models